C220 Owners Manual PDF

Owner's Manual
C-Class
Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Symbols
* Optional equipment
G Warning
H Environmental note
! Possible vehicle damage
i Tip
E Instruction
ee Continuation symbol
( e page) Page reference
Display Display in the multi-function
display

Thank you for choosing Mercedes- The technical documentation team at
Benz. DaimlerChrysler AG wishes you safe and
Before you drive off, familiarise yourself pleasant motoring.
with your Mercedes-Benz and read the i You can also get to know the major fea-
Owner's Manual. This will help you to ob- tures of your C-Class in the interactive Owner's
tain the maximum pleasure from your ve- Manual on the Internet at:
hicle and to avoid endangering yourself www.mercedes‑benz.de/betriebsanlei-
and others. tung
Items of optional equipment are marked
with an asterisk *. The equipment in your
vehicle may vary, depending on the model,
country specifications and availability.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
vehicles to the state of the art and there-
fore reserves the right to introduce
changes in design, equipment and techni-
cal features at any time. You cannot,
therefore, base any claims on the data, il-
lustrations or descriptions in this Owner's
Manual.
The Owner's Manual, Brief Instructions
and the Service Booklet belong with the
vehicle. You should always keep them in
the vehicle and pass them on to the new
owner if you sell the vehicle.
Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre if you have any questions.

Contents
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Practical advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Index
7 Air distribution Anti-lock braking system

Setting (Thermatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 see ABS
7G‑TRONIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Setting (Thermotronic) . . . . . . . . . 165 Anti-theft alarm system
A Air filter see ATA
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Display message (luxury multi- Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 253 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Display message (luxury multi- Display message (multi-function ASSYST PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 246 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 ATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Display message (multi-function Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Switching off the alarm . . . . . 71, 266
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . 226, 228 Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Audio
Acceleration Driver's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 On-board computer (luxury mul-
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Driver's knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 132
Accident Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 AUTO lights
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Display message (luxury multi-
Active Light System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 How the airbags work . . . . . . . . . . . 52 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 250
Adaptive brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warn- Display message (multi-function
Additional speedometer ing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Activating/deactivating (on- Sidebags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
board computer, luxury multi- System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Automatic transmission
function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 136 Windowbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Changing gear yourself . . . . . . . . . 113
Additional turn signal (exterior Air-conditioning system Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
mirrors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 see Thermatic, Thermotronic Emergency running mode . . . . . . . 270
ADVANCED AGILITY package Airflow Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
with sports mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Setting (Thermatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Manoeuvring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
ADVANCED AGILITY package Setting (Thermotronic) . . . . . . . . . 165 Oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
with sporty driving mode Air-recirculation mode One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . 113
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Program selector button . . . . . . . . 115
Thermotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Releasing the parking lock man-
Antifreeze concentration . . . . . . . . . 333 ually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
3
Index
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . 112 Belt tensioners Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Shift ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Display message (luxury multi-
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 247
Working on the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 116 Bio-diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Display message (multi-function
Axle load, maximum permissible . . 325 Bi-xenon bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Bonnet Brake lamp
B
Display message (luxury multi- Display message (multi-function
Ball coupling function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 245 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Folding in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Display message (multi-function Brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Folding out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Adaptive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Display message (luxury multi-
Battery Bonnet release lever function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 251
Changing (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Brake system
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Boot Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Check lamp (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . 280 Brakes
Check lamp (KEYLESS GO key) . . . . 79 Opening (automatically) . . . . . . . . . 81 Display message (luxury multi-
Checking (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Opening/closing (manually) . . . . . . 80 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 247
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Boot lid Display message (multi-function
Display message (luxury multi- Display message (luxury multi- steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
function steering wheel) . . . 247, 254 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 245 Bulbs
Display message (multi-function Display message (multi-function Changing the front . . . . . . . 284, 286
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . 238, 243 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Changing the rear . . . . . . . . 284, 289
Maintenance (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . 301 Brake Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284- 285
Reconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284- 285
Removing/fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Brake Assist
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 C
see BAS
Belt force limiters Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . 218
4
Index
Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Display message (multi-function

Plastic trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . 230, 238
Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Suitable positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Mixture ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Child-proof locks Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
CD player/CD changer Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Operation (on-board computer, Side windows (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Cooling with air dehumidifica-
luxury multi-function steering Children tion
wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 In the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Central locking Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Thermotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Automatic (on-board computer, Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Cornering lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 101- 102
luxury multi-function steering COC documents (EC CERTIFI- Cornering lights
wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 CATE OF CONFORMITY) . . . . . . . . . . 328 Display message (luxury multi-
KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78- 79 Cockpit function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 249
Central locking/unlocking button . . 80 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 24, 26 Display message (multi-function
Central unlocking Collapsible wheel steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78- 79 Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Display message (luxury multi-
Centre console Constant headlamp mode function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 236
Lower section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 see Daytime driving lamps Display message (multi-function
Upper section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Changing a wheel Convenience opening/closing Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
see Flat tyre feature
D
Child seat Air-recirculation mode (Thermatic) 159
Automatic recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Air-recirculation mode Date
Automatic recognition (malfunc- (Thermotronic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Entering (on-board computer,
tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 multi-function steering wheel) . . . 124
Display message (luxury multi- Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Setting (on-board computer,
function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 236 Display message (luxury multi- luxury multi-function steering
Display message (multi-function function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 248 wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
5
Index
Daytime driving lamps Display message (multi-function Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

On-board computer (luxury mul- steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . 232, 237 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 138 Opening (from the inside) . . . . . . . . 79 Driving tips
Daytime driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Door control panel Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . 115
Display message (luxury multi- Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 DVD Audio/Video
function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 253 Drinks holder Operation (on-board computer,
Display message (multi-function see Cup holder luxury multi-function steering
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Driver's airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Demisting Driver's door
E
Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Unlocking (KEYLESS GO) . . . . . . . . 79
Thermotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Driver's knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 e mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Diesel Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Easy-entry feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Driving safety system . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Easy-entry/exit
Low outside temperatures . . . . . . 195 ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 On-board computer (luxury mul-
Diesel engine Adaptive brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 68 ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 139
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Easy-exit feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 EBV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 EBV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . 98, 285 ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Display message (luxury multi-
Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Driving system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 248
Display message (luxury multi- ADVANCED AGILITY package Display message (multi-function
function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 250 with sports mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Display message (multi-function Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Electrical/electronic equipment
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Hill start assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Symmetrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Electronic brake-power distribu-
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 tion
Door Driving tip see EBV
Automatic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Electronic Stability Program
Display message (luxury multi- Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 see ESP
function steering wheel) . . . 245, 255 Driving on wet roads . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Electronic Traction Support
Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 see ETS
6
Index
Emergency engine starting . . . . . . . 306 Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Folding in (on-board computer,

Emergency key element Display message (luxury multi- luxury multi-function steering
Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 254 wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Emergency locking Display message (multi-function Folding in/out (automatically) . . . . 91
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Folding in/out (electrically) . . . . . . . 91
Emergency release Filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Fuel filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Parking position . . . . . . . . . . . . 92- 93
Emergency running mode Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . 270 ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Emergency unlocking Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . 69 Exterior view
Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Display message (luxury multi- Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 function steering wheel) . . . 234, 246
F
Engine Display message (multi-function
Running irregularly . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . 226, 228 Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Starting problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Trailer stabilising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Starting with KEYLESS GO . . . . . . 109 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 260 Flat tyre
Starting with the key . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 MOExtended run-flat system . . . . 300
Stopping with KEYLESS GO . . . . . 111 Exterior lighting Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 291
Stopping with the key . . . . . . . . . . 111 Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . 285 TIREFIT kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Licence plate lighting . . . . . . . . . . 285 Floormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Engine compartment Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . 285 Fog lamps (extended range) . . . . . . 102
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Parking lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Engine diagnostic warning lamp . . . 262 Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Frequencies
Engine electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Exterior mirror parking position Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92- 93 Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Exterior mirrors Front bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284- 285
Engine oil Additional turn signals . . . . . . . . . 285 Front foglamp
Checking the oil level (auto- Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Display message (multi-function
matic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) . . . . . 91 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Checking the oil level (dipstick) . . 197
7
Index
Front foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 285 Fuse box Heating

Display message (luxury multi- Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 see Thermatic, Thermotronic
function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 252 Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . 218
Front-passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Hill start assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
I
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
G Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Display message (luxury multi-
function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 248 Gearshift program Incandescent bulbs
Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 see Bulbs
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts . . . . 313 Indicator and warning lamp
Vegetable oil methyl ester . . . . . . 194 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Brakes (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 328- 329 Gross vehicle weight, maximum Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Fuel filler flap permissible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Engine diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Emergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 260
H
Fuel filter LIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Display message (multi-function Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 100 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF . . . 63, 258
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Head restraint Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Fuel line Adjusting (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . 84- 85 Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Adjusting (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 263
Fuel remaining NECK-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Indicator and warning lamps . . . . . 259
Calling up (on-board computer, Removing (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Indicator lamp
luxury multi-function steering Resetting triggered head re- see Indicator and warning lamp
wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 straints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fuel tank Headlamp flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 On-board computer (luxury mul-
Display message (multi-function Headlamp mode (automatic) . . . . . . . 98 ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 135
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Headlamp range control . . . . . . . . . 100 Overview (luxury multi-function
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Headlamps steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 34
Fuse allocation chart . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Overview (multi-function steer-
Cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 ing wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 32
Misted up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
8
Index
Selecting the language (on- Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 111
board computer, luxury multi- Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 118
function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 136 Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
L
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
K Lamps
Intelligent Light System . . . . . . . . . . 102
Display message (luxury multi- Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 see Indicator and warning lamp
function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 252 Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . 283 Language
Display message (multi-function Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Selecting (on-board computer,
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Display message (luxury multi- luxury multi-function steering
On-board computer (luxury mul- function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 254 wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 138 Display message (multi-function Lashing eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . 232, 244 Licence plate lamp
Automatic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76- 77 Display message (luxury multi-
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 252
On-board computer (luxury mul- Modifying the programming . . . . . . 76 Display message (multi-function
ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 138 Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 111 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Interior lighting delayed switch- Key positions Licence plate lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
off Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
On-board computer (luxury mul- KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 138 KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Lights
Interior motion sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Display message (luxury multi-
Intermittent wipe Display message (luxury multi- function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 253
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 254 Display message (multi-function
ISOFIX Display message (multi-function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . 230, 243
Child seat securing system . . . . . . . 64 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . 232, 243 LIM indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Load compartment load, maximum 325
J Losing the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Loading guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Modifying the programming . . . . . . 79
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
9
Index
Locking Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Modifying the programming

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
From the inside (central locking Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 KEYLESS GO key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Menu (multi-function steering MOExtended run-flat sys-
Luggage net wheel) tem* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 300
Front-passenger footwell . . . . . . . 178 Calling up display messages . . . . . 124 Mono function
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Entering the time/date . . . . . . . . . 124 Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Luxury multi-function steering Menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Thermotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 125 Standard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Motorway mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 MP3
M
Menu On-board computer Operation (on-board computer,
Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 285 (luxury multi-function steering luxury multi-function steering
Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . 287- 288 wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Display message (luxury multi- Message Multi-function display
function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 252 see Display message, Indicator Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Display message (multi-function and warning lamp Luxury multi-function steering
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Minispare emergency spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 wheel Multi-function steering wheel . . . . 121
Maintenance Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Multi-function steering
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Mirror wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 120
Manual gearshift program . . . . . . . . 117 see Exterior or rear-view mirror Multi-function steering wheel
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 (12-button)
Maximum speed Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 see Luxury multi-function steer-
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 ing wheel
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Menu (luxury multi-function N
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
steering wheel) On-board computer (luxury mul- Navigation
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 133 On-board computer (luxury mul-
Menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 130
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10
Index
NECK-PRO head restraint . . . . . . . . . 56 Standard display menu . . . . . . . . . 123 Parking lock

Resetting triggered NECK-PRO Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Releasing manually (automatic
head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . 113 transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Outside temperature Parking position
O
Display (on-board computer) . . . . . 120 Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
On-board computer (luxury mul- Overhead control panel Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . . 125 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . 150
Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Convenience submenu . . . . . . . . . 139 P
Range of the sensors . . . . . . . . . . 148
Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Paint code number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Factory setting submenu . . . . . . . 140 Panorama sliding/tilting sunroof . . 173 Warning display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Instrument cluster submenu . . . . . 135 Rain-closing feature . . . . . . . . . . . 176 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warn-
Lights submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 ing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 258
Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Permanent display
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 On-board computer (luxury mul-
Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 137
Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Display message (luxury multi- Permanent Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . 146
Standard display submenu . . . . . . 129 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 247 Petrol
Telephone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Parking brakes Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Time/date submenu . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Display message (multi-function Minimum grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . . 129 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Plastic trim
Vehicle submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Parking lamp Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
On-board computer (multi-func- Display message (multi-function Power supply (trailer) . . . . . . . . . . . 214
tion steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Power windows
Calling up display messages . . . . . 124 Parking lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 see Side window
Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . 287, 289
Entering the time/date . . . . . . . . . 124 Display message (luxury multi-
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 252
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
11
Index
PRESAFE® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Rear foglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 285 Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Display message (luxury multi- Display message (luxury multi- Display message (luxury multi-
function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 236 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 252 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 256
Display message (multi-function Display message (multi-function Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
PRESAFE® system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Rear seat backrest Residual heat/auxiliary ventila-
Program selector button Display message (luxury multi- tion
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . 115 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 255 Thermotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Display message (multi-function Restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
R
Folding forwards/back . . . . . . . . . 180 Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Radio Rear seat belt status indicator . . . . . 97 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
see separate operating instruc- Rear vents Restraint systems
tions Thermotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 For children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Selecting a station (on-board Rear window Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
computer, luxury multi-function Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Reverse gear
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Rear window blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Engaging (automatic transmis-
Rain closing feature Rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 sion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Panorama sliding/tilting sunroof . 176 Rear-compartment air condition- Engaging (manual transmission) . . 112
Rain sensor ing Reversing lamp
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Thermotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Display message (luxury multi-
Rain-closing feature Rear-view mirror function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 253
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . 172 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Display message (multi-function
Range Anti-dazzle (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Calling up (on-board computer, Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) . . . . . 91 Reversing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
luxury multi-function steering Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Roller sunblind
wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Vegetable oil methyl ester (VME Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Reading lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 fuels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Roof load, maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Rear bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284- 285 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
12
Index
Route guidance Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Spare wheel

On-board computer (luxury mul- Transmission oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 130 Windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . 333 Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Settings Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
S
Calling up a stored setting . . . . . . . 93 Speed
Seat Factory (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76- 77 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84- 85 Factory (KEYLESS GO) . . . . . . . . . . 78 Speed limiter
Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Factory (on-board computer, Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 94 luxury multi-function steering Speedometer
Adjusting the height . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Digital (on-board computer,
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 On-board computer (luxury mul- luxury multi-function steering
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 263 ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 135 wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Shift ranges Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Securing a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . 114 Selecting display units (on-
Selector lever Side lamps board computer, luxury multi-
Display message (luxury multi- Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . 287, 289 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 136
function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 235 Side marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Display message (multi-function Side window Display message (luxury multi-
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 236
Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Side windows Display message (multi-function
Service Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Calling up the due date (on- Sidebags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Ski rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
On-board computer (luxury mul- Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . 171 SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 135 Rain closing feature . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Display message (luxury multi-
Service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 255
Service products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Display message (multi-function
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Socket steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 263
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Rear compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
13
Index
Standard display Submenu (luxury multi-function Technical data

On-board computer (luxury mul- steering wheel) Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 129 Convenience submenu . . . . . . . . . 139 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
On-board computer (multi-func- Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
tion steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Trailer loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Station Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
see Radio Standard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Steering wheel Time/date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Adjusting electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Summer opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Telephone
Buttons (on-board computer, Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 see Mobile phone
luxury multi-function steering Supplemental Restraint System Telephone compartment . . . . . . . . . 183
wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 see SRS Temperature
Buttons (on-board computer, Surround lighting Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 120
multi-function steering wheel) . . . 120 On-board computer (luxury mul- Setting (rear-compartment con-
Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 138 trol panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Steering wheel gearshift paddles . . 116 Switching off the alarm Setting (Thermatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Stowage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 181 ATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Setting (Thermotronic) . . . . . . . . . 164
Armrest (under) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
T
Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Dashboard (at the top) . . . . . . . . . 182 Tail lamp Airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Display message (multi-function Air-recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . 158
Rear seat armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . 241, 243 Cooling with air dehumidification . 160
Stowage space Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Deactivating/activating . . . . . . . . 156
Stowage well Display message (luxury multi- Demisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Boot floor (underneath) . . . . . . . . . 181 function steering wheel) . . . 251, 253 Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Operating information . . . . . . . . . . 154
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Windows misted up . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
14
Index
Thermotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Tow-away protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Trip computer

Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . 164 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 On-board computer (luxury mul-
Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Towing eye ti-function steering wheel) . . . . . . 129
Airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 On-board computer (multi-func-
Air-recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . 167 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 tion steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Cooling with air dehumidification . 168 Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Trailer Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 123
Demisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 7-pin connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Turn signal
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Display message (luxury multi- Display message (luxury multi-
Operating information . . . . . . . . . . 162 function steering wheel) . . . 247, 250 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 250
Rear vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Display message (multi-function Display message (multi-function
Rear-compartment air condi- steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . 227, 240 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
tioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Residual heat/auxiliary ventilation 168 Trailer loads Changing the front bulbs . . 286, 288
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Windows misted up . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Trailer tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Third brake lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Trailer towing Two-way radio
Through-loading feature . . . . . . . . . 179 Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . 116 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Tyre grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Time ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Tyre pressure
Entering (on-board computer, Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Display message (luxury multi-
multi-function steering wheel) . . . 124 Mounting dimensions . . . . . . . . . . 326 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 235
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Display message (multi-function
Setting (on-board computer, Transmission oil steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
luxury multi-function steering Filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Tyre pressure loss warning system 203
wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Transmission output (maximum) Tyre pressures
TIREFIT kit Telephone/two-way radio . . . . . . . 314 see Air pressure
Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Transport (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
TopTether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
15
Index
Tyres W Windows misted up

Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Warning and indicator lamp
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Thermotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
ABS (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Windscreen
Warning signal
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
U Audible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . . 333
Unladen weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Unlocking Washer fluid
Windscreen washer fluid reser-
From the inside (central locking Display message (luxury multi-
voir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 333
button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 256
Windscreen washer reservoir
Display message (multi-function
V Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Windscreen washer system 105,
Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Wearing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
333
Vegetable oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Wheel bolts
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Vegetable oil methyl ester . . . . . . . 194 Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Vehicle Wheels
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Emergency unlocking . . . . . . 279- 280 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Winter diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Individual settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Interchanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206- 207
Leaving parked up . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Windowbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Limit speed (on-board com-
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Display message (luxury multi-
puter, luxury multi-function
Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 function steering wheel) . . . . . . . . 256
steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Display message (multi-function
Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 steering wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Vehicle electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Windows
Vehicle identification number Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
(VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Cleaning the windscreen . . . . . . . . 218
Vehicle identification plates . . . . . . 315 Misted up (Thermatic) . . . . . . . . . . 158
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Misted up (Thermotronic) . . . . . . . 166
Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
16
Introduction
Protection of the environment
Protection of the environment I Remove roof racks once you no longer Returning used vehicles
need them.
H Environmental note I A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib-
Mercedes-Benz will take back your
Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an envi-
DaimlerChrysler's declared policy is one of ute to environmental protection. You ronmentally-responsible manner, in ac-
integrated environmental protection. should therefore adhere to the service
cordance with the European Union (EU)
intervals.
The objectives are for the natural resources End of Life Vehicles Directive.
which form the basis of our existence on I Always have maintenance work carried The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies
this planet to be used sparingly and in a out at a qualified specialist workshop, to vehicles of up to 3.5 t gross vehicle
manner which takes the requirements of e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
weight, in accordance with national regula-
both nature and humanity into account. Personal driving style tions. For several years, Mercedes-Benz
You too can help to protect the environment I Do not depress the accelerator pedal has been meeting all the legal require-
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- when starting the engine. ments for a design which allows for recy-
tally-responsible manner. I Do not warm up the engine with the ve- cling and re-use. There is a network of re-
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, hicle stationary. turn points and disassembly plants which
transmission, brake and tyre wear depend I Drive carefully and maintain a safe dis- can recycle your vehicle in an environmen-
on the following factors: tance from the vehicle in front. tally-responsible manner. The options for
I Operating conditions of your vehicle I Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration. recycling vehicles and parts are constantly
I Your personal driving style I Change gear in good time and use each
being developed and improved. This
You can influence both factors. gear only up to 2/3 of its maximum en- means that your Mercedes-Benz will also
gine speed. continue to meet even the increased recy-
You should bear the following in mind:
cling quotas in the future in good time.
Operating conditions I Switch off the engine in stationary traf-
fic.
You can obtain further information from
I Avoid short trips as these increase fuel your national Mercedes-Benz homepage or
consumption. your national hotline number.
I Make sure that the tyre pressures are al-
ways correct.
I Do not carry any unnecessary weight.
I Keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con-
sumption.
17
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety ger protect you and other persons as in- operating safety and therefore your own
tended. This would result in an increased safety.
G Risk of accident and injury risk of accident and injury. You should thus have all work and modifica-
All work on the vehicle and, in particular, All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g. tions to electronic components carried out
work relevant to safety or on safety-related installations or modifications, should there- at a qualified specialist workshop.
systems must be carried out at a qualified fore be carried out at a qualified specialist
specialist workshop. The specialist work- workshop.
shop must have the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools to carry out the work
required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that G Risk of accident
you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for A heavy impact to the vehicle underbody,
this purpose. tyres or wheels (e.g. bottoming out in rough
terrain or when driving over an obstacle at
high speed) can damage the vehicle. This al-
G Risk of accident and injury so applies to vehicles which are equipped
Some safety systems only function when with underbody protection.
the engine is running. You should therefore In such cases, have your vehicle checked at
never switch off the engine when driving. a qualified specialist workshop.
Otherwise the safety systems of your ve-
hicle may no longer protect you and other
persons as intended. This would result in an G Risk of accident
increased risk of accident and injury. If work on electronic equipment and its soft-
ware is carried out incorrectly, this equip-
G Risk of accident and injury
ment could stop working. The electronic
systems are networked via interfaces. Tam-
Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations pering with these electronic systems could
made to the vehicle, e.g. rerouting of cables cause malfunctions in systems which have
under coverings, could cause the safety sys- not been modified. Malfunctions such as
tems of your vehicle to stop working prop- these can seriously jeopardise the vehicle's
erly. The safety systems would thus no lon-
18
Introduction
Vehicle registration
Vehicle registration
Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service
Centres to carry out technical inspections
on certain vehicles to improve their quality
or safety.
If you did not purchase your vehicle from
an authorised specialist dealer and your
vehicle has never been inspected at a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, it is possi-
ble that your vehicle is not registered in
your name with Mercedes-Benz.
Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about
vehicle checks if it has your registration
data.
It is advisable to register your vehicle with
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible
about any change in address or vehicle
ownership.
19
Introduction
Correct use
Correct use
Observe the following information when
using your vehicle:
I The safety notes in this manual
I The “Technical data” section in this
manual
I National road traffic regulations
I National road traffic licensing regula-
tions
G Risk of injury
Various warning stickers are affixed to your
vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your atten-
tion, and the attention of others, to various
dangers. Therefore, do not remove any
warning stickers unless the sticker clearly
states that you may do so.
If you remove the warning stickers, you or
others could be injured by failing to recog-
nise certain dangers.
20
At a glance
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Cockpit, left-hand-drive vehicles 24
Cockpit, right-hand-drive vehi-
cles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Instrument cluster, kilometres . 28
Instrument cluster, miles. . . . . . 32
Multi-function steering wheel . . 36
Centre console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Overhead control panel . . . . . . . 40
Door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Stowage compartments . . . . . . . 42
21
At a glance
Exterior view
Exterior view
22
At a glance
Exterior view
Function Page Function Page Function Page
1 Boot 6 Sliding/tilting sunroof* 171 a Front lights 285
Opening and closing 80 Panorama power sliding/ 173 b Fitting the front towing 305
tilting sunroof* eye
Spare wheel 223
7 Exterior mirrors 90 c Tyres and wheels 200
Vehicle tool kit 223
8 Windscreen wipers, opera- 104 Checking the tyre pres- 203
Battery (depending on the 301 tion sure
engine)
Cleaning the wiper blades 218 Flat tyre, fitting the spare 296
2 Rear lights 285 wheel
Replacing the wiper 290
3 Rear window heating 170 blades d Fitting the rear towing eye 305
4 Opening and closing the 76 9 Opening the bonnet 195 e Fuel filler flap 193
doors
Engine oil 197 Fuel requirements 193
5 Demisting the windscreen 157
Coolant 198
Cleaning the windows 218
Battery (depending on the 301
engine)
23
At a glance
Cockpit, left-hand-drive vehicles
24
At a glance
1 Automatic transmission*: 116 8 Opens the glove compart- 182 e Combination switch 99
steering wheel gearshift ment
• Main-beam headlamps 99
paddles*
9 Locks/unlocks the glove 182
• Turn signals 100
2 Cruise control lever* compartment
• Cruise control* 140 a Centre console 38 • Windscreen wipers 104
• Speedtronic* 143 b Ignition lock 82 f Opens the bonnet 195
3 Instrument cluster 28 KEYLESS GO button* 82 g Parking brake 111
4 Multi-function steering 36 c Adjusts the steering wheel 88 h Releases the parking 111
wheel manually brake
5 Horn d Adjusts the steering wheel 89 j Light switch 97

electrically* k Door control panel 41
6 PARKTRONIC* warning 149
displays l Adjusts the headlamp 100
7 Overhead control panel 40 range
25
At a glance
Cockpit, right-hand-drive vehicles
26
At a glance
1 Overhead control panel 40 8 Adjusts the headlamp 100 g Combination switch 99
range
2 Parktronic* warning dis- 149 • Main-beam headlamps 99
play 9 Light switch 97
• Turn signals 100
3 Cruise control lever* a Door control panel 41
• Windscreen wipers 104
• Cruise control* 140 b Releases the parking 111
brake h Parking brake 111
• Speedtronic* 143
c Opens the bonnet 195 j Centre console 38
4 Instrument cluster 32
d Ignition lock 82 k Locks/unlocks the glove 182
5 Multi-function steering 36 compartment
wheel KEYLESS GO button* 82
l Opens the glove compart- 182
6 Horn e Adjusts the steering wheel 88 ment
manually
7 Automatic transmission*: 116
steering wheel gearshift f Adjusts the steering wheel 89
paddles* electrically*
27
At a glance
Instrument cluster, kilometres
Vehicles with multi-function steering wheel (4 buttons)
28
At a glance
1 Reserve fuel warning lamp 265 a Automatic transmission*: 113 h Speedometer
selector lever position dis-
2 Coolant warning lamp 261 j Brake system warning 261
play
lamp
3 Turn signal indicator lamp 100
Vehicles with manual 120
® k Seat belt warning lamp 263
4 ESP warning lamp 260 transmission: outside tem-
perature l Coolant temperature 119
5 ABS warning lamp 259
Vehicles with manual 143 gauge
6 Engine diagnostic warning 262 transmission and m Vehicles with automatic 120
lamp Speedtronic*: stored limit transmission*: outside
7 Turn signal indicator lamp 100 speed1 temperature2
8 Rev counter 120 b Status indicator, right Vehicles with 143
Speedtronic*: stored limit
9 Automatic transmission*: 115 c Vehicles with a diesel en- 109
speed
gearshift program display gine: preglow indicator
lamp n Status indicator, left
d SRS warning lamp 263 o Clock 119
e Multi-function display 121 p Brightness control 119
f Total distance recorder q Fuel gauge
g Trip meter 119 r Main-beam indicator lamp 99
1
Outside temperature
2 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the speed in

km/h is always shown instead of the outside tem-
1 Only vehicles for the United Kingdom. perature.
29
At a glance
Vehicles with luxury multi-function steering wheel (12 buttons)
30
At a glance
1 Turn signal indicator lamp 100 c Outside temperature 120 f Vehicles with manual 136
® transmission: additional
2 ESP warning lamp 260 Vehicles with automatic 136
speedometer
transmission*: additional
3 Speedometer 120 speedometer, if for the Automatic transmission*: 113
4 Segments 120 Permanent display func- selector lever position dis-
tion the setting Dig. spee- play
5 Multi-function display 126
do (mph) is selected g Clock 119
Vehicles for the United 136 h Total distance recorder
7 Vehicles with a diesel en- 109 Kingdom with automatic
gine: preglow indicator transmission*: additional j Trip meter 119
lamp speedometer k Main-beam indicator lamp 99
8 Rev counter 120 d Vehicles with automatic 136 l Coolant temperature 119
9 SRS warning lamp 263 transmission*: outside gauge
temperature, if for the
a ABS warning lamp 259 Permanent display func- m Coolant warning lamp 261
b Seat belt warning lamp 263 tion the setting Dig. spee- n Brake system warning 261
do (mph) is selected lamp
e Automatic transmission*: 115 o Engine diagnostic warning 262
gearshift program display lamp
p Brightness control 119
q Reserve fuel warning lamp 265
r Fuel gauge
31
At a glance
Instrument cluster, miles
Vehicles with multi-function steering wheel (4 buttons)
32
At a glance
1 Reserve fuel warning lamp 265 a Automatic transmission*: 113 h Speedometer
selector lever position dis-
2 Coolant warning lamp 261 j Brake system warning 261
play
lamp
Vehicles with manual 120
® k Seat belt warning lamp 263
4 ESP warning lamp 260 transmission: outside tem-
perature l Coolant temperature 119
5 ABS warning lamp 259
Vehicles with manual 143 gauge
6 Engine diagnostic warning 262 transmission and m Vehicles with automatic 120
lamp Speedtronic*: stored limit transmission*: outside
7 Turn signal indicator lamp 100 speed3 temperature4
8 Rev counter 120 b Status indicator, right Vehicles with 143
Speedtronic*: stored limit
9 Automatic transmission*: 115 c Vehicles with a diesel en- 109
speed
gearshift program display gine: preglow indicator
lamp n Status indicator, left
d SRS warning lamp 263 o Clock 119
e Multi-function display 121 p Brightness control 119
f Total distance recorder q Fuel gauge
g Trip meter 119 r Main-beam indicator lamp 99
3
Outside temperature
4 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the speed in

km/h is always shown instead of the outside tem-
3 Only vehicles for the United Kingdom. perature.
33
At a glance
Vehicles with luxury multi-function steering wheel (12 buttons)
34
At a glance
1 Turn signal indicator lamp 100 c Outside temperature 120 f Vehicles with manual 136
® transmission: additional
2 ESP warning lamp 260 Vehicles with automatic 136
speedometer
transmission*: additional
3 Speedometer 120 speedometer, if for the Automatic transmission*: 113
4 Segments 120 Permanent display func- selector lever position dis-
tion the setting Dig. spee- play
do (mph) is selected g Clock 119
Vehicles for the United 136 h Total distance recorder
7 Vehicles with a diesel en- 109 Kingdom with automatic
gine: preglow indicator transmission*: additional j Trip meter 119
lamp speedometer k Main-beam indicator lamp 99
8 Rev counter 120 d Vehicles with automatic 136 l Coolant temperature 119
9 SRS warning lamp 263 transmission*: outside gauge
temperature, if for the
a ABS warning lamp 259 Permanent display func- m Coolant warning lamp 261
b Seat belt warning lamp 263 tion the setting Dig. spee- n Brake system warning 261
do (mph) is selected lamp
e Automatic transmission*: 115 o Engine diagnostic warning 262
gearshift program display lamp
p Brightness control 119
q Reserve fuel warning lamp 265
r Fuel gauge
35
At a glance
Multi-function steering wheel
Multi-function steering wheel Function Page
Multi-function steering wheel (4 but-
tons) Operating the on-board 120
computer
2 æ
• Increases the volume
• Sets the time/date
3 ç
• Decreases the volume
• Sets the time/date
4 í Selects submenu or
browse lists
Confirms selection
5 è Jumps from menu to
menu
36
At a glance
Multi-function steering wheel
Luxury multi-function steering Function Page Function Page
wheel* (12 buttons)
1 Multi-function display 126 4 L Back/confirms mes-
sage/switches off voice
Operating the on-board 125
control*
computer
5 Selecting a submenu or
2 Adjusting the volume
scrolling in lists
æ Increases the vol-
$ Up
ume
ç Decreases the vol- % Down
ume Line for calling up and se-
Using the telephone* lecting menus
s Accepts a call & Right
t Ends a call ( Left
F Mute # Selection and mes-

sage confirmation
3 ! Switches on voice
control*
37
At a glance
Centre console
Centre console Function Page Function Page
1 Switches the hazard warn- 100 8 Rolls the rear window 184
Upper section
ing lamps on/off blind* up/down
2 ATA indicator lamp* 71 9 Switches ADVANCED 147
AGILITY package with
3 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG 63
sports mode* on/off
OFF warning lamp5
a Controls Thermatic 154
4 Deactivates/activates 69
ESP® Controls Thermotronic* 162
5 Controls COMAND APS* Switches the rear window 170
and the audio system* – heating on/off
see the separate Operat-
b Switches the seat heat- 87
ing Instructions
ing* on the left-hand front
6 Switches the seat heat- 87 seat on/off
ing* on the right-hand
front seat on/off
7 Activates/deactivates 150
PARKTRONIC*
i The layout of the buttons may differ de-

pending on the equipment in the vehicle.
5 The warning lamp also lights up briefly when you
turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock on ve-
hicles which do not have automatic child seat rec-
ognition on the front passenger seat*. It has no
function, however, and does not indicate that the
front-passenger seat is equipped with automatic
child seat recognition*.
38
At a glance
Centre console
Lower section Function Page Function Page
1 Opens the ashtray* 185 5 COMAND/Audio control*:
see Operating Instructions
Cigarette lighter* 185
for Head Unit
Socket 186
6 Automatic transmission*: 115
2 Manual transmission: gear 112 selects the gearshift pro-
lever gram
Automatic transmission*: 112
selector lever
3 Opens the stowage com- 183
partment
Opens the cup holder 177
4 Opens the stowage com- 183
partment
i The layout of the buttons may differ de-

pending on the equipment in the vehicle.
39
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel Function Page Function Page
1 Switches the rear interior 103 7 Deactivates the interior 72
lighting on/off motion sensor*
2 Switches the automatic in- 103 8 Switches the left-hand 103
terior lighting on/off reading lamp on/off
3 Switches the right-hand 103 9 Switches the front interior 103
reading lamp on/off lighting on/off
4 Deactivates tow-away pro- 72
tection*
5 Rear-view mirror 90
6 Opens/closes the sliding/ 171
tilting sunroof*
Opens/closes the pano- 173
rama sliding/tilting sun-
roof*
40
At a glance
Door control panel
Door control panel Function Page Function Page
1 Opens the door 79 8 Opens/closes the rear 105
windows
2 Stores settings for the 93
seat, exterior mirrors and 9 Override switch for the 67
steering wheel* rear windows
3 Selects the left exterior 90 a Boot lid remote release 81
mirror switch*
4 Folds the exterior mirror 91 b Adjusts the seat electri- 85
in/out* cally*
5 Selects the right exterior 90 c Locks/unlocks the door 80
mirror
6 Adjusts the exterior mir- 90
rors
7 Opens/closes the front 105
windows
41
At a glance
Stowage compartments
42
At a glance
1 Glove compartment 182 b Stowage compartment on 182 f Stowage compartment 183
top of the dashboard under the armrest
2 Door stowage pocket
c Luggage net in the front- 178 g Stowage compartment in 183
3 Map pocket
passenger footwell the rear*
d Socket 186 Ashtray* 185
5 Stowage well under the 181
Ashtray* 185 h Cup holder in the rear seat 177
boot floor
armrest
Cigarette lighter* 185
6 Open stowage space in
boot j Stowage compartment in 183
e Stowage compartment in 183 the rear seat armrest
7 Door stowage pocket the centre console
8 Map pocket Cup holder in the centre 177

console
a Sun visor card clip 184
43
44
Safety
Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . 67
Anti-theft systems. . . . . . . . . . . . 71
45
Safety
Occupant safety
Occupant safety PRE-SAFE®* (preventive occupant safety of the impact, and is thus better suited to
system) and SRS (Supplemental Restraint prevent injury
System) provide additional protection and Thus, in accident situations where an airbag is
Restraint systems
consist of: deployed, it only provides protection in addition
This section will familiarise you with the to the seat belt if the seat belt is being worn
I Belt tensioners
most important features of the restraint correctly.
systems in your vehicle. In the event of an I Belt force limiters
accident, your vehicle may collide with an- I Airbags G Risk of injury
other object, e.g. another vehicle. This
may cause your vehicle to accelerate or i An airbag increases the protection of ve- Modifications to or work performed incor-
hicle occupants wearing a seat belt. However, rectly on restraint systems (seat belts, an-
decelerate extremely quickly. During this chorages, belt tensioners, belt force limiters
airbags are only an additional restraint system
acceleration or deceleration, the vehicle which complements, but does not replace, the or airbags) or their wiring, as well as work
occupants will be propelled in the opposite seat belt. All vehicle occupants must wear their on other networked electronic systems,
direction to the force of the impact. This seat belt correctly at all times, even if the ve- may prevent the restraint systems from
means that the vehicle occupants risk hicle is equipped with airbags. This is because working correctly. Airbags and belt ten-
being injured on the vehicle interior or on – on the one hand – airbags are not deployed sioners could fail, e.g. in the event of an ac-
parts of the vehicle. The purpose of sup- in all types of accident, as in some situations cident, the deceleration force of which
plementary restraint systems, i.e. princi- airbag deployment would not increase the pro- would normally be sufficient to trigger the
pally the seat belts supplemented by belt tection afforded to vehicle occupants, provided systems, or could be triggered unintention-
tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags they are wearing their seat belt correctly. ally. Never carry out any modifications on
where necessary, is to minimise this risk the restraint systems. Never tamper with
On the other hand, airbag deployment only pro-
of injury. However, seat belts and airbags electronic components and their software.
vides increased protection if the seat belt is
are generally unable to prevent injuries worn correctly, because:
caused by objects penetrating the vehicle
from the outside.
I the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle oc-
cupant in the best position in relation to the
Seat belts and restraint systems for chil- airbag
dren are the most effective restraint sys- I for example, in a head-on collision, the seat
tems as they effectively reduce the move- belt can more adequately prevent the occu-
ment of the occupants in case of impact. pant from being propelled towards the force
46
Safety
Occupant safety
Airbags certain circumstances this could cause se- Only one person should use each seat belt
vere or even fatal injuries. Make sure that at any one time.
G Risk of injury all vehicle occupants – in particular, preg- On no account should children travel sitting
nant women – wear their seat belt correctly on the lap of another occupant. It would not
Airbags provide additional protection; they
at all times. be possible to restrain the child, and the
are not, however, a substitute for the seat
belts. To reduce the risk of serious or even You must make sure that the belt: child or other vehicle occupants could be in-
fatal injuries, make sure that all occupants – I is routed as low as possible across your jured seriously or even fatally in the event of
in particular, pregnant women – wear their pelvic area, i.e. across your hip joints abrupt braking.
seat belt correctly at all times, have adopted and not across your abdomen Persons under 1.50 m tall or under twelve
a normal sitting position, and that their seat I fits closely years of age cannot wear the seat belts
is positioned as close to the vertical as pos- properly. They therefore require additional
I is not twisted
sible. suitable restraint systems on appropriate
I is routed across the middle of your seats for protection in an accident. Always
shoulder follow the manufacturer's installation in-
I is not routed across your neck or under structions when fitting a child seat.
Seat belts your arm
The most important restraint systems in I fits closely across your pelvic area, by
the vehicle are the seat belts and restraint pulling upwards on the shoulder section G Risk of injury
systems for children. In the event of a col- of the belt A seat belt can only afford its intended de-
lision, they are the most effective means Do not secure any objects with a seat belt if gree of protection if the backrest is posi-
of restraining the movement of vehicle oc- the seat belt is being used by one of the ve- tioned as close to the vertical as possible
cupants towards the impact force and thus hicle's occupants. and the occupant is sitting upright. Avoid
reduce the danger of them hitting parts of Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter seat positions that do not allow the seat
the vehicle interior. coat. belt to be routed correctly. You will find fur-
ther information under "Seat" in the index.
G Risk of injury Do not route the belt strap across sharp-
edged or fragile objects, especially if these Position the backrest as close to the vertical
A seat belt which is not worn, which is worn are on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, as possible. Do not drive with the backrest
incorrectly, or which has not been engaged pencils, keys, etc. The seat belt strap could reclined too far back. Otherwise, you could ee
in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot per- be damaged and you could be injured. be seriously or even fatally injured in the
form its intended protective function. Under event of an accident or sudden braking.
47
Safety
Occupant safety
I Belt force limiters
G Risk of injury I Airbag system with airbag control unit
and airbags
The seat belt cannot function correctly if the
belt or buckle is dirty or damaged. Keep the = SRS warning lamp
belt and buckle clean, otherwise the belt
tongue cannot engage correctly. The SRS performs a self-test at regular in-
Regularly check the seat belts to make sure tervals when the ignition is switched on
that they: and when the engine is running. Malfunc-
I are not damaged tions can therefore be detected in good
time.
I are not routed over sharp edges
I are not trapped The = SRS warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when you switch on
Otherwise the belt could tear in the event of
an accident. You or others could be serious-
the ignition and goes out a few seconds
ly or even fatally injured. after the engine is started.
Have seat belts which have been damaged
or subjected to heavy loads in an accident
1 Belt sash guide G Risk of injury
2 Belt tongue A malfunction has occurred if the SRS warn-
replaced and have their anchorages
3 Release button ing lamp = :
checked.
4 Buckle I does not light up when you switch on
Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety
reasons, you only use seat belts which have the ignition
been specially approved for your vehicle by SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- I does not go out after the engine has
Mercedes-Benz. tem) been running for a few seconds
The SRS consists of: I lights up again
i In many countries there are laws concern- I = SRS warning lamp Some systems could be triggered uninten-
ing the use of seat belts and child restraint sys- tionally or not be triggered at all in the event
tems.
I Belt tensioners of an accident with high deceleration. Have
the SRS checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop which has the neces-
48
Safety
Occupant safety
sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry milliseconds due to the control unit having The different airbag systems work independ-
out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec- detected further deceleration. ently of each other. However, the deployment
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz of each individual system will depend on the
i The front belt tensioners can only be trig- type of accident determined by the control sys-
Service Centre for this purpose. In particu- gered if the belt tongue is correctly engaged in
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-re- tem in the initial stages of the collision (head-
the seat belt buckle.
lated systems must be carried out at a quali- on collision or side impact) and the severity of
fied specialist workshop. Criteria for triggering belt tensioners the accident (in particular, the vehicle's rate of
and airbags deceleration or acceleration).
In the first stages of a collision, the sensor The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceler-
Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force ation and the direction of the force are ba-
limiters and airbags in the airbag control unit evaluates physi-
cal data such as duration, direction and sically determined by:
In the event of a collision, the sensor in rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration I the distribution of forces during the col-
the airbag control unit evaluates important in order to determine whether it is neces- lision
physical data such as duration, direction sary to trigger the belt tensioners and/or I the collision angle
and force of the vehicle deceleration or ac- airbags.
celeration. Based on the evaluation of this I the deformation characteristics of the
The belt tensioner and airbag triggering vehicle
data and depending on the vehicle's rate
thresholds are variable and are adapted to
of longitudinal deceleration in a collision, I the characteristics of the object with
the rate of deceleration of the vehicle. This
in the first stage the airbag control unit which the vehicle has collided, e.g. the
process is pre-emptive in nature as the air-
pre-emptively triggers the belt tensioners. other vehicle
bag must be deployed during – and not at
The front airbags are only deployed if there the end of – the collision. Factors which can only be seen and meas-
is an even higher rate of vehicle decelera- i Airbags are not deployed in all types of ac- ured after the collision has taken place do
tion in a longitudinal direction. cident. They are controlled by complex sensor not play a decisive role in the deployment
If your vehicle is fitted with adaptive dual- technology and evaluation logic. This process of an airbag, nor do they provide an indica-
stage front airbags, the front airbag is is pre-emptive in nature as airbag deployment tion of it.
filled with enough gas to reduce the risk of must take place during the impact and must be The vehicle may be considerably deformed
injuries at the first deployment threshold. adapted to provide calculated, additional pro- without an airbag being deployed if, for ex- ee
The front airbag is only fully inflated if a tection for the vehicle occupants. Not all air- ample, only relatively easily deformable
second threshold is reached within a few bags are deployed in an accident.
parts such as the bonnet or wings have
49
Safety
Occupant safety
been hit and the required rate of decelera- The front belt force limiters are synchron- If the belt tensioners are triggered, you will
tion has not been reached. It is also possi- ised with the front airbags, which spread hear a bang that will not damage your
ble that airbags may be deployed even the forces exerted by the belt force limit- hearing. A small amount of powder may al-
though the vehicle is only slightly de- ers on the occupant over a greater area. so be released. The = SRS warning
formed if, for example, very rigid vehicle When the ignition is switched on, the belt lamp lights up.
parts such as the longitudinal members
are hit in an accident and the rate of de-
tensioner is triggered:
G Risk of injury
celeration is sufficient. I only when the restraint systems are op-
Have belt tensioners which have been trig-
erational (the = SRS warning lamp gered replaced at a qualified specialist
Belt tensioners, belt force limiters lights up after the ignition is switched workshop which has the necessary special-
on and goes out once the engine is run- ist knowledge and tools to carry out the
The front seat belts and the outer seat ning) (e page 48)
belts in the rear are equipped with belt work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends
I for each three-point seat belt in the that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
tensioners and belt force limiters.
front of the vehicle when the belt Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
! Do not engage the seat belt tongue in the tongue is engaged in the buckle relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
buckle on the front-passenger seat if the seat tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
is not occupied. Otherwise the belt tensioner I in the event of a head-on or rear-end cialist workshop.
could be activated in an emergency. collision if the vehicle decelerates or
Comply with safety regulations when dis-
accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal di-
If the seat belt is also equipped with a belt posing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-
rection during the initial stages of the Benz Service Centre can provide details of
force limiter, the force exerted by the seat
collision these regulations.
belt on the seat occupant is reduced.
I in vehicles with front-passenger seat
Belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an
occupancy recognition system, only if
accident, pulling them close against the Airbag system
the front-passenger seat is occupied
body.
and the belt tongue is engaged in the
i Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect buckle G Risk of injury
seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat
I in a serious head-on collision, i.e. if the To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal
belts.
vehicle decelerates extremely rapidly in injuries in the event of an accident or similar
Belt tensioners do not pull occupants back to- a longitudinal direction during the initial situation with a high rate of deceleration,
wards the backrest. stages of the collision e.g. injuries caused by an airbag inflating
50
Safety
Occupant safety
within milliseconds or sudden braking, airbag is deactivated if a child restraint I Make sure that there are no people, ani-
please observe the following points: system with automatic child seat recog- mals or objects between the vehicle oc-
I All vehicle occupants must select a seat nition is fitted to the front-passenger cupants and the area of deployment of
position that allows the seat belt to be seat of a vehicle with automatic child the airbag.
worn correctly and that is as far away seat recognition on the front-passenger I Do not place any objects between the
from the airbag as possible. The driver's seat* and the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG seat backrest and the door.
seat position must allow the vehicle to OFF warning lamp remains lit continu- I Do not hang any hard objects, e.g. coat
be driven safely. The driver must main- ously.
hangers, on the grab handles or coat
tain a distance from the pedals that al- If either the rearward-facing child re- hooks.
lows him/her to depress these fully. The straint system or your vehicle does not
It is not possible to rule out the risk of inju-
driver's chest should be as far away have automatic child seat recognition on
ries caused by an airbag due to the high
from the middle of the driver's front air- the front-passenger seat*, children must
speed at which the airbag is required to de-
bag cover as possible. The driver's arms be secured in a child restraint system on
ploy.
must be slightly bent when holding the a suitable seat in the rear. If you secure
steering wheel. a forward-facing child restraint system
I Vehicle occupants should always wear to the front-passenger seat, you must
move the front-passenger seat as far
G Risk of injury
their seat belt correctly and position
their backrest as close to the vertical as back as possible. The airbag function is only guaranteed if
possible. The head restraint must sup- I Do not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover you:
port the back of the seat occupant's of the driver's front airbag, particularly I do not cover or affix any badges or stick-
head at about eye level. when the vehicle is in motion. ers to the covers of the driver's front air-
I Move the front-passenger seat as far I Do not put your feet on the dashboard. bag, the knee airbag underneath the
back as possible, especially if a child is steering column, the front-passenger's
I Only hold the steering wheel by the rim.
secured in a restraint system on this front airbag and the side trim next to the
This allows the airbag to inflate fully.
seat. rear bench seat backrest
You could be injured if the airbag is de-
I Rearward-facing child restraint systems ployed and you are holding the inside of I do not modify the restraint system com-
must not be fitted to the front-passenger the steering wheel. ponents, including the wiring
seat unless the front-passenger front air- I Do not lean on the doors from inside the ee
bag has been deactivated. In Mercedes- vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with the following
Benz vehicles, the front-passenger front airbags:
51
Safety
Occupant safety
I Driver's front airbag, located in the designed to reduce the force acting on the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so, or
steering wheel occupant's head and chest. These airbags open a window to get fresh air.
I Driver's knee airbag underneath the are therefore depressurised after the acci-
steering column dent.
Front airbags
I Front-passenger front airbag, located G Risk of injury
The front airbags are designed to increase
above the glove compartment
After an airbag has been deployed: protection for the driver's and front-pas-
I Sidebags on the outer side of the front I airbag parts are hot. Do not touch them, senger's head and chest. The driver's front
seats or you could be burned airbag and front-passenger front airbag
I Rear sidebags* in the side trim next to I it must be replaced at a qualified spe- are deployed:
the backrest cialist workshop which has the neces- I at the start of an accident with a high
I Windowbags in the edge of the roof sary specialist knowledge and tools to rate of vehicle acceleration or decelera-
carry out the work required. Mercedes- tion in a longitudinal direction
frame
Benz recommends that you use a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this I if the system determines that airbag
How the airbags work deployment can offer additional protec-
purpose. In particular, work relevant to
The airbags inflate within milliseconds. safety or on safety-related systems must tion to that provided by the seat belt
The = SRS warning lamp lights up. be carried out at a qualified specialist I if the seat belt is fastened
i If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a workshop
I independently of other airbags in the
bang and a small amount of powder may also
vehicle
be released. The bang will not damage your
hearing and the powder is not hazardous to G Risk of injury I except when the vehicle overturns, un-
health. A small amount of powder is released when less the system detects a high rate of
Airbag deployment slows down and re- an airbag deploys. This powder does not vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal di-
stricts the movement of the vehicle occu- constitute a health hazard, nor does it indi- rection
pant. cate a fire in the vehicle. The powdery dust
may cause short term breathing difficulties
When the vehicle occupant comes into to persons suffering from asthma or pulmo-
contact with the front and side airbags, nary problems. In order to prevent possible
hot gas flows out of them. This feature is breathing difficulties you should leave the
52
Safety
Occupant safety
The driver's knee airbag can help reduce from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for
the risk of injury to the knees and lower example.
legs.
G Risk of injury
To reduce the risk of injury when a sidebag
is deployed, you should make sure that:
I there are no other persons, animals or
objects between the vehicle occupants
and the deployment range of the side-
bags
1 Driver's front airbag
2 Front-passenger front airbag
I no accessories, e.g. drinks can holders,
are attached to the doors
Driver's front airbag 1 deploys in front of I only light clothing is hung on the coat
the steering wheel; front-passenger front 1 Driver's knee airbag
hooks in the vehicle
airbag 2 deploys in front of and above Driver's knee airbag 1 is always deployed I there are no heavy or sharp objects in
the glove compartment. along with the driver's front airbag and in- the pockets of items of clothing
In vehicles with automatic child seat rec- flates underneath the steering column.
ognition*, front-passenger front airbag 2
is only deployed if the 5 PASSENGER Sidebags G Risk of injury
AIRBAG OFF warning lamp in the centre
console is not lit (e page 63). This means
G Risk of injury Observe the following points to reduce the
risk of serious or even fatal injuries if the
that no child restraint system with auto- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- sidebag is deployed:
matic child seat recognition* has been de- mends that you only use seat covers that
have been tested for use in Mercedes-Benz
I Vehicle occupants – in particular, chil-
tected. dren – must not lean their head on the
vehicles and which are fitted with a special
Driver's knee airbag tear seam for sidebags. Otherwise, a side-
bag may not inflate correctly and fail to pro- ee
i The driver's knee airbag is only available vide the intended protection in the event of
for certain countries.
an accident. You can obtain these covers
53
Safety
Occupant safety
area of the window in which a sidebag is the vehicle occupants on the side of the I independently of the use of the seat
deployed. vehicle on which the impact occurs. belt
I Vehicle occupants must always wear You can recognise the places where side- I independently of the front airbags
their seat belt correctly and position bags are fitted in your vehicle by the AIR-
their backrest as close to the vertical as
I independently of the belt tensioners
BAG symbol.
possible. i You can find further information about how
I Always secure children less than 1.50 m the airbags work on (e page 52).
tall or under 12 years of age in suitable You can find further information about the trig-
child restraint systems. gering of belt tensioners and belt force limiters
on (e page 49).
G Risk of injury Windowbags

The airbag control sensors are located in
the doors. Do not make any modifications
G Risk of injury
to the doors or door trim, such as retrofit- In order for the windowbag to provide its in-
ting loudspeakers. Damage to the doors can tended level of protection, make sure that
affect how the sidebags operate. Only have 1 Front sidebag there are no objects between the vehicle oc-
work on the doors done at a qualified spe- 2 Rear sidebag* in the side trim next to cupants and the area of deployment of the
cialist workshop which has the necessary the backrest windowbags.
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom- The sidebags inflate next to the outer seat
mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz cushions. G Risk of injury
Service Centre for this purpose. In particu- Front sidebags 1 and rear sidebags* 2 Observe the following notes to reduce the
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-re- are deployed: risk of serious or even fatal injury if the
lated systems must be carried out at a quali- windowbag is deployed:
fied specialist workshop I on the side on which an impact occurs
I Vehicle occupants – in particular, chil-
I at the start of an accident with a high dren – must not lean their head on the
The purpose of sidebag deployment is to rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or
enhance the level of protection for the acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
thorax (but not the head, neck or arms) of
54
Safety
Occupant safety
area of the window in which the window- Windowbags 1 are deployed: If you are driving faster than approximately
bag is deployed I at the start of an accident with a high 35 km/h, PRESAFE® takes the following
I Vehicle occupants must always have rate of vehicle acceleration or decelera- measures in the aforementioned situa-
their seat belts fastened correctly tion in a lateral direction tions:
I Always secure children less than 1.50 m I on the side on which an impact occurs I It tensions the front seat belts.
tall or under 12 years of age in suitable
I independently of the front airbags I On vehicles with a memory package*:
child restraint systems.
it adjusts the seat to a better position
I regardless of whether the front- if the fully electrically adjustable front-
The purpose of the windowbags is to en- passenger seat is occupied passenger seat is in an unfavourable
hance the level of protection for the head i You can find further information about how position.
(but not chest or arms) of the vehicle oc- the airbags work on (e page 52). I If the vehicle skids, it closes the slid-
cupants on the side of the vehicle on You can find further information about the trig- ing/tilting sunroof*/panorama sliding/
which the impact occurs. The windowbags gering of belt tensioners and belt force limiters tilting sunroof* and the side windows,
are integrated into the side of the roof on (e page 49). leaving only a small slit.
frame and deploy in the area extending
from the front door (A-pillar) to the rear If the hazardous situation passes without
door (C-pillar). PRE-SAFE® system* resulting in an accident, PRESAFE® re-
The PRESAFE® system takes pre-emptive leases the belt pretensioning. You can
measures to protect you in certain hazard- then adjust the fully electrically adjustable
ous situations. PRESAFE® intervenes in front-passenger seat*, the side windows
the event of: and the sliding/tilting sunroof* again.
I emergency braking situations, e.g. if If the seat belts are not released:
BAS Brake Assist intervenes E Move the backrest or the seat back
I critical situations involving driving dy- slightly until the belt tension is re-
namics, e.g. if the vehicle oversteers or duced.
understeers due to physical limits The locking mechanism releases.
being exceeded ee
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
1 Windowbag footwell or behind the seats when adjusting the
55
Safety
Occupant safety
seats. You could otherwise damage the seats Children in the vehicle system to become very hot. Touching these
and the objects. parts could cause skin burns.
If a child is travelling in the vehicle, secure
the child, preferably on a suitable seat in If the children open a door, they could:
NECK-PRO head restraint the rear, with a child restraint system suit- I injure other people in doing so
NECK-PRO head restraints are designed to able for the age and size of the child and I get out of the vehicle and thereby injure
increase protection to the driver's and recommended for Mercedes-Benz ve- themselves or be injured by a passing
front-passenger's head and neck. To this hicles. Make sure that the child is strap- vehicle
end, the head restraints on the driver's ped in throughout the trip. Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside
and front-passenger seats are moved for- You can obtain information about the cor- the vehicle unless they are secured. You will
wards and upwards in the event of a rear- rect child restraint system from any find further information under “Loading
end collision in the direction of travel. This Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. guidelines” in the index.
provides better head support. An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load
i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care increases the risk of injury to the child in
G Risk of injury products to clean child restraint systems. You the event of:
can obtain information about this from any
Head restraint covers prevent the NECK- I sharp braking
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
PRO head restraints from triggering cor- I a sudden change in direction
rectly. Consequently, the NECK-PRO head
restraints cannot provide the intended level
G Risk of injury I an accident
of protection. Do not use head restraint cov- Do not leave children unsupervised in the
ers. vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. The children could:
Child restraint systems
If the NECK-PRO head restraints are trig-

I injure themselves on parts of the vehicle Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
gered in an accident, you must reset the I be severely or even fatally injured by use the child restraint systems listed on
head restraints on the driver's and front- prolonged exposure to intense heat or (e page 61).
cold
passenger seats (e page 282). Head re-
straints that have been triggered are tilted Do not expose the child restraint system to G Risk of injury
forwards. direct sunlight, as this could cause, for ex- To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal
ample, metallic parts of the child restraint injury to the child in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or sudden change in direction:
56
Safety
Occupant safety
Child seat on the front-passenger seat
I always secure children less than 1.50 m
tall and under twelve years of age in a G Risk of injury
special child restraint system installed If the child restraint system is not fitted
on a suitable vehicle seat, as the seat properly to an appropriate seat, the child
belts are not designed for passengers of cannot be secured in the event of an acci-
this size dent or sudden braking and may be injured
I do not allow children under twelve years seriously or even fatally. When fitting a child
of age to sit on the front-passenger seat restraint system, you must observe the
unless they are secured in a child re- manufacturer's installation instructions and
straint system with automatic child seat correct use of the child restraint system.
recognition in a vehicle which also has Child restraint systems should preferably be
automatic child seat recognition on the fitted to the rear seats. The child is generally
front-passenger seat* better protected there. Warning sticker on the front-passenger
I never allow children to travel sitting on Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under sun visor
the lap of another occupant. It would not the child restraint system. The entire base
be possible to restrain the child due to of the child restraint system must always be
the forces occurring in the event of an resting on the seat cushion.
accident, heavy braking or sudden Child restraint systems must not be used
change in direction. They would be without their original cover. Only replace
thrown against parts of the vehicle inte- damaged covers with genuine Mercedes-
rior and be seriously or even fatally in- Benz covers.
jured Only use child restraint systems which have
I all vehicle occupants must always have been recommended for Mercedes-Benz on
their seat belt fastened correctly the rear seats.
I If you fit a child restraint system to the
front-passenger seat, you must move
the front-passenger seat as far back as
possible ee
57
Safety
Occupant safety
a special child restraint system with au- passenger seat and the front-passenger
tomatic child seat recognition has not front airbag is not disabled (e.g. in a vehicle
been fitted to the front-passenger seat without automatic child seat recognition on
or the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF the front-passenger seat* or in a vehicle
warning lamp is not lit with automatic child seat recognition on the
If the front-passenger front airbag is not dis- front-passenger seat* and if the 5
abled, a child secured in a child restraint PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp is
system on the front-passenger seat could not lit), always position the front-passenger
be seriously or even fatally injured by the seat in its rearmost position.
front-passenger front airbag deploying in Information about recommended child re-
the event of an accident, especially if the straint systems is available at any
child is in the immediate vicinity of the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
front-passenger front airbag when it is de- Do not place any objects, e.g. a cushion,
ployed. under the child restraint system. The entire
To draw attention to this danger, there is an base of the child restraint system must al-
appropriate warning sticker on the dash- ways be resting on the seat cushion. An in-
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child board as well as on both sides of the sun vi- correctly fitted child restraint system cannot
restraint system sor on the front-passenger side. perform its intended protective function in
If the front-passenger front airbag is not dis- the event of an accident, and could even
G Risk of injury abled, a child must never be secured on the lead to injuries.
front-passenger seat in a rearward-facing
The front-passenger front airbag is not dis-
child restraint system. In this case, only a
abled:
rearward facing child restraint system may
I in vehicles without automatic child seat be fitted to a suitable rear seat.
recognition on the front-passenger seat*
If you secure a child in a forward-facing
I in vehicles with automatic child seat rec- child restraint system on the front-
ognition on the front-passenger seat*, if
58
Safety
Occupant safety
Suitable vehicle seats
Weight categories and Child restraint system Child restraint sys- Child restraint system Child restraint system
ages on the front-passenger tem on the left-hand on the centre rear seat on the centre rear seat
seat and right-hand rear without through-load- with through-loading
seats ing feature feature*
Category 0: up to 10 kg; Vehicles with automatic Universal or as recom- As recommended As recommended
Up to approximately 9 child seat recognition* mended
months on the front-passenger
seat: as recommended6
Category 0+: up to 13 kg; Vehicles with automatic Universal or as recom- As recommended As recommended
Up to approximately child seat recognition* mended
18 months on the front-passenger
seat: as recommended6
Category I: 9 to 18 kg; Universal7 or as recom- Universal or as recom- Universal or as recom- Universal or as recom-
Between approximately 8 mended mended mended mended
months and 4 years
Category II/III: 15 to 36 kg; Universal7 or as recom- Universal or as recom- Universal or as recom- Universal or as recom-
Between approximately 3½ mended mended mended mended
and 12 years
6 Only use child restraint systems with automatic child seat recognition.
7 Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position.
ee
59
Safety
Occupant safety
"Universal" category child restraint sys-
tems can be recognised by their orange
approval label. The label is affixed to the
child seat and identifies the type of child
seat.
Example of an approval label on the child

restraint system
ISOFIX* child seat securing system
Weight Carry-cot 0: up to 0+: up to 13 kg I: 9 to 18 kg
category 10 kg
Size cate- F G E E D C D C B B1 A
gory
Equip- ISO/L1 ISO/L2 ISO/R1 ISO/R1 ISO/R2 ISO/R3 ISO/R2 ISO/R3 ISO/F2 ISO/F2X ISO/F3
ment
60
Safety
Occupant safety
Weight Carry-cot 0: up to 0+: up to 13 kg I: 9 to 18 kg
category 10 kg
Rear X8 X8 IL9 IL9 IL9 IL9 IL9 IL9 IUF10 IUF10 IUF10
bench
seat, left
and right
8 X: this position is unsuitable.
9 IL: as recommended, see the following table of ISOFIX child seat securing systems.
10 IUF: suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the Universal category and are approved for use in this weight category.
Recommended child restraint systems

Weight categories and Manufacturer Type Approval number DaimlerChrysler Automatic child
ages order number seat recognition
Category 0: up to 10 kg; Britax-Römer BABY SAFE E1 03 301146 B6 6 86 8212 Yes
PLUS
up to approximately 9 B6 6 86 8213 No11
months
Category 0+: up to 13 kg; Britax-Römer BABY SAFE E1 03 301146 B6 6 86 8212 Yes
PLUS
up to approximately B6 6 86 8213 No11
18 months
BABY SAFE ISO- E1 04 301146 B6 6 86 8224 No11
FIX PLUS
Category I: 9 to 18 kg; Britax-Römer DUO PLUS E1 03 301133 B6 6 86 8217 Yes
between approximately 8 A000 920 10 21 No12 ee
months and 4 years
61
Safety
Occupant safety
Weight categories and Manufacturer Type Approval number DaimlerChrysler Automatic child
ages order number seat recognition
Category II/III: 15 to Britax-Römer KID E1 03 301148 B6 6 86 8308 No12
36 kg;
B6 6 86 8309 Yes
between approximately
3½ and 12 years B6 6 86 8302 No12
B6 6 86 8303 Yes
11 The child restraint system must not be fitted to the front-passenger seat.
12 If you are using a child restraint system without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position.
ISOFIX* child seat securing system

Weight class Weight cate- Manufacturer Type Type approval Category Automatic
gory number DaimlerChrys- child seat rec-
ler order num- ognition
ber
A 9 to 18 kg - - - - - -
B 9 to 18 kg - - - - - -
B1 9 to 18 kg Römer DUO PLUS E1 03 301133 Universal B6 6 86 8217 Yes
B6 6 86 8218 No
C 9 to 18 kg - - - - - -
up to 13 kg
D 9 to 18 kg - - - - - -
up to 13 kg
62
Safety
Occupant safety
Weight class Weight cate- Manufacturer Type Type approval Category Automatic
gory number DaimlerChrys- child seat rec-
ler order num- ognition
ber
E up to 10 kg - - - - - -
up to 13 kg Römer BABY SAFE E1 04 301146 Universal B6 6 86 8224 No
ISOFIX PLUS
F up to 10 kg - - - - - -
G up to 10 kg - - - - - -
Automatic child seat recognition* on The warning lamp13 is located on the The automatic child seat recognition sen-
the front-passenger seat centre console. sor system in the front-passenger seat au-
tomatically detects whether a special
If your vehicle does not have automatic Mercedes-Benz child seat with automatic
child seat recognition* on the front- child seat recognition has been fitted. If
passenger seat, this is indicated by a spe- this is the case, the 5 PASSENGER
cial sticker. AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the centre
The sticker is affixed to the side of the console lights up. The front-passenger
cockpit on the front-passenger side. It is front airbag has been disabled.
visible when you open the front-passenger
door. G Risk of injury
If 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning
13 The warning lamp lights up briefly when you turn lamp does not light up when the child re-
the key to position 2 in the ignition lock even on 1 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warn- straint system is fitted, the front-passenger
vehicles which do not have automatic child seat
recognition* on the front-passenger seat. How- ing lamp front airbag has not been deactivated. The ee
ever, it has no function and does not indicate that child could suffer life-threatening injuries if
there is automatic child seat recognition* on the
front-passenger seat.
63
Safety
Occupant safety
the front-passenger front airbag is de- must always be resting on the seat cushion. I to light up even when there is no child
ployed. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system seat with automatic child seat recogni-
If the above warning lamp does not light up cannot perform its intended protective function fitted, meaning that the front-
when the child seat is fitted, proceed as fol- tion in the event of an accident, and could passenger airbag will not be deployed in
lows: even lead to injuries. the event of an accident
I Do not use a rearward-facing child re- I not to light up briefly when the key is
straint system on the front-passenger i The windowbag, the sidebag and the belt turned to position 2 in the ignition lock.
seat. tensioner on the front-passenger side are still
I Fit a rearward-facing child restraint sys- active even if the front-passenger front airbag
is disabled. ISOFIX child seat securing system in
tem on a suitable rear seat.
the rear
or
I Only use a forward-facing child seat on
G Risk of injury
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system
the front-passenger seat and move the Do not place items of electronic equipment for special child seats in the rear. There
front-passenger seat to its rearmost po- on the front-passenger seat, e.g.: are securing rings for two child restraint
sition. I laptops, if switched on systems on the left- and right-hand rear
I Have the automatic child seat recogni- I mobile phones seats between the seat cushions and the
tion checked at a qualified specialist I cards with transponders, e.g. ski passes backrest.
workshop which has the necessary spe-
cialist knowledge and tools to carry out
or access passes
as the signals from electronic equipment
G Risk of injury
the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec- can cause interference in the sensor system A child restraint system secured by the ISO-
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz of the automatic child seat recognition sys- FIX child seat securing system does not pro-
Service Centre for this purpose. In par- tem. This can lead to a system malfunction vide sufficient protection for children weigh-
ticular, work relevant to safety or on and cause the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG ing more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not
safety-related systems must be carried OFF warning lamp: secure children weighing more than 22 kg
out at a qualified specialist workshop. in a child restraint system secured by the
To ensure that the automatic child seat rec- ISOFIX child seat securing system. If the
ognition on the front-passenger seat func- child weighs more than 22 kg, secure the
tions correctly, never place objects (e.g. a child restraint system using a lap-shoulder
cushion) under the child restraint system. belt.
The entire base of the child restraint system
64
Safety
Occupant safety
G Risk of injury Always have child restraint systems and

their securing systems which are damaged
If the child restraint system is not fitted cor- or which have been subjected to a heavy
rectly to a suitable vehicle seat, the child load in an accident checked and, if neces-
cannot be secured in the event of an acci- sary, replaced immediately at a qualified
dent or sudden braking and may be serious- specialist workshop which has the neces-
ly or even fatally injured. Follow the manu- sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry
facturer's installation instructions when fit- out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec-
ting the child restraint system. ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
On the rear seats, only use child restraint Service Centre for this purpose. In particu-
systems with an ISOFIX child seat securing lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-re-
system* and which have been recommen- lated systems must be carried out at a quali- Illustration showing a vehicle with
ded for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles. fied specialist workshop through-loading feature in the rear bench
An incorrectly fitted child restraint system seat*
could come loose and seriously or even ! When fitting the child restraint system, 1 Securing rings
fatally injure the child or other vehicle occu- make sure that the seat belt for the middle seat
pants. When fitting the child restraint sys- does not get trapped. G Risk of injury
tem, make sure that it is engaged in the se- Do not leave children unsupervised in the
curing rings on both sides. vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. They could:
G Risk of injury I injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
I be severely or even fatally injured by
If the child restraint system or its securing prolonged exposure to intense heat or
system, e.g. ISOFIX child seat securing sys- cold
tem, is damaged or has been subjected to a
load in an accident, the child secured in it
could be seriously or even fatally injured in TopTether
the event of an accident, braking or sudden ee
changes of direction. TopTether enables an additional connec-
tion between the child restraint system se-
cured with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It
65
Safety
Occupant safety
helps reduce even further the risk of in- Make sure not to interfere with the cor-
jury. rect routing of TopTether belt* 3.
The two TopTether anchorage points are E Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system
located on the rear shelf behind the outer with TopTether*. Comply with the man-
head restraints. ufacturer's installation instructions.
Child-proof locks
If children are travelling in the vehicle, you
can activate the child-proof locks for the
rear.
3 TopTether belt* for the ISOFIX child re-
straint system Child-proof locks for the rear doors
4 TopTether hook* The child-proof locks on the rear doors en-
5 Tether anchorage able you to secure each door individually.
E Move head restraint 1 upwards. If a door has been secured:
1 Head restraint E Guide TopTether belt* 3 under head I you will not be able to open it from the
2 Cover restraint 1 between the two head re- inside
5 TopTether anchorage straint rods. I you can only open it from the outside if
E Fold up cover 2 of TopTether anchor- the vehicle is unlocked. The locking
age 3. knobs are at the top on the inside of
the door.
E Hook TopTether hook* 4 into Top-
Tether anchorage 5. G Risk of injury
E Fold down cover 2 of TopTether an- Activate the child-proof locks on the rear
chorage 5. doors and deactivate the rear-compartment
E Move head restraint 1 back down window controls when children are travel-
again slightly if necessary (e page 86). ling in the vehicle. The children could other-
wise open doors or windows while the ve-
66
Safety
Driving safety systems
hicle is in motion, injuring themselves and hicle is in motion, injuring themselves and Driving safety systems
others. others.
In this section, you will find information
about the following driving safety systems:
I ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
I BAS (Brake Assist System)
I Adaptive brake lamps
I ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
I EBV (electronic brake-power distribu-
tion)
i In wintry road conditions, use winter tyres
(M+S tyres) and snow chains if necessary. Only
this way will ABS, BAS and ESP® be fully effec-
1 To activate 1 Indicator lamp
tive.
2 To deactivate 2 Button
E To activate or deactivate: press the E To activate or deactivate: press but- G Risk of accident
latch upwards 1 or downwards 2. ton 2. The risk of an accident increases if you drive
E Check that the child-proof locks are Indicator lamp 1 lights up or goes out. too quickly, especially when cornering, on
working properly. If it is lit, you can no longer operate the wet and icy roads and if you drive too close
rear side windows using the switches to the vehicle in front.
Override switch for the rear windows* in the rear compartment. The driving safety systems described in this
section are unable to reduce this risk or
G Risk of injury i Even when indicator lamp 1 is lit, you can
still open the rear side windows using the
override the laws of physics.
Activate the child-proof locks on the rear switches on the driver's door. You should therefore always adapt your driv-
doors and deactivate the rear-compartment ing style to suit the prevailing road and
window controls when children are travel- weather conditions and maintain a sufficient ee
ling in the vehicle. The children could other- distance from other road users and objects
wise open doors or windows while the ve- on the road.
67
Safety
For full braking application: The brakes will function as usual once you
E depress the brake pedal with maximum release the brake pedal. BAS is deacti-
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) force vated.
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a
way that the wheels do not lock when you G Risk of accident G Risk of accident
brake. This allows you to continue steering You should always adapt your driving style If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking sys-
the vehicle when braking. to suit the prevailing road and weather con- tem remains available with full brake boost-
ditions and maintain a sufficient distance ing effect. However, braking force is not au-
ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h tomatically increased in emergency braking
upwards, regardless of road-surface condi- from other road users and objects on the
road. situations and the stopping distance may in-
tions. crease.
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
ABS works on slippery surfaces, even braking. This limits the steerability of the ve-
when you only brake gently. hicle when braking and the braking distance
Adaptive brake lamps
G Risk of accident
may increase.
If ABS is deactivated due to a fault, then i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in
Do not depress the brake pedal several BAS is also deactivated. certain countries.
times in quick succession (pumping). De-
press the brake firmly and evenly. Pumping If you brake sharply from a speed of more
the brake pedal reduces the braking effect. than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by
BAS (Brake Assist) BAS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. This
BAS operates in emergency braking situa- warns traffic travelling behind.
Braking tions. If you depress the brake pedal If you brake from a speed of more than
When ABS intervenes when braking, you quickly, BAS automatically boosts the 70 km/h and bring the vehicle to a halt,
will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. braking force and thus shortens the stop- the hazard warning lamps switch on auto-
ping distance. matically once the vehicle is stationary
If ABS intervenes: and the brake lamps light up constantly if
E Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed
E continue to depress the brake pedal until the emergency braking situation is you depress the brake pedal again. The
with force until the braking situation is over. hazard warning lamps switch off automati-
over cally if you travel faster than 10 km/h.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
68
Safety
®
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ! If the vehicle is to be towed with the front
or rear axle raised, the ignition must be Trailer stabilising does not work if ESP® is
ESP® monitors driving stability and trac- switched off (key in position 0 or 1 in the igni- deactivated or switched off because of a
tion, i.e. power transmission between the tion lock). Application of the brakes by ESP® malfunction.
tyres and the road surface. could otherwise destroy the brake system on
ESP® detects when a wheel spins or the the front or rear axle. ETS (Electronic Traction Support)
vehicle enters a skid. ESP® stabilises the i Only use wheels with the recommended
vehicle by braking individual wheels and tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function prop-
Traction control is part of ESP®.
limiting the engine power output, and as- erly. Traction control brakes the drive wheels
sists you when pulling away on a wet or individually if they spin. This enables you
slippery road surface. ESP® also stabilises ESP® trailer stabilising to pull away and accelerate on slippery
the vehicle during braking. If your trailer begins to lurch, you can only surfaces, for example if the road surface is
When ESP® intervenes, the v warning stabilise the vehicle/trailer combination slippery on one side.
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. by depressing the brake firmly. Traction control remains active when you
In this situation, ESP® assists you and de- deactivate ESP®.
G Risk of accident
tects any lurching by the trailer. ESP®
If the v warning lamp in the instrument slows the vehicle down by braking and lim-
G Risk of accident
cluster flashes, proceed as follows: iting the engine output until the vehicle/ Traction control cannot reduce the risk of
I Do not deactivate ESP® under any cir- trailer combination has stabilised. an accident if you drive too fast. Traction
cumstances. control cannot override the laws of physics.
Trailer stabilising is active from about
I Only depress the accelerator pedal as 65 km/h.
far as necessary when pulling away.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
I Adapt your driving style to suit the pre- G Risk of accident
vailing road and weather conditions. ESP® is activated automatically when the
If the road and weather conditions are bad,
The vehicle could otherwise go into a skid. trailer stabilising will not be able to prevent
engine is running.
ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident the trailer from lurching or reduce the risk It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the
if you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override of accident. Trailers with a high centre of following situations: ee
the laws of physics. gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect
this.
69
Safety
I when using snow chains EBV (electronic brake-power distri-
I in deep snow bution)
I on sand or gravel EBV monitors and controls the brake pres-
sure on the rear wheels to improve driving
G Risk of accident stability under braking.
Activate ESP® as soon as the situations de-
scribed above no longer apply. ESP® will
G Risk of accident
otherwise not be able to stabilise the ve- If EBV is malfunctioning, the brake system
hicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel is still available with full brake boosting ef-
starts to spin. fect. However, the rear wheels can still lock,
1 To deactivate/activate ESP® e.g. under full braking. This could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle and cause an
If you deactivate ESP®: E To deactivate/activate: press button accident. You should therefore adapt your
I ESP® no longer improves driving stabil- 1. driving style to the different handling char-
ity The v warning lamp in the instru- acteristics.
I the engine's torque is no longer limited ment cluster comes on or goes out.
and the drive wheels can spin. The
spinning of the wheels results in a cut- G Risk of accident
ting action, which provides better grip If the v warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up permanently when the en-
I traction control is still activated
gine is running, ESP® is deactivated or not
I ESP® still provides support when you available due to a malfunction. The risk of
brake your vehicle skidding is then increased in
i If ESP® is deactivated and one or more certain situations.
wheels start to spin, the v warning lamp in You should therefore always adapt your driv-
the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® does not ing style to suit the prevailing road and
then stabilise the vehicle. weather conditions.
70
Safety
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems ATA* (anti-theft alarm system) E To activate: lock the vehicle with the
key or, if the vehicle has KEYLESS GO*,
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if by touching the outside door handle.
Immobiliser the alarm system is primed and you open:
Indicator lamp 1 flashes. The alarm
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle I a door system is primed after approximately
from being started without the correct I the boot lid 15 seconds.
key.
I the bonnet E To deactivate: unlock the vehicle us-
Activating the immobiliser The alarm is also triggered if a door or the ing the key or, on vehicles with KEY-
boot is opened using the emergency key LESS GO*, by opening the door/boot
E With the key: remove the key from
element. lid.
the ignition lock.
E With KEYLESS GO*: press the KEY- i The alarm is not switched off even if you Switching off the alarm
LESS GO button on the dashboard. close an open door again.
E With the key: insert the key into the
The engine switches off. ignition lock.
Deactivating the immobiliser The alarm is switched off.
or
E With the key: turn the key to position
2 in the ignition lock. E Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
key.
E With KEYLESS GO*: press the KEY-
LESS GO button on the dashboard The alarm is switched off.
twice without depressing the brake E With KEYLESS GO*: grasp the outside
pedal. door handle. The key must be outside
i The immobiliser is always deactivated 1 Indicator lamp the vehicle.
when you start the engine. The alarm is switched off.
or ee
71
Safety
Anti-theft systems
E Press the KEYLESS GO* button on the Deactivate tow-away protection manually i Tow-away protection remains deactivated
dashboard. The key must be inside the if your vehicle: until you unlock and lock the vehicle again.
vehicle. I is being transported
The alarm is switched off. Interior motion sensor*
I is being loaded, e.g. onto a ferry or car
transporter A visual and audible alarm is triggered if
Tow-away protection* your vehicle is locked and a movement is
I is being parked on a movable surface, detected in the vehicle interior, e.g. if
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if e.g. split-level garages someone breaks your vehicle's side win-
your vehicle's angle of inclination is al- This will prevent false alarms. dow or reaches into the vehicle interior.
tered while tow-away protection is primed.
i The tow-away protection alarm is triggered Priming the interior motion sensor
if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for ex-
ample. E Make sure that the side windows and
the sliding/tilting sunroof*/panorama
Activating tow-away protection sliding/tilting sunroof* are closed.
E Lock the vehicle with the key or, if the This will prevent false alarms.
vehicle has KEYLESS GO*, by touching E Lock the vehicle with the key or, if the
the outside door handle. vehicle has KEYLESS GO*, by touching
Tow-away protection is primed after ap- the outside door handle.
proximately 30 seconds. The interior motion sensor is primed
1 To deactivate tow-away protection
after approximately 30 seconds.
Deactivating tow-away protection 2 Indicator lamp
E Remove the key from the ignition lock.
i Do not leave anything, e.g. mascots, hang-
Tow-away protection is automatically de- ing on the rear-view mirror or on the grab han-
activated when you unlock your vehicle E Press button 1. dles on the roof lining. These could otherwise
with the key or with KEYLESS GO*. Indicator lamp 2 lights up briefly. trigger false alarms.
E Lock the vehicle with the key or, if the

vehicle has KEYLESS GO*, by touching
the outside door handle.
72
Safety
Anti-theft systems
Deactivating the interior motion sensor
G Risk of injury
Deactivate the interior motion sensor if Do not leave children unsupervised in the
you lock your vehicle and: vehicle. They could open the doors, release
I people or animals remain in the vehicle the parking brake or injure themselves on
moving parts, thus endangering themselves
I the windows remain open
and others.
I the sliding/tilting sunroof*/the pano-
rama sliding/tilting sunroof* remains i The interior motion sensor remains deacti-
open vated until you unlock and lock the vehicle
This will prevent false alarms. again.
1 To deactivate the interior motion sen-

sor
2 Indicator lamp
E Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 flashes briefly.
73
74
Controls
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . 76 On-board computer (vehicles
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 with the luxury multi-function
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 steering wheel*, 12 buttons). . 125
Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Driving systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Memory functions* . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Thermotronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Rear window heating . . . . . . . . 170
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . 104 Sliding/tilting sunroof* . . . . . . 171
Side windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Panorama sliding/tilting sun-
Driving and parking. . . . . . . . . . 108 roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Loading and stowing. . . . . . . . . 177
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . 118 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
On-board computer (vehicles
with multi-function steering
wheel, 4 buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . 120
75
Controls
Opening and closing
Opening and closing theft, only use the key in the immediate vi- Factory settings
cinity of the vehicle.
E To unlock centrally: press the k
Key The remote control is configured at the unlocking button.
factory to lock and unlock the following
centrally: The turn signals flash once. The locking
knobs in the doors pop up. The anti-
I The doors theft alarm system is deactivated. If it
I The boot lid is dark, the surround lighting also
comes on.
I The fuel filler flap
If you do not open either a door or the
G Risk of accident boot lid after you have unlocked the ve-
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, it will relock automatically after ap-
hicle. They could open even a locked door proximately 40 seconds.
from the inside or start the vehicle if the key E To lock centrally: press the locking
Key with remote control is left in it and thereby endanger themselves button j.
1 Battery check lamp and others. You should therefore take the
The turn signals flash three times if the
2 j Locking button key with you when leaving the vehicle, even
doors and boot lid are closed. The lock-
3 i Unlocking button for the boot lid if you are only leaving it for a short time.
ing knobs in the doors drop down. The
4 Release catch for emergency key ele-
anti-theft alarm system* is primed and
ment ! Do not expose the key to high levels of the active drive authorisation system is
5 Emergency key element electromagnetic radiation. Otherwise, it may no activated.
6 k Unlocking button longer function correctly.
The vehicle's equipment includes two keys i You can also open and close the sliding/ Individual settings
with remote control. tilting sunroof* or the panoramic sliding/tilting
sunroof* and the side windows with the remote If you frequently drive alone, you may wish
There is an emergency key element in to change the function of the remote con-
control (e page 107).
every key. 5. trol. Pressing the k button will then
The key allows you to lock and unlock the only unlock the driver's door and the fuel
vehicle from some distance. To prevent filler flap.
76
Controls
Opening and closing
E To change the setting: press and hold and the active drive authorisation sys- KEYLESS GO key*
down the k and j buttons si- tem is activated.
multaneously for approximately six sec-
onds until battery check lamp 4 Restoring the factory settings
flashes twice. E Press the k and j buttons si-
The remote control will then function as multaneously for approximately six sec-
follows: onds until battery check lamp 1
E To unlock the driver's door: press flashes twice.
the k button once.
Checking the batteries
The turn signals flash once. The locking
knob in the door pops up. The anti-theft E Press the j or k button.
alarm system* is primed and the active The batteries in the remote control are KEYLESS GO key
drive authorisation system is deacti- functional if battery check lamp 1 1 Battery check lamp
vated. lights up briefly. 2 j Locking button
E To unlock centrally: press the k i You could inadvertently lock or unlock the 3 i Unlocking button for the boot lid
button twice. vehicle if you press the buttons on the remote 4 Release catch for emergency key ele-
ment
The turn signals flash once. The locking control.
5 Emergency key element
knobs in the doors pop up. The anti- 6 k Unlocking button
theft alarm system* is primed and the
active drive authorisation system is de- The items of optional equipment which
activated. can be supplied with your vehicle include
two KEYLESS GO keys.
E To lock centrally: press the j but-
ton. There is an emergency key element 5 in
every key.
The turn signals flash three times. The
locking knobs in the doors drop down. The factory setting for the key is pro-
grammed to have the vehicle centrally un- ee
The anti-theft alarm system* is primed
lock the following with the KEYLESS GO
77
Controls
Opening and closing
key you are carrying when you pull the i You can also close the side windows and no other key in the vehicle, you will no
door handle or the boot lid (e page 78): the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panoramic longer be able to lock or start the ve-
sliding/tilting sunroof simultaneously with the hicle.
I The doors KEYLESS GO key (e page 107).
I The boot lid If the vehicle has been parked for a long time, Factory settings
I The fuel filler flap you must pull the door handle to activate the E To unlock centrally: grasp the door
KEYLESS GO function.
G Risk of accident handle.
Important notes The turn signals flash once. The locking
Never leave children unsupervised in the ve-
knobs in the doors pop up. The anti-
hicle. They could even open a locked door I Always carry the KEYLESS GO key on
from the inside, or, if a valid KEYLESS GO
theft alarm system* is deactivated.
your person.
key has been left in the vehicle, start the ve- If you do not open either a door or the
hicle with it or by pressing the KEYLESS GO
I Do not keep the KEYLESS GO key to- boot lid after you have unlocked the ve-
button on the dashboard, thereby endanger- gether with electronic equipment, such hicle, it will relock automatically after
ing themselves and others. Switch off the as a mobile phone, or metallic objects, approximately 40 seconds.
engine and take the KEYLESS GO key with such as coins or foils.
you, even if you are only leaving the vehicle
i It is possible that the vehicle may be inad-
Otherwise, the KEYLESS GO key func- vertently unlocked if the KEYLESS GO key is
for a short time. tions may be impaired. within one metre from the vehicle and
I To lock or unlock the vehicle from the I the door handle is splashed by a gush of
! Do not expose the KEYLESS GO key to high outside using the KEYLESS GO key, the water
levels of electromagnetic radiation. Otherwise, key must be no more than a metre
it may no longer function correctly. I you are cleaning the door handle
away from the door or boot.
i You can also use the KEYLESS GO key as a E To lock centrally: make sure all the
I In order for the engine to be started us- doors are closed.
normal key with a remote control. The ignition
ing the KEYLESS GO button on the
lock is under the KEYLESS GO button on the E Touch the door handle on the outside.
dashboard (e page 82). Pull the KEYLESS GO
dashboard, the KEYLESS GO key must
button out to give you access to the ignition be in the vehicle. The turn signals flash three times. The
lock. I If the KEYLESS GO key is removed from locking knobs in the doors drop down.
the vehicle, for instance inside luggage The anti-theft alarm system* is primed.
or in an item of clothing, and there is
78
Controls
Opening and closing
Individual settings times. The anti-theft alarm system* is
primed.
If you frequently drive alone, you may wish
to change the function of the KEYLESS GO Restoring the factory settings
key. With this individual setting, only the
driver's door and the fuel filler flap unlock E Press the k and j buttons si-
when you grasp the door handle on the multaneously for approximately six sec-
driver's side. onds until the battery check lamp
flashes twice.
E To activate/deactivate: press and
hold the k and j buttons simul- Checking the batteries
taneously for approximately six sec-
onds until the battery check lamp E Press the j or k button. 1 Locking knob
flashes twice. The KEYLESS GO key batteries are 2 Door handle
The KEYLESS GO key will then function functional if the battery check lamp E Pull door handle 2.
as follows: lights up briefly. If it does not light up, If the door is locked, locking knob 1
replace the batteries immediately. pops up. The door is unlocked and can
E To unlock the driver's door: pull the
door handle on the driver's door. i You may inadvertently lock or unlock the be opened.
vehicle if you press the buttons on the KEY-
E To lock centrally: pull the front- LESS GO key.
passenger door handle or one of the Automatic locking
rear doors. The vehicle will lock automatically once
Opening the doors from the inside
The locking knobs in the doors pop up. you have pulled away.
The turn signals flash once. The anti- You can open a door from the inside at
You can open a door from the inside at
theft alarm system* is deactivated. any time, even if it has been locked.
any time, even if it has been locked.
E To lock centrally: touch the door han- i However, you can only open a locked rear i The doors unlock automatically in the event
door from the inside if the child-proof locks
dle on the outside. of an accident if the force of the impact ex-
have not been activated.
The locking knobs in the doors drop ceeds a predetermined level. ee
down. The turn signals flash three The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels begin to
79
Controls
Opening and closing
turn. There is therefore a risk of being locked Locking/unlocking the vehicle from
out when the vehicle is being pushed or tested the inside
on a dynamometer.
You can lock or unlock the vehicle cen-
Activating and deactivating the auto- trally from the inside using the central
matic locking locking/unlocking button. This feature
may be useful if, for example, you wish to
Vehicles with luxury multi-function unlock the front-passenger door from the
steering wheel: you can also activate and inside or lock the vehicle before you pull
deactivate the automatic locking via the away.
on-board computer (e page 139).
G Risk of accident
1 To unlock
Do not leave children unsupervised in the 2 To lock
vehicle. They could open a door from the in-
E To unlock: press button 1.
side ‑ even if it is locked ‑ and thereby en-
danger themselves and others. E To lock: press button 2.
i You can open a door from the inside at any Opening and closing the boot lid
time, even if it has been locked. However, you manually
can only open a locked rear door from the in-
side if the child-proof locks have not been acti- Opening from the outside
vated.
1 To switch off You can only open the boot manually if
2 To switch on i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally you have unlocked it first.
from the inside if the vehicle has been locked
Switching on from the outside using the remote control or E To unlock centrally: press the k
the KEYLESS GO key*. button on the key.
E Press button 2 until you hear a tone.
It is only possible to lock the vehicle centrally if
Switching off the front-passenger door is closed.
E Press button 1 until you hear a tone.
80
Controls
Opening and closing
Opening the boot lid automatically
i You can only open the boot lid when the
vehicle is stationary.
Opening automatically from the out-

side
You can unlock and open the boot lid si-
multaneously with the key.
E Press and hold the i button on the
key until the boot lid is open.
To open the boot lid To close the boot lid from the outside
E Pull the handle in the direction of the 1 Recess Opening automatically from the inside
arrow. 2 Recess
You can unlock and open the boot lid si-
E Pull down the boot lid by recess 1 or
E Lift up the boot lid or let it swing up au- multaneously from the driver's seat using
tomatically. 2.
the remote opening switch.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally
Closing from the outside locked, you will only have to close the boot lid
again. The boot lid is then locked automati-
i Do not leave the key in the boot. You could cally.
otherwise lock yourself out.
E If necessary, lock the vehicle using the
j button on the key
or
E KEYLESS GO*: grasp the door handle.
ee
1 Remote opening switch
81
Controls
Key positions
E Press and hold remote opening switch Key positions KEYLESS GO*
1 until the boot lid opens.
Pressing the KEYLESS GO button repeat-
Key edly without depressing the brake pedal
corresponds to the different key positions
in the ignition lock.
If you depress the brake pedal while press-
ing the KEYLESS GO button, the engine
starts immediately.
Ignition lock
} To remove the key (steering wheel
lock)
$ Power supply for some consumers,
such as the seat adjustment function
1 KEYLESS GO button
% Ignition (power supply for all consum-
ers) and drive position Position 0
& To start the engine The on-board electronics are in status 0,
i The indicator and warning lamps light up meaning "no key in the ignition lock", until
when you switch on the ignition. They go out KEYLESS GO button 1 has been pressed.
when the engine is running. This shows that
the indicator and warning lamps for each sys-
tem are operational.
82
Controls
Seats
Position 1 Seats
E Press KEYLESS GO button 1 once. Information on folding the rear seat back-
You can now open the sliding/tilting rest can be found on (e page 179).
sunroof, for example. You can adjust your seats either manually
i If you now press KEYLESS GO button 1 and electrically, or electrically only, de-
twice while the driver's door is open, the power pending on your vehicle's equipment.
supply is disconnected again.
G Risk of injury
Position 2 (ignition) The seats can be adjusted when the key is
removed and a door is open. For this rea-
E Press KEYLESS GO button 1 twice. 1 KEYLESS GO button son, children should never be left unsuper-
i If you now press KEYLESS GO button 1 2 Ignition lock vised in the vehicle. They could become
once while the driver's door is open, the power i If you switch back to the KEYLESS GO func- trapped by the seats moving out of position.
supply is disconnected again. tion, the system requires 2 seconds' recogni-
i The indicator and warning lamps light up tion time before you can use the KEYLESS GO
when you switch on the ignition. They go out button as usual. G Risk of accident
when the engine is running. This shows that Only adjust the driver's seat when the ve-
the indicator and warning lamps for each sys- hicle is stationary. You will otherwise be dis-
tem are operational. tracted from the road and traffic conditions
and you could lose control of the vehicle as
Removing the KEYLESS GO button a result of the seat moving. This could cause
an accident.
You can detach the KEYLESS GO button
from the ignition lock and start the vehicle
with a key as usual.
G Risk of injury
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
as you adjust the seat. ee
Observe the notes concerning the airbag
system.
83
Controls
Seats
Secure children as recommended. E Release handle 4 again. Head restraint height
Make sure that you hear the seat click
into position. G Risk of injury
Adjusting the seats manually and Make sure that the central area of the head
electrically Seat cushion angle restraint supports the back of your head at
Adjust the angle so that your thighs are about eye level. You could seriously injure
your neck if your head is not correctly sup-
lightly supported.
ported by the head restraint in the event of
E Turn thumbwheel 3 in the required di- an accident. Never travel without a correctly
rection. adjusted and engaged head restraint.
Backrest angle
E Make sure that the key is in position 1
or 2 in the ignition lock or that the re-
spective door is open.
E Slide the button forwards or back in
1 Backrest angle the direction of arrow 1.
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion angle Seat height
4 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
! Make sure that there are no objects in the or 2 in the ignition lock or that the re-
footwell or behind the seats when adjusting the
seats. You could otherwise damage the seats spective door is open. 1 Release catch
and the objects. E Slide the button up or down in the di- Adjust the height of the head restraint
rection of arrow 2. manually.
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
E To raise: pull the head restraint up to
E Lift handle 4 and slide the seat for- the desired position.
wards or backwards. E To lower: press release catch 1 in
the direction of the arrow and push the
84
Controls
Seats
head restraint down to the desired po- Adjusting the seats fully electri- Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
sition. cally* E Slide the button forwards or back in
Head restraint position The buttons are located on the door con- the direction of arrow 4.
trol panel.
Seat height
E Slide the button up or down in the di-
rection of arrow 3.
Seat cushion angle
Adjust the angle so that your thighs are
lightly supported.
E Slide the button up or down in the di-
rection of arrow 2.
Adjust the position of the head restraint
1 Head restraint height Backrest angle
manually.
2 Seat cushion angle
E Push or pull the head restraint in the di- E Slide the button forwards or back in
3 Seat height
rection of the arrow. 4 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment the direction of arrow 5.
5 Backrest angle Head restraint height
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats when adjusting the G Risk of injury
seats. You could otherwise damage the seats
and the objects. Make sure that the central area of the head
restraint supports the back of your head at
See the "Storing settings*" section for about eye level. You could seriously injure
more information (e page 93). your neck if your head is not correctly sup-
ported by the head restraint in the event of ee
an accident. Never travel without a correctly
adjusted and engaged head restraint.
85
Controls
Seats
This will reduce the risk of injury to the head Adjusting the head restraint angle
E Slide the button up or down in the di- and neck in the event of accidents or similar
You can adjust the angle of the two outer
rection of arrow 1. situations.
head restraints.
Head restraint position E Pull or push the top of the head re-
You can adjust the height of the two outer
head restraints. straint until it is in the desired position.
You can adjust the height of the head re- Installing/removing the head re-
straints. straints of the rear bench seats (ve-
hicles with through-loading feature)
G Risk of injury
Occupants should only travel sitting on
seats which have the head restraints in-
stalled. This reduces the risk of injury to the
passengers in the rear in the event of an ac-
Adjust the position of the head restraint cident.
manually.
E Push or pull the head restraint in the di- i It is not possible to remove the head re-
rection of the arrow. straints from the front seats, or, in vehicles
1 Release catch
without the through-loading feature, the head
E Higher: pull the head restraint up to restraints on the rear bench seats.
Rear seat head restraints the desired height.
Adjusting the head restraint height E Lower: press release catch 1 and
push the head restraint down until it is
G Risk of injury in the desired position.
Adjust the head restraint so that the centre
of the head restraint supports the seat oc-
cupant's head at about eye level.
86
Controls
Seats
Lumbar support*
The lumbar support for the front seats can
be adjusted to provide optimum support
for your back.
1 Release catch 1 Seat heating

E Release the rear seat backrest and fold i The system automatically switches down
it forwards slightly (e page 179). from level 3 to level 2 after approximately five
minutes.
E To remove: pull the head restraint up
to the stop. 1 Adjustment lever The system automatically switches down from
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten mi-
E Press release catch 1 and pull the E Move adjustment lever 1 until the de- nutes.
head restraint out of the guides. sired backrest contour is achieved.
The system automatically switches off approxi-
E To refit: insert the head restraint so mately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.
that the notches on the bar are on the Seat heating*
left when viewed in the direction of E Make sure that the key is in position 1
The three red indicator lamps in the button or 2 in the ignition lock.
travel. indicate the heating level you have se-
E Push the head restraint down until you lected. E To switch on: press button 1 repeat-
hear it click it into place. edly until the desired heating level is
set.
E Fold back the rear seat backrest until it
engages (e page 179). E To switch off: press button 1 repeat- ee
edly until all the indicator lamps go out.
87
Controls
Steering wheel
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat Steering wheel I the steering wheel can be reached with
heating may switch off. your arms slightly bent
You can adjust your steering wheel either
manually or electrically, depending on your I you can move your legs freely
vehicle's equipment. I you can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly
G Risk of accident
If you drive without the steering wheel ad- Adjusting the steering wheel man-
justment mechanism being locked in posi- ually
tion, you could be startled as a result of the
steering wheel moving unexpectedly. How-
ever, the steerability of the vehicle is not af-
fected.
Only adjust the steering wheel when the ve-
hicle is stationary and do not pull away until
the steering wheel adjustment mechanism
is locked in position.
The electrically adjustable steering wheel*
can be adjusted when the key is removed
from the ignition lock and the driver's door
is open. Do not, therefore, leave children un- 1 Release catch
supervised in the vehicle as they could be- 2 Height adjustment
come trapped as the steering wheel is ad- 3 Fore-and-aft adjustment
justed.
E Fold release catch 1 down com-
pletely.
i When you adjust the steering wheel, make
sure that: The steering column is unlocked.
E Adjust the steering wheel to the de-
sired position.
88
Controls
Steering wheel
E Fold release catch 1 up completely. Easy-entry/exit feature* The steering column stops moving immedi-
The steering wheel is locked in posi- ately.
The easy-entry/exit feature makes getting
tion. in and out of your vehicle easier. Never leave children unsupervised in the ve-
hicle. They could open the driver's door and
The steering wheel swings upwards when thereby unintentionally activate the easy-en-
Adjusting the steering wheel electri- you: try feature and become trapped.
cally*
I remove the key from the ignition lock
I open the driver's door when the key is The most recent position of the steering
in the ignition lock or in position 1 wheel is stored.
The steering wheel is moved automatically You can activate and deactivate the easy-
to the position previously set when the entry/exit feature using the on-board com-
key is inserted into the ignition lock with puter (e page 139).
the driver's door closed.
i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
it has not already reached the upper end stop.
1 Steering column height

G Risk of injury
2 Steering column fore-and-aft adjust- Make sure that nobody can become trapped
ment when you activate the easy-entry/exit fea-
ture.
E Press the lever in the direction of ar-
If there is a risk of becoming trapped, stop
rows 1 or 2 until the steering wheel
the adjustment procedure. To halt the pro-
has moved into the desired position. cedure:
You can find more information under: I press the steering-column adjustment
I Easy-entry/exit feature (e page 89) switch
I Storing settings (e page 93)
I press one of the memory function posi-
tion buttons
89
Controls
Mirrors
Mirrors Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Before starting off, adjust the mirrors in
such a way that you can get a good over-
G Risk of accident
view of road and traffic conditions. The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the
image. Objects are actually closer than they
appear. You could misjudge the distance
Rear-view mirror from vehicles driving behind and cause an
E Adjust the rear-view mirror manually. accident, e.g. when changing lane. For this
reason, make sure of the actual distance
Rear-view mirror (manual anti-dazzle) from the vehicle driving behind by glancing
over your shoulder.
The mirrors are automatically heated 1 Left-hand exterior mirror

when: 2 Right-hand exterior mirror
3 Adjustment button
I the rear window heating is switched on
(e page 170) E Make sure that the key is in position 2
I the outside temperature is low
E Press button 1 for the left-hand exteri-
or mirror or button 2 for the right-
hand exterior mirror.
1 Anti-dazzle switch The indicator lamp in the correspond-
E Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle ing button lights up in red.
switch 1 forwards or back. The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can only adjust the se-
lected mirror using adjustment button
3 as long as the indicator lamp is lit.
E Press adjustment buttons 3 up, down,
or to the left and right until you have
90
Controls
Mirrors
adjusted the exterior mirror to the cor- Folding the exterior mirrors in or out i Resetting is necessary in order for the
rect position. automatically* "Fold in mirrors when locking" function to work
(e page 140).
i The convex exterior mirrors give a larger When the "Fold in mirrors when locking"
field of vision. function is activated in the on-board com-
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors*
See the "Storing settings*" section for puter (e page 140),
more information (e page 93). The rear-view mirror and the exterior mir-
I the exterior mirrors fold in automati-
ror on the driver's side automatically go in-
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out cally as soon as you lock the vehicle
to anti-dazzle mode if the ignition is
electrically* from the outside
switched on and incident light from head-
I the exterior mirrors fold out again auto- lamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view
matically as soon as you unlock the ve- mirror.
hicle and then open the driver's or
The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle
front-passenger door
mode if reverse gear is engaged or the in-
i If you have activated the function and fold terior lighting is switched on.
in the exterior mirrors using button 1, they
will not be folded out automatically. You can G Risk of accident
then only fold out the exterior mirrors using
If the incident light from headlamps cannot
button 1.
strike the sensor in the rear-view mirror, for
Resetting the exterior mirrors instance when the rear window blind* is ex-
tended, the mirrors' automatic anti-dazzle
1 Folds the exterior mirrors in or out If the battery has been disconnected or function will not operate.
E Make sure that the key is in position 1 has become discharged, the exterior mir- Incident light could then dazzle you. This
or 2 in the ignition lock. rors must be reset. may prevent you from observing the traffic
E Make sure that the key is in position 1 conditions, thereby causing an accident. In
E Briefly press button 1.
in the ignition lock. this case, switch the rear-view mirror to
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. anti-dazzle mode manually.
E Briefly press button 1. ee
91
Controls
Mirrors
E Make sure that button for the exterior
G Risk of injury
mirror on the front-passenger side is
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an au- pressed.
tomatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. The exterior mirror on the front-
Electrolyte is a strong irritant and must not passenger side moves to the stored
be allowed to come into contact with your parking position.
skin, eyes or respiratory organs.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
If electrolyte comes into contact with your
eyes or skin, rinse thoroughly with clean
side moves back to its original position:
water immediately. Consult a doctor if nec- I as soon as you exceed a speed of 10
essary. km/h
1 Left-hand exterior mirror
2 Right-hand exterior mirror
I about ten seconds after you have dis-
! If electrolyte drips onto the vehicle's paint- 3 Adjustment button engaged reverse gear
work, immediately rinse residue off the paint-
E Make sure that the parking position for
I if you press the button for the driver's
work thoroughly with clean water, otherwise
the paintwork will be damaged. the exterior mirror on the front- exterior mirror
Electrolyte cannot be rinsed off once it has passenger side is stored with the mem-
dried. ory function (e page 93).
Parking aid* in the ignition lock.
To make it easier to park, the exterior mir- E Engage reverse gear.
ror on the front-passenger side moves into The indicator lamp in the mirror selec-
the parking position as soon as you en- tor button of the most recently ad-
gage reverse gear. justed exterior mirror lights up.
92
Controls
Memory functions*
Memory functions* The memory button and the storage posi- Calling up a stored setting
tion buttons are located on the door con-
Storing settings
trol panel. G Risk of accident
Only activate the memory function on the
You can store up to three different set-
driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.
tings using the memory button.
You could otherwise be distracted as a re-
The following settings are stored as a sin- sult of the steering wheel or seat moving un-
gle memory preset: expectedly.
I Position of the seat, backrest and head
restraint. E Press the required storage position but-
I Driver's side: steering-wheel position ton until the seat, steering wheel and
mirrors are in the stored position.
I Driver's side: exterior mirror position
i The setting procedure is interrupted as
G Risk of accident E Adjust the seat (e page 83). soon as you release the storage position but-
ton.
Only activate the memory function on the E On the driver's side, also adjust the
driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. steering wheel (e page 88) and the mir- ! If you want to move the seat from the fully
You could otherwise be distracted as a re- rors (e page 90). reclined position to a stored seat position, first
sult of the steering wheel or seat moving un- raise the backrest using the seat switch. The
E Press the M memory button. seat could otherwise be damaged.
expectedly.
E Press one of storage position buttons
1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. Storing a parking position
The settings are stored in the selected To make it easier to park, you can store
storage position. the front-passenger side exterior mirror
position in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. ee
93
Controls
Seat belts
You can store a parking position for the E Use button 3 to adjust the exterior Seat belts
exterior mirror on the front-passenger side mirror to a position which allows you to
using the memory button. see the rear wheel and the kerb.
Wearing seat belts
You will find information about using the E Press M memory button 4.
exterior mirror's parking position in the E Press one of the arrows on adjustment G Risk of injury
"Parking aid" section (e page 92). button 3 within three seconds. A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or
The parking position is stored if the ex- which has not been engaged in the seat belt
buckle correctly, cannot perform its in-
terior mirror does not move.
tended protective function. Under certain
i If the mirror does move, repeat the steps. circumstances this could cause severe or
You can adjust the exterior mirror again after even fatal injuries.
storing the setting. Make sure that all occupants – in particular,
pregnant women – wear their seat belt cor-
rectly at all times.
I The seat belt must pass closely over
your body and must not be twisted. You
should therefore avoid wearing bulky
1 Left-hand exterior mirror clothing (e.g. a winter coat). The shoul-
2 Right-hand exterior mirror der belt section must be routed across
3 Adjustment button the middle of your shoulder – on no ac-
4 Memory button count across your neck or under your
E Make sure that the vehicle is stationary arm – and pulled tight against your
upper body. The lap belt must always
and that the key is in position 2 in the
pass across your lap as low down as
ignition lock.
possible, i.e. over your hip joints – not
E Select the front-passenger mirror using across your abdomen. If necessary,
the mirror adjustment switch. tighten the belt strap by pulling it down
94
Controls
Seat belts
slightly and retighten in the direction of I Children less than 1.50 m tall or under
the inertia reel. 12 years of age cannot wear the seat
I Do not route the belt strap across sharp belts properly. Therefore, always secure
or fragile objects, especially if these are these children in suitable child restraint
located on or in your clothing, e.g. spec- systems on suitable vehicle seats. You
tacles, pencils, keys, etc. The seat belt can find more information under “Chil-
strap could be damaged and tear in an dren in the vehicle” in the “Safety” sec-
accident and you or other vehicle occu- tion of the Owner's Manual. Follow the
pants could be injured. manufacturer's installation instructions
when fitting the child restraint system.
I Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time. On no account I Do not secure any objects with a seat
should children travel sitting on your lap belt if the seat belt is also being used by
or the lap of another occupant, as it one of the vehicle's occupants.
would not be possible to restrain the
child in the event of an accident, braking
or a sudden change in direction, which G Risk of injury
could result in severe or even fatal inju- A seat belt can only afford its intended de- 1 Belt sash guide
ries to the child and other occupants. gree of protection if the backrest is posi- 2 Belt tongue
I Persons less than 1.50 m tall cannot tioned as close to the vertical as possible 3 Release button
wear the seat belts correctly. For this and the occupant is sitting upright. Avoid 4 Buckle
reason, secure persons less than 1.50 m seat positions that do not allow the seat
E Pull the belt smoothly from belt sash
tall in specially designed, suitable re- belt to be routed correctly. You will find fur-
straint systems. ther information under "Seat" in the index. guide 1.
Position the backrest as close to the vertical E Route the belt over your shoulder.
as possible. Do not drive with the backrest
E Click belt tongue 2 into buckle 4.
reclined too far back. Otherwise, you could
be seriously or even fatally injured in the E If necessary, adjust the belt to the ap-
event of an accident or sudden braking. propriate height (e page 96).
ee
95
Controls
Seat belts
E If necessary, pull upwards on the shoul- Always have seat belts which have been the engine has been started. The seat belt
der section of the belt to tighten the damaged or subjected to a heavy load in an warning lamp < goes out when both
belt across your body. accident replaced at a qualified specialist the driver and the front passenger have
E To release the seat belt, press release workshop which has the necessary special- fastened their seat belt.
ist knowledge and tools for the work re- i Further information about the seat belt
button 3 and guide belt tongue 2
quired. Mercedes-Benz recommends that warning lamp < (e page 263).
back towards belt sash guide 1.
you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
G Risk of injury this purpose. In particular, work relevant to
safety or on safety-related systems must be Belt height adjustment
You could be injured in an accident if you carried out at a qualified specialist work- You can adjust the seat belt height on the
use seat belts which: shop driver's seat and front-passenger seat.
I are damaged
Adjust the belt to a height that allows it to
I have been subjected to a load in an acci-
be routed across the middle of your shoul-
dent Belt warning for driver and front der.
I have been modified passenger
The seat belts can then neither operate as The seat belt warning lamp < in the in-
intended nor perform their protective func- strument cluster reminds you that all oc-
tion as intended. cupants should fasten their seat belts. The
Do not route the belt strap across sharp seat belt warning lamp < may light up
edges. It could tear in the event of an acci- continuously or it may flash. Additionally
dent. there may be a warning tone.
Make sure that the seat belt is not caught in
The seat belt warning lamp < goes out
the door or in the seat adjustment mecha-
and the warning tone ceases when the
nism. It could be damaged.
driver and the front passenger have fas-
Check regularly that the seat belts are not tened their seat belt.
damaged. Belt height adjustment for front seats
You should never modify the seat belts your-
For certain countries only: independent of 1 Release catch
self. They might not function properly any whether the driver or the front passenger
more. are already secured, the seat belt warning
lamp < lights up for six seconds after
96
Controls
Lights
E To raise: slide the belt sash guide up- Vehicles with multi-function steering Lights
wards. wheel (4 buttons)
The belt sash guide engages in various I < No rr.st.belt engaged Light switch
positions. I < 1 rr.st.belt engaged For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz rec-
E To lower: press and hold release but- I < 2 rr.st.belts engaged ommends that you drive with the lights
ton 1. switched on even during the daytime. In
I < 3 rr.st.belts engaged some countries, daytime use of headlamps
E Adjust the belt sash guide to the appro-
priate height. Vehicles with luxury multi-function steer- varies due to legal requirements and self-
ing wheel* (12 buttons) imposed obligations. In these countries,
E Let go of release button 1 and make dipped-beam headlamps are switched on
sure that the belt sash guide has en- I < No rear seat belt engaged when the ignition is switched on. On ve-
gaged. I < 1 rear seat belt engaged hicles with a luxury multi-function steering
Please observe the information on wearing wheel*, you can use the on-board com-
I < 2 rear seat belts engaged
seat belts correctly (e page 94). puter to alter this setting in countries
I < 3 rear seat belts engaged where daytime driving lights are not legally
Rear seat belt status indicator You will see the rear seat belt status indi- required, see the section on daytime driv-
cator in the multi-function display for ing lights (e page 137).
i The status indicator for the rear seat belts
is only available for certain countries. about 30 seconds when you pull away and i If you drive in countries in which traffic
drive above 9 km/h or when the rear-seat drives on the opposite side of the road to the
The status indicator for the rear seat belts passengers fasten or release their seat country where the vehicle is registered, oncom-
tells you how many of the belt tongues are belts. ing traffic may be dazzled by the asymmetrical
inserted into the seat belt buckles. This dipped-beam headlamps. Have the headlamps
enables you to see whether the occupants changed to symmetrical dipped beam when
have fastened their seat belts. driving in these countries. You can obtain infor-
You can see the following messages in the mation about this from any Mercedes-Benz
multi-function display: Service Centre.
ee
97
Controls
Lights
Dipped-beam headlamps Automatic headlamp mode
E To switch on: turn the light switch to The side lamps, dipped-beam headlamps
B. and licence plate lighting are switched on
When the dipped-beam headlamps are automatically, depending on the bright-
switched on, the green parking lamp in- ness of the ambient light.
dicator lamp next to the light switch al-
so lights up.
G Risk of accident
If the light switch is set to * the head-
i On some country-specific vehicle models, lamps may temporarily switch off due to ex-
the dipped-beam headlamps come on as soon
posure to light, or the lights may not come
as the ignition is switched on.
$ a Left-hand parking lamp on automatically if it is foggy. When it is
% g Right-hand parking lamp Daytime driving lights* dark or foggy, you should therefore turn the
& M Lights off/daytime driving light switch to B. Otherwise, you could
lights* On vehicles with a luxury multi-function endanger yourself and others.
( * Automatic headlamp mode/day- steering wheel*, you can set daytime driv- The automatic headlamp feature is only an
time driving lights* ing lights using the on-board computer aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle
) C Side lamps, licence plate and in- (e page 138). This is not possible in coun- lighting at all times.
strument lighting tries where daytime driving lights are le-
* B Dipped-beam headlamps or gally required.
main-beam headlamps E To switch on: turn the light switch to G Risk of accident
, ¥ Front foglamps M or *. When it is dark or foggy, turn the light
. † Rear foglamp switch quickly from * to B. You
The dipped-beam headlamps, side could otherwise cause an accident if the
i A warning tone sounds when you remove lamps and licence plate lighting are
the key from the ignition lock and open the headlamps were to switch off temporarily.
switched on when the engine is run-
driver's door while the side lamps or dipped- ning.
beam headlamps are switched on.
The Switch off lights message appears in
the multi-function display.
98
Controls
Lights
E To switch on: turn the light switch to Combination switch (turn signals,
*. E To switch on: turn the light switch to main-beam headlamps and head-
The side lamps are switched on and off B. lamp flasher)
automatically when the key is in posi- i When the light switch is set to * you
tion 1 in the ignition lock. cannot switch on the front or rear foglamps.
The dipped-beam headlamps, side E To switch on the front foglamps: pull
lamps and licence plate lighting are the light switch out to the first stop.
switched on automatically when the en- The green ¥ indicator lamp next to
gine is running. the light switch lights up.
When the dipped-beam headlamps are E To switch on the rear foglamp: pull
switched on, the green parking lamp in- the light switch out to the second stop.
dicator lamp next to the light switch al-
so lights up. The yellow † indicator lamp next to
the light switch lights up. 1 Main-beam headlamps
Front foglamps/rear foglamp E To switch off: press the light switch in 2 Headlamp flasher
as far as it will go.
G Risk of accident Main-beam headlamps
If you suspect that driving conditions will be E To switch on: turn the light switch to
foggy, turn the light switch to B before B or * (e page 97).
you start your journey. Otherwise, your ve-
hicle may not be visible and you could there- E Press the combination switch in the di-
fore endanger yourself and others. rection of arrow 1.
The main-beam headlamps come on.
The A main-beam indicator lamp in
G Risk of accident
the instrument cluster lights up.
When it is dark or foggy, turn the light
switch quickly from * to B. You
could otherwise cause an accident if the
headlamps were to switch off temporarily.
99
Controls
Lights
Headlamp flasher briefly in the appropriate direction. The se- If the hazard warning lamps have been
lected turn signal flashes three times. switched on automatically, you can press the
E Pull the combination switch briefly in hazard warning lamps button to switch them
the direction of arrow 2. off. The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-
Hazard warning lamps
matically when you drive faster than 10 km/h.
Turn signals The hazard warning lamps still operate if
the ignition is switched off. They switch on
Adjusting the headlamp range
automatically if an airbag is deployed or if
you brake sharply and bring the vehicle to The headlamp range control allows you to
a halt from a speed of more than adjust the cone of light from the head-
70 km/h. lamps according to how your vehicle is la-
den. The cone of light otherwise changes
when seats are occupied or when the boot
is loaded or unloaded. This could impair
the lighting and dazzle oncoming traffic.
! The boot may only be laden up to the maxi-
mum permissible boot load. The permissible
1 To indicate a right turn rear axle load must not be exceeded.
2 To indicate a left turn i Models with xenon headlamps* do not
E To switch on: press the combination have a thumbwheel. The headlamp range is ad-
switch in the direction of arrow 1 or justed automatically.
2. You can only adjust the headlamp range
1 Hazard warning lamps button
The corresponding turn signal indicator while the engine is running.
E To switch on and off: press hazard
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
warning lamps button 1.
The combination switch returns to its
original position automatically after
i When you indicate a turn, only the turn sig-
nal lamps on that side of the vehicle light up
large steering movements. when the hazard warning lamps are switched
i If you only wish to indicate a minor change on.
of direction, press the combination switch
100
Controls
Lights
Headlamp cleaning system* Switching on the cornering light func-
tion
If the lights are switched on and you wipe
the windscreen with washer fluid, the E Switch on the turn signal using the
headlamps are automatically cleaned with combination switch (e page 99).
a high-pressure water jet. The headlamps The cornering lamp on the same side
are cleaned again every tenth time the as the turn signal comes on.
windscreen is wiped with washer fluid.
or
When you switch off the ignition, the auto-
matic headlamp cleaning feature is reset E Turn the steering wheel in the required
and counting is resumed from 0. direction.
1 Headlamp range thumbwheel The cornering lamp on the inside of the
Position Load Cornering light function (vehicles bend comes on.
0 Front seats occupied

with bi-xenon headlamps*) i If you have switched on the turn signal to
Specially-designed front foglamps fulfil the indicate a turn in one direction, but then turn
1 Front and rear seats occupied cornering light function. If you drive the steering wheel in the opposite direction,
around a tight bend, they light up the area the cornering lamp lights up on the side of the
2 Front and rear seats occupied, turn signal.
boot laden into which you are driving.
E Make sure that the engine is running. i The cornering lamps briefly light up on both
3 Front seats occupied and max- sides of the vehicle simultaneously if you turn
imum rear axle load, for exam- E Make sure that the dipped-beam head- the steering wheel in one direction and then
ple when towing a trailer lamps are switched on (e page 97). immediately turn it in the opposite direction.
i The cornering light function is deactivated i If you select reverse gear, the cornering
E Turn the headlamp range thumbwheel at speeds above 40 km/h and when the front lamp on the outside of the bend comes on. The
to the position which corresponds to foglamps are switched on. turn signal has no effect on the cornering light.
the load in your vehicle.
101
Controls
Lights
Switching off the cornering light func- i The Intelligent Light System is only active Extended range foglamps
tion when it is dark.
The extended range foglamps reduce the
E Switch off the turn signal using the The Intelligent Light System comprises: glare experienced by the driver and im-
combination switch (e page 99). I Active light function prove the illumination of the left-hand
or I Cornering light function edge of the carriageway when driving on
the right-hand side of the carriageway.
E Turn the steering wheel back to the I Motorway mode
centre position. E To activate: pull the light switch out to
I Extended range foglamps the second stop.
The cornering light goes out.
Active light function The front foglamps and the rear fog-
i The cornering lamp remains on until you lamp are active. The extended range
switch off the turn signal, even if the steering For the active light function, the dipped- foglamps are activated if you are driv-
wheel is in the centre position. beam headlamps swivel horizontally. The ing slower than 70 km/h.
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short swivel angle adjusts according to the pre-
E To deactivate: switch off the front fog-
time. The cornering lamp lights up for a maxi- vailing driving situation.
lamp.
mum of three minutes. It then goes out, even if i The active light function is not active when
the turn signal is still on or if you have turned the vehicle is stationary. i The extended range foglamps are deacti-
the steering wheel. vated automatically at speeds above
Cornering light function 100 km/h.
Intelligent Light System* (vehicles You can find information on the cornering
with bi-xenon headlamps*) light on (e page 101).
The Intelligent Light System adapts the
lighting of the front headlamp to the pre- Motorway mode
vailing driving conditions so that the road
In motorway mode the illumination of the
is illuminated better.
road is optimised by controlling the bright-
On vehicles with a luxury multi-function ness and adjusting the headlamp range.
steering wheel* you can activate or deacti- i Motorway mode is activated when you
vate the function using the on-board com- drive faster than 110 km/h.
puter (e page 137).
102
Controls
Lights
Interior lighting 6 Reading lamp on-board computer, see the section on ac-
7 Interior light tivating or deactivating the interior lighting
Overhead control panel delayed switch-off feature (e page 137).
Automatic control
Manual control
E To deactivate: press button 2.
E To switch the front interior lighting
The button engages slightly further in.
on/off: press button 4.
The interior lighting is switched off.
E To switch the rear interior lighting
The interior lighting remains off, even
on/off: press button 1.
when you unlock the vehicle or open a
door. E To switch the front reading lamps
on/off: press button 3 or 5.
E To activate: press button 2 again.
The button pops out and is flush with
the other buttons.
Automatic interior lighting control is ac-
tivated. It switches on the interior light-
ing when you:
I unlock the vehicle
1 To switch the rear interior lighting on/ I open a door
off
2 To switch the automatic control on/off I remove the key from the ignition
3 To switch the right-hand reading lamp lock
on/off The interior lighting has a delayed
4 To switch the front interior lighting on/ switch-off feature.
off Vehicles with a luxury multi-function steer-
5 To switch the left-hand reading lamp ing wheel*: you can set whether the interi-
on/off or lighting is switched on when you take
the key out of the ignition lock using the
103
Controls
Windscreen wipers
Rear reading lamp* on vehicles with Windscreen wipers fects may cause undesired windscreen wiper
AVANTGARDE* and ELEGANCE* design sweeps. This could then damage the wind-
and equipment screen wiper blades and scratch the wind-
Switching the windscreen wipers screen.
on/off
Continuous wipe
E To switch on/off: turn the combina-
tion switch in the direction of arrow 1
to a position appropriate to how heavy
the rain is.
i When the windscreen wiper is switched on
and you stop the vehicle, the windscreen wiper
1 To switch the right-hand reading lamp
wipes more slowly.
on/off 1 Switches on the windscreen wipers
2 To switch the left-hand reading lamp 2 Single wipe Single wipe
on/off
3 Left-hand side reading lamp Settings: E Make sure that the key is in position 1
4 Interior light in the ignition lock.
M Windscreen wipers off
5 Right-hand reading lamp E To switch on: briefly press the combi-
U Intermittent wipe, low
E To switch the rear reading lamps on nation switch in the direction of arrow
or off: press button 1 or 2. V Intermittent wipe, high 2 to the point of resistance.
u Continuous wipe, slow
t Continuous wipe, fast
! Vehicles with a rain sensor*:
In dry weather conditions, switch the wind-
screen wipers off. Otherwise, dirt or optical ef-
104
Controls
Side windows
Intermittent wipe I the clutch is released on vehicles with Side windows
manual transmission
Only switch on intermittent wipe in damp
weather conditions or when it is raining or I the selector lever is in position D or R Opening/closing the side windows
on vehicles with automatic transmis-
snowing. You can open and close the side windows
sion*
E Make sure that the key is in position 1 electrically.
E To switch on: turn the combination
Wiping the windscreen using washer G Risk of injury
fluid
switch to position U or V. Make sure that nobody can become trapped
E Make sure that the key is in position 1 between the side window and the door
The windscreen wipers sweep once. in the ignition lock. frame as a side window is opened. Do not
On vehicles with a rain sensor*, the E Press the combination switch beyond touch or lean against the side window dur-
rain sensor* is activated when you set the pressure point in the direction of ing the opening procedure. You could be-
the windscreen wiper to intermittent arrow 2. come trapped between the side window and
wipe. The appropriate wiping frequency the door frame as the window moves down.
The windscreen wipers will wipe with If danger threatens, release the switch or
is set automatically, according to the
washer fluid. pull the switch upwards to close the side
rain on the sensor.
i If you have selected the intermittent wipe i Wipe the windscreen using washer fluid window again.
even if it is raining. By doing so, you will avoid
setting, wiping is interrupted when the vehicle
smears on the windscreen.
is stationary and you open the driver's door or G Risk of injury
front-passenger door. This protects people get-
ting into and leaving the vehicle from being Make sure that nobody can become trapped
sprayed with water. as you close a side window. If danger threat-
ens, release the switch or press the switch
Intermittent wipe continues when you: a second time to open the side window
I press the combination switch again.
I close the doors again and drive on
I close the doors and, with the key in position ee
1 in the ignition lock,
105
Controls
Side windows
The switches for all side windows are lo- corresponding window is in the re-
G Risk of injury
cated on the driver's door. There is also a quired position.
Do not leave children unsupervised in the switch on each door for the respective E To open or close automatically:
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child window. press or pull switch 1, 2, 3 or 5
restraint system. The children could:
beyond the pressure point and release
I injure themselves on parts of the vehicle it.
I be seriously or fatally harmed by pro-
E To stop: briefly press or pull switch 1,
longed exposure to extremely high or ex-
tremely low temperatures
2, 3 or 5 again.
If children open a door, they could: The window stops in the current posi-
I injure other people in doing so tion.
I get out of the vehicle and thereby injure ! If the window is obstructed during closing,
themselves or be injured by a passing the closing procedure is interrupted and it
vehicle opens again slightly.
Activate the child-proof locks on the rear
doors and deactivate the side window con-
1 Front left G Risk of injury
2 Front right
trols in the rear compartment when children If a window blocks and then opens again
3 Rear right while closing, press the switch again up to
are travelling in the vehicle. They could oth-
4 Override switch the pressure point within 2 seconds to close
erwise open doors or windows while the ve-
hicle is in motion and thereby injure them-
5 Rear left it with more force.
selves or others. E Make sure that the key is in position 2 If the window blocks and opens again, close
in the ignition lock. it by pressing the switch once again up to
i It is also possible to open and close the i When the key is turned to position 0 or re- the pressure point within 2 seconds with
side windows from the outside using the "Sum- moved from the ignition lock, it is possible to the obstruction sensor switched off.
mer opening" (e page 107) and "Convenience operate the windows until the driver's or front- Make sure that nobody can become trapped
closing" (e page 107) features respectively. passenger door is opened, but for no more than as you close a window without the obstruc-
five minutes after removing the key. tion sensor to avoid causing serious or even
You can deactivate the switches for the rear
fatal injuries.
side windows from the driver's seat. E To open or close: press or pull switch
1, 2, 3 or 5 and hold it until the
106
Controls
Side windows
Summer opening the side windows and the sliding/tilting ing/tilting sunroof*. Proceed as follows if
sunroof* have reached the desired po- there is a risk of entrapment:
In warm weather, you can ventilate the ve- sition.
hicle before a journey. To do this, you can I Release the j button.
use the key to simultaneously: E Vehicles with a panorama sliding/ I Press and hold the k button until the
tilting sunroof*: with the roller sun- side windows and the sliding/tilting sun-
I open the sliding/tilting sunroof* or blind open, keep the button pressed roof* or the panorama sliding/tilting
I open the roller sunblind and the pano- until the side windows and the pano- sunroof* open again.
rama sliding/tilting sunroof* and rama sliding/tilting sunroof* have
I open the side windows reached the desired position.
i The "Summer opening" function can only E Vehicles with a panorama sliding/
be operated via the key. tilting sunroof*: with the roller sun-
blind closed, keep the button pressed
until the roller sunblind and the side
windows are fully opened. Press the
button again and keep it pressed until
the panorama sliding/tilting sunroof*
is in the desired position.
Convenience closing E Point the tip of the key at the driver's

When you lock the vehicle, you can close door handle.
the side windows and the panorama slid- E Lock the vehicle with the j button.
ing/tilting sunroof* or the panorama slid-
E Point the tip of the key at the driver's E Keep the button pressed until the side
ing/tilting sunroof* at the same time.
door handle. windows and the sliding/tilting sun-
E Unlock the vehicle by pressing the G Risk of injury roof* or panorama sliding/tilting sun-
Œ button. roof* are fully closed.
ee
E Vehicles with a sliding/tilting sun- as you close the side windows and the slid- E Vehicles with a panorama sliding/
roof*: keep the button pressed until ing/tilting sunroof* or the panorama slid- tilting sunroof*: press the button
107
Controls
Driving and parking
again and hold it until the roller sun- Driving and parking 6-speed manual transmission
blind* is fully closed.
E Check that all the side windows and Starting the engine
the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the pano-
rama sliding/tilting sunroof* are G Risk of accident
closed. Do not keep any objects in the driver's foot-
well. If you use a floormat or carpet in the
driver's footwell, make sure that they are
correctly secured and that there is sufficient
clearance for the pedals.
Objects could otherwise get between the
pedals in the event of sudden braking or ac-
celeration. You may then no longer be able Gearshift pattern
to brake, change gear or accelerate as in- 1–6 Forward gears
tended. This may result in an accident and R Reverse gear
injury. E Shift to neutral.
E Depress the parking brake
G Risk of poisoning (e page 110).
Never leave the engine running in enclosed Further information about the manual
spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon transmission (e page 112).
monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes consti- E To start a petrol engine: turn the key
tutes a health hazard and could lead to loss to position 3 in the ignition lock
of consciousness or even death. (e page 82) and release it as soon as
the engine is running.
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
starting the engine.
108
Controls
Driving and parking
E To start a diesel engine: turn the key E Before starting the engine, make sure hicle. Always take the KEYLESS GO key*
to position 2 in the ignition lock that the selector lever is in position P. with you when leaving the vehicle, even if
(e page 82). Further information about the automatic you are only leaving it for a short time.
The q pre-glow indicator lamp in transmission (e page 112).
the instrument cluster lights up. You can start your vehicle with the KEY-
Starting the engine with the key LESS GO button near the steering column.
E When the q pre-glow indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster goes out, turn E Petrol engine: turn the key to position
the key to position 3 and release it as 3 in the ignition lock (e page 82) and
soon as the engine is running. release it.
i You can start the engine without pre-glow The engine starts automatically.
if the engine is warm. E Diesel engine: turn the key to position
2 in the ignition lock (e page 82).
Automatic transmission*
The q pre-glow indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up.
E When the q pre-glow indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster goes out, turn
1 KEYLESS GO button
the key to position 3 and release it.
E Depress the brake pedal and keep it
The engine starts automatically.
depressed.
i You can start the engine without pre-glow The engine can only be started if the
if the engine is warm.
brake pedal is depressed.
Starting the engine with KEYLESS GO* E Press KEYLESS GO button 1 once.
Gearshift pattern G Risk of injury Vehicles with a petrol engine: the en-
P Park position with selector lever lock gine starts automatically.
Your vehicle can be started using a valid
R Reverse gear KEYLESS GO key*. For this reason, children Vehicles with a diesel engine: pre-glow
N Neutral should never be left unsupervised in the ve- is activated and the engine starts auto-
D Drive position matically.
109
Controls
Driving and parking
E Carefully depress the accelerator ped-
Pulling away
G Risk of accident
al.
! Do not select reverse gear unless the ve- Do not shift down unless the speed is within
hicle is stationary, otherwise the transmission i Upshifts take place at higher engine
the permissible range of the gear you wish speeds after a cold start. This helps the cata-
will be damaged.
to change to. lytic converter to reach its operating tempera-
Do not drive at high engine speeds until the en- Do not shift down for additional engine ture more quickly.
gine has warmed up. This will protect the en- braking on a slippery road surface. This
gine. could cause the drive wheels to lose their
Parking
i The vehicle will lock itself centrally once grip and the vehicle could skid. This could
you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the
doors drop down.
cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
G Risk of accident
Only remove the key from the ignition lock
You can open the doors from the inside at any
when the vehicle is stationary since you
time.
Automatic transmission* cannot steer the vehicle with the key re-
You can also deactivate the automatic door moved.
lock. i It is only possible to move the selector lev- Never leave children unsupervised in the ve-
er to the desired position if you depress the
hicle. They could release the parking brake.
6-speed manual transmission brake pedal. Only then is the selector lever lock
This could lead to a serious or fatal acci-
released.
E Depress the clutch pedal. dent.
E Depress the brake pedal and keep it
E Shift to either first or reverse gear. depressed.
E Slowly release the clutch pedal and de- E Pull the parking brake release handle G Risk of fire
press the accelerator pedal. to release the parking brake. Make sure that the exhaust system does
! Change gear in good time and do not ex- E Move the selector lever to position D not under any circumstances come into
ceed the maximum speed for each gear. contact with easily ignitable material such
or R.
as dry grass or petrol. The material could
Wherever possible, avoid letting the wheels i Wait for the shift process to complete be- otherwise ignite and set the vehicle alight.
spin. You could otherwise damage the drive fore pulling away.
train.
E Release the brake pedal.
110
Controls
Driving and parking
Parking brake E To apply: depress parking brake 2 Vehicles with automatic transmission*
firmly.
E Move the selector lever to P.
The 3 indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up if the engine is i The engine can also be switched off when
the selector lever is in position N. However,
running.
you must move the selector lever to P and de-
i On steep slopes, turn the front wheels to- press the parking brake to secure the vehicle.
wards the kerb.
With the key
Stopping the engine E Turn the key to position 0 (e page 82)
in the ignition lock and remove it.
G Risk of accident
The immobiliser is activated.
1 Release handle If the engine is not running, there is no
power assistance for the steering and
i The key can only be removed when the se-
2 Parking brake lector lever is in position P.
brakes. Steering and braking then takes
E To release: depress the brake pedal much more effort.
and keep it depressed. With KEYLESS GO*
As a result, you might lose control of the ve-
On vehicles with automatic transmis- E Press the KEYLESS GO button near the
hicle, cause an accident and injure yourself
sion* the selector lever lock is re- and others. steering column.
leased. Do not switch off the engine while driving. The engine stops and all the lamps in
E Pull release handle 1 of parking brake the instrument cluster go out. The on-
2. board electronics are in key position 1
Vehicles with 6-speed manual trans- (e page 82).
E The 3 indicator lamp in the instru- mission
ment cluster goes out. i The engine can be turned off during the
E Shift to either first or reverse gear. journey by pressing the KEYLESS GO button for
three seconds.
E Turn the key to position 0 (e page 82)
in the ignition lock and remove it.
The immobiliser is activated.
111
Controls
Transmission
Transmission Manual transmission E Move the gear lever firmly to the left
beyond the point of resistance and
G Risk of accident Information about driving with a manual
transmission (e page 110).
then forwards.
The movement of the pedals must not be i It is not necessary to lift the gear lever
impaired in any way. Do not keep any ob- when shifting to reverse gear.
jects in the driver's footwell. Make sure that
there is sufficient clearance around the ped- Automatic transmission*
als when floormats or carpets are used.
Information about driving with an auto-
Always depress the parking brake when
parking the vehicle.
matic transmission (e page 110).
Never leave children unsupervised in the ve- The automatic transmission automatically
hicle. They could move the selector lever or adapts to your individual driving style
gear lever and the vehicle could roll away on through continuous shift point adjustment.
uphill or downhill gradients. This shift point adjustment takes into ac-
Do not change down if your speed is above ! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear, count the current operating and driving
the maximum speed for the desired gear. you must press the shift lever to the right. You conditions. If the operating or driving con-
The drive wheels could lock. could otherwise shift unintentionally into 3rd ditions change, the automatic transmis-
Do not change down for additional engine or 4th gear and damage the transmission. sion reacts by adjusting the gearshift pro-
braking on a slippery road surface. This gram.
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the indi-
could cause the drive wheels to lose their vidual gears.
grip and the vehicle could skid.
If you shift down at too high a speed (transmis-
sion braking), this can cause the engine to
overspeed, leading to engine damage.
Engaging reverse gear

! Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle
is stationary, otherwise the transmission could
be damaged.
112
Controls
Transmission
The automatic transmission shifts into in- The current shift range and the gearshift ë Neutral
dividual gears automatically. This auto- program (S/C) or (S/C/M)* is shown in
matic gearshifting behaviour is determined the instrument cluster display. No power is transmitted from the
by: engine to the drive wheels. Re-
When the selector lever is in position D, leasing the brakes will allow you
I the selector lever position D with shift you can modify the gear shifting of the au- to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
ranges 6*, 5*, 4, 3, 2 and 1 tomatic transmission by restricting the push it or tow it.
(e page 114) shift range or shifting gear yourself.
Do not move the selector lever to
I the gearshift program selected (S/C) Selector lever positions N while you are driving. The auto-
(e page 115) or (S/C/M)* matic transmission could other-
(e page 116) ì Park position wise be damaged.
I the position of the accelerator pedal Prevents the vehicle from rolling If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
(e page 115) away when stopped. Only move only move the selector lever to N
I the road speed the selector lever to P when the if the vehicle is in danger of skid-
vehicle is stationary. ding, e.g. on icy roads.
The key can only be removed ê Drive
when the selector lever is in posi-
tion P. When there is no key in The automatic transmission
the ignition lock, the selector lev- changes gear automatically. All
er is locked in position P. five forward gears are available.
Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC*: all
í Reverse gear seven forward gears are avail-
Only move the selector lever to R able.
when the vehicle is stationary.
One-touch gearshifting
Vehicle with a luxury multi-function steer-
ing wheel* When the selector lever is in position D,
you can perform gearshifts yourself, even ee
1 Shift range/selector lever position
2 Gearshift program (S/C) or (S/C/M)* on vehicles with automatic transmission.
113
Controls
Transmission
E To shift down: press the selector lever until D is shown once more in the ï Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC*:
briefly to the left towards D–. speedometer display.
The automatic transmission shifts
The automatic transmission shifts The automatic transmission shifts from only as far as sixth gear.
down to the next gear, depending on the current shift range directly to D.
the gear currently selected. This also î Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC*:
E To select the most effective shift
restricts the shift range. range: press and hold the selector lev- The automatic transmission shifts
only as far as fifth gear.
G Risk of accident er to the left towards D–.
The automatic transmission will shift to é The automatic transmission shifts
Do not change down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface. This
a range which allows ideal acceleration only as far as fourth gear.
and deceleration. To do this, the auto-
could cause the drive wheels to lose their è The automatic transmission shifts
grip and the vehicle could skid. matic transmission will shift down one
only as far as third gear.
or more gears.
The braking effect of the engine
i The automatic transmission does not shift Shift ranges can be utilised in this position.
down if you push the selector lever towards D–
while travelling at too high a speed. The engine When the selector lever is in position D, it
could otherwise overrev. is possible to restrict or derestrict the shift
range for the automatic transmission.
E To shift up: press the selector lever
briefly to the right towards D+. E Briefly press the selector lever to the
right towards D+ or to the left towards
The automatic transmission shifts up to
D–.
the next gear, depending on the gear-
shift program selected. This also ex- The selected shift range is shown in
tends the shift range. the display of the instrument cluster.
E To derestrict the shift range: press i If the maximum engine speed for the shift
and hold the selector lever towards D+ range is reached and you continue to acceler-
ate, the automatic transmission shifts up, even
if the shift range is restricted. The engine could
otherwise overrev.
114
Controls
Transmission
ç The automatic transmission shifts Program selector button I The vehicle pulls away more gently in
only as far as second gear. forward and reverse gears, unless the
accelerator pedal is depressed fully.
To use the braking effect of the
engine on downhill gradients and
I Traction is increased. This improves
for driving: the driving stability of the vehicle on
slippery road surfaces, for example.
I on steep mountain roads
I The automatic transmission shifts up
I in mountainous terrain sooner. This means that the vehicle is
I in arduous conditions driven at lower engine speeds and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
æ The automatic transmission
works only in first gear. Driving tips
To use the braking effect of the 1 Program selector button
engine on extremely steep down- S Sport For all normal driving con- Accelerator pedal position
hill gradients and long downhill ditions Your style of driving influences how the
stretches. automatic transmission shifts gear:
C Comfort For comfort mode
I Little throttle: early upshifts
! Only press program selector button 1 I More throttle: late upshifts
when the selector lever is in position P, N or D.
E Press program selector button 1 until Kickdown
the letter (S/C) of the desired shift pro- Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:
gram appears in the display of the in-
E Depress the accelerator pedal beyond
strument cluster.
the pressure point.
Comfort mode C is characterised by the
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
following:
depending on the engine speed.
ee
115
Controls
Transmission
E Ease off on the accelerator pedal once downhill gradient (e page 114), even if
the desired speed is reached. cruise control* is activated.
The automatic transmission shifts back Working on the vehicle
up.
Stopping G Risk of accident
If you are only stopping briefly and the When work is being carried out on the ve-
driver is not getting out of the vehicle: hicle, apply the parking brake and move the
selector lever to P. The vehicle could other-
E Leave the selector lever in the drive po- wise roll away.
sition.
E Prevent the vehicle from rolling away 1 Left-hand paddle: to shift down
by applying the brakes. 2 Right-hand paddle: to shift up
Steering wheel gearshift paddles*
and manual gearshift program* Upshifting
Manoeuvring
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not make E Pull right-hand paddle 2.
If you are manoeuvring in a tight space: use of the engine's full output until its normal
E Brake carefully to control your speed. operating temperature has been reached. The automatic transmission shifts up to
the next gear.
E Depress the accelerator pedal moder- Only move the selector lever to R when the ve-
ately and smoothly. hicle is stationary. If you are not driving in manual gear-
shift program M, the shift range will
Where possible, avoid allowing a drive wheel to
Trailer towing* thus be extended (e page 112).
spin when pulling away on a slippery surface.
E Note the driving tips for braking You could otherwise damage the drive train. Downshifting
(e page 207).
E Drive in the middle of the engine speed
Steering wheel gearshift paddles G Risk of accident
range on uphill gradients. It is possible to shift gear using either the Do not change down for additional engine
E Shift down to shift range 3 or 2 de-
steering wheel gearshift paddles or the se- braking on a slippery road surface. This
pending on the incline of the uphill or lector lever. could cause the drive wheels to lose their
116
Controls
Transmission
Manual gearshift program M can be se- i On vehicles with the ADVANCED AGILITY
E Pull left-hand paddle 1. lected using the program selector button. package with sports mode*, the program S or
C is selected with the sport button
The automatic transmission shifts (e page 147).
down to the next gear.
E To activate: press program selector
If you are not driving in manual gear- button 1 repeatedly until the letter M
shift program M, the shift range will for manual gearshift program M ap-
thus be restricted (e page 112). pears in the instrument cluster.
i When the selector lever is in position P, N The automatic transmission changes to
or R, you cannot change gear using the steer- manual gearshift program M. Auto-
ing wheel gearshift paddles.
matic gearshifting is deactivated.
Vehicles without the ADVANCED AGILITY pack-
If the selector lever is in position D, you
age with sports mode*: if manual gearshift pro-
gram M is selected and you start the engine Vehicle without the ADVANCED AGILITY can shift up or down through the gears.
again, the automatic transmission changes to package with sports mode* The gear currently selected and engaged
an automatic gearshift program. If automatic 1 Program selector button is shown in the instrument cluster.
gearshift program S or C has been selected, Vehicles without the ADVANCED AGILITY E To switch off: vehicles without the AD-
the automatic transmission will resume the rel- package with sports mode* VANCED AGILITY package with sports
evant gearshift program when you restart the mode*: press program selector button
engine. S Sport For all normal driving
conditions 1 repeatedly until S or C appear in the
Vehicles with the ADVANCED AGILITY package display of the instrument cluster.
with sports mode*: if manual gearshift program C Comfort For comfort mode Vehicles with the ADVANCED AGILITY
M is selected and you start the engine again, M Manual For manual gearshifting package with sports mode*: press pro-
your selection is deleted. gram selector button 1.
Vehicles with the ADVANCED AGILITY
Manual gearshift program package with sports mode* The M goes out in the display of the in-
strument cluster.
In manual gearshift program M, you can M Manual For manual gearshifting ee
change gear using the steering wheel or
gearshift paddles or the selector lever.
117
Controls
Instrument cluster
E Restart the engine. E Pull the left-hand paddle on the steer- Instrument cluster
The automatic transmission shifts to an ing wheel (e page 116).
You will find a full overview of the instru-
automatic gearshift program. The automatic transmission shifts ment cluster in the “At a glance” section
down to the next gear. (e page 28).
Upshifting
i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-
E Press the selector lever briefly to the hand gearshift paddle until the transmission se- G Risk of accident
right towards D+. lects the optimum gear according to the speed. No messages can be displayed if there is a
or malfunction in the instrument cluster and/
Kickdown or the multi-function display.
E Pull the right-hand paddle on the steer-
You can also use kickdown for maximum This means that you will not see information
ing wheel (e page 116).
acceleration in manual gearshift program about the driving situation, such as the
The automatic transmission shifts up to M. speed, outside temperature, warning/indi-
the next gear. cator lamps, malfunction/warning mes-
E Depress the accelerator pedal beyond
the pressure point. sages or system failures. The handling char-
Downshifting acteristics may be affected.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
G Risk of accident depending on the engine speed.
Immediately consult a qualified specialist
workshop which has the necessary special-
Do not change down for additional engine i It is not possible to shift gears using the ist knowledge and tools to carry out the
braking on a slippery road surface. This steering wheel gearshift paddles during kick- work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends
could cause the drive wheels to lose their down. that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
grip and the vehicle could skid. Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
E Press the selector lever briefly to the tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
left towards D–. cialist workshop.
or
118
Controls
Instrument cluster
Activating the multi-function display Coolant temperature gauge E Press #.
You activate the multi-function display in The coolant temperature gauge is in the in- In the multi-function display you will
the instrument cluster when you: strument cluster on the left-hand side. see the message Reset trip meter? No
Yes.
I switch on the ignition Under normal operating conditions and
with the specified concentration of anti- E Press % to select Yes and confirm
I open the driver's door with #.
freeze/corrosion inhibitor, the coolant
I switch on the lights temperature may rise to 120 °C. The cool-
ant temperature may rise to the top end of Clock
Adjusting the instrument lighting the scale at high outside temperatures If Audio 50 APS* or COMAND APS* is in-
and on long uphill stretches. stalled in your vehicle, you can only set
the time using the audio device*. Refer to
Resetting the trip meter the separate Operating Instructions for
notes on how to do this.
Vehicles with multi-function steering
wheel (4 buttons) In vehicles without an audio device* or
those with Audio 20*, you can set the
E Make sure that you are viewing the clock using the on-board computer; ve-
standard display in the multi-function hicles with multi-function steering wheel
display (e page 123). (4 buttons) (e page 121) vehicles with
E Press the í button on the multi- luxury multi-function steering wheel* (12
The illustration shows a vehicle with luxury function steering wheel until the trip buttons) (e page 135)
multi-function steering wheel* meter is reset.
1 Brightness control
Luxury multi-function steering wheel*
E To make brighter or dimmer: turn (12 buttons)
brightness control 1 to the left or the
right. E Call up the trip meter (e page 129).
i The instrument cluster lighting automati-
cally adjusts to the ambient light conditions.
119
Controls
On-board computer (vehicles with multi-function steering wheel, 4 buttons)
Speedometer with segments (ve-
hicles with luxury multi-function
H Environmental note On-board computer (vehicles with
multi-function steering wheel, 4 but-
steering wheel*, 12 buttons) Avoid driving at high engine speeds, as this tons)
increases your vehicle's consumption un-
The segments in the speedometer in the necessarily and pollutes the environment The on-board computer is activated as
instrument cluster indicate which speed through increased emissions. soon as you turn the key to position 2 in
range is available. the ignition lock. You can use the on-board
Cruise control* mode: computer to call up information relating to
Outside temperature display your vehicle and to make and/or adjust
The segments light up from the stored settings.
speed to the maximum speed. G Risk of accident
Variable Speedtronic* mode: The road surface may be icy, especially in G Risk of accident
wooded areas or on bridges, even if temper- Only use the on-board computer when road
The segments light up from the start of
atures are just above freezing point. The ve- and traffic conditions permit. You would oth-
the scale to the selected limit speed.
hicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driv- erwise be distracted and unable to concen-
ing style. You should therefore always adapt trate properly on driving, and could cause
Rev counter your driving style and speed to suit the an accident.
The red band in the rev counter indicates weather conditions.
the overrevving range for all engine types. The on-board computer shows information
You can find exact details for your engine There is a short delay before a change in in the multi-function display.
in the section "Technical Data" outside temperature is displayed.
(e page 317).
! Do not drive in the overrevving range. tons)
Doing so will damage the engine.
Use the buttons on the multi-function
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect steering wheel to operate the on-board
the engine when the overrevving range is computer.
reached.
120
Controls
4 í Selects submenu or scrolls Multi-function display
through lists The multi-function display shows you val-
Confirms selection ues and settings as well as any display
messages that may have been generated.
5 è Jump from one menu to an-
other
You can imagine the menus as if they were
arranged in a circle.
Operating the on-board computer
steering wheel.
E To select a menu: press the è but-
ton.
E To select a submenu or scroll in a 1 Display area for menus or submenus
1 Multi-function display list: press the í button.
Operating the on-board com- E To select the standard display: press Menus and submenus
puter the è button until the standard dis- The number of menus shown depends on
2 æ play with the total distance recorder the optional equipment* in the vehicle.
and trip meter appears again.
I Increases the volume
E To confirm the selection: press the
I Sets the date/time í button.
3 ç E To set the date/time: press the æ
I Decreases the volume or ç button.
I Sets the date/time ee
121
Controls
122
Controls
Button Menus Functions and submenus
1 Standard display with trip meter and total I Resets the trip meter
è
distance recorder (e page 123)
è 2 Trip computer (e page 124) I Resets the consumption statistics
è 3 Range
è 4 Digital speedometer
è 5 Display messages (e page 124) I Calls up
è 6 ASSYST PLUS (e page 215)
7 Tyre pressure loss warning system* I Activates
è
(e page 203)
è 8 Time and date (e page 124) I Adjusts
Standard display E Press è for two seconds until the Resetting the trip meter
standard display appears. Use the buttons on the multi-function
The basic setting shows the trip meter and
the total distance recorder in the multi- steering wheel.
function display. This is the standard dis- E Press è to select the standard dis-
play. play.
Use the buttons on the multi-function E Press í until the value is reset.
steering wheel.
Trip computer
E Press è to select the standard dis-
play. 1 Trip meter ee
2 Total distance recorder steering wheel.
or
123
Controls
E Press è to select the trip computer. ways make sure that your vehicle is safe to E Press í to select the display to
drive. You could otherwise cause an acci- change: hours, minutes, day, month,
dent by driving an unsafe vehicle. year.
E Press æ and ç to set the high-
E Press è to select the "Display mes- lighted display.
sages" menu. E Press í to save the entry and high-
If there are no display messages, the light the next display.
1 Kilometres text No messages will appear in the mul- E Press è to quit the display/menu.
2 Average speed ti-function display. If there are mes-
3 Time sages the text 2 Messages, for example,
4 Average fuel consumption will appear in the multi-function dis-
play.
Resetting the trip computer E Press í to scroll through display
Use the buttons on the multi-function messages.
steering wheel. i The possible display messages are ex-
E Press è to select the trip computer. plained in the "Practical advice" section
(e page 224).
E Press í until the values are reset.
All display messages are deleted when you turn
Calling up display messages off the ignition.
The on-board computer saves certain dis- Setting the date and time
play messages. You can call up display
messages in this menu. This menu is only available on vehicles
without audio equipment* or with Audio
G Risk of accident 20*.
The on-board computer only records and Use the buttons on the multi-function
displays messages and warnings from cer- steering wheel.
tain systems. For this reason, you should al- E Press è to select the date and time.
124
Controls
On-board computer (vehicles with the luxury multi-function steering wheel*, 12 buttons)
On-board computer (vehicles with 3 ! Activates voice control*
the luxury multi-function steering
wheel*, 12 buttons) 4 L Back/deactivates voice con-
trol*
The on-board computer is activated as
soon as you turn the key to position 2 in 5 Selecting the submenu or scrolling
the ignition lock. You can use the on-board through lists
computer to call up information relating to $ Up
your vehicle and to make and/or adjust
settings. % Down
Selecting the line for menus and
G Risk of accident selecting menus
Only use the on-board computer when road & Right
and traffic conditions permit. You would oth-
( Left
erwise be distracted and unable to concen-
trate properly on driving, and could cause # Confirms selection and mes-
an accident. sages
1 Multi-function display
Several functions are combined themati-
The on-board computer shows information Operating the on-board com- cally in the menus. For example, in the
in the multi-function display. puter Settings menu you can find functions for
2 Adjusting the volume configuring settings for your vehicle. Or
Luxury multi-function steering æ Increases the volume you can use a function to call up informa-
wheel (12 buttons) tion or to change settings for your vehicle.
ç Decreases the volume
Use the buttons on the luxury multi-func- You can imagine the menus as if they were
tion steering wheel to operate the on- Telephone operation* arranged in a circle.
board computer. s Accepts a call*
Operating the on-board computer
t Ends a call* ee
Use the buttons on the luxury multi-func-
F Mute
tion steering wheel.
125
Controls
E To select a menu: press the ( or Multi-function display E To show the line for menus 2: press
& button. the ( or & button.
The description field on the multi-function
E To select a submenu or scroll in a display shows you values and settings as
list: press the $ or % button. well as any display messages that may Menus and submenus
E To select the next menu level up: have been generated. The number of menus shown depends on
press the L back button. the optional equipment* in the vehicle.
E To select the standard display: keep The displays of the Audio*, Navi* and
pressing the L back button until Tel* menus differ slightly in vehicles with
the standard display with the total dis- audio equipment* and COMAND APS*.
tance recorder and trip meter appears. The examples in this Owner's Manual ap-
or ply to vehicles with COMAND APS*.
E Press and hold the L button until
the standard display with the total dis-
tance recorder and trip meter appears.
E To confirm the selection: press the
1 Description field
# button.
2 Line for menus
E To confirm a display message: press
Text field 1 shows settings, functions,
the # or L button.
submenus and any malfunctions that oc-
The on-board computer saves certain cur.
display messages. Calling up display
messages (e page 135).
126
Controls
ee
127
Controls
Buttons Menus Functions and submenus
1 Trip (e page 129) I Standard display
I Trip computer from start
&( I Trip computer from reset
I Range
I Digital speedometer
&( 2 Navi* (e page 130) I Navigation messages
3 Audio* (e page 132) I Selects a radio station
I Operates the CD player/CD changer*/DVD changer*/DVD
&(
audio*/MP3
I Operates the DVD video*
4 Tel* (e page 133) I Accepts a call
&( I Selects a phone book entry
I Redials
5 Service (e page 135) I Calls up display messages
&( I Tyre pressure
I ASSYST PLUS
6 Settings (e page 135) I Resets to factory settings
&( I Selects submenu
128
Controls
Trip menu E In the Trip menu, select the From start
submenu.
i Menu overview (e page 126), using the on-
board computer (e page 125).
Standard display
E In the Journey menu select the Stand-
ard display submenu. 1 Kilometres
or 2 Time
1 Kilometres 3 Average speed
E Keep pressing the L back button 4 Average fuel consumption
until the standard display appears. 2 Time
3 Average speed i The From reset trip computer is automati-
or 4 Average fuel consumption cally reset if the trip exceeds 9,999 hours or
E Hold down the L back button until i The From start trip computer is automati- 99,999 kilometres.
the standard display appears. cally reset if the trip is interrupted for longer Reset the trip computer (e page 130).
than 4 hours. It is automatically reset if the trip
exceed 999 hours or 9,999 kilometres. Calling up the range
Reset the trip computer (e page 130). E Select the Range submenu in the Trip
menu.
Trip computer from reset
The multi-function display shows the
The values in the Since reset submenu re- estimated distance that can be covered
1 Trip meter fer to the last time this submenu was re- by the vehicle, based on your current
2 Total distance recorder set. driving style and the amount of fuel re-
E In the Trip menu, select the Since remaining in the tank.
i Reset the trip meter (e page 130).
set submenu.
Trip computer from start ee
The values in the From start submenu re-
fer to the start of a journey.
129
Controls
Resetting Nav* menu
You can reset the following functions:

I Trip meter In the Navi menu the multi-function dis-
I Trip computer from start play shows the navigation instructions.
I Trip computer from reset E Select the Navi menu.
1 Estimated range
E Select the function you want to reset in
Once the reserve tank fuel is about half Route guidance inactive
the Trip menu.
empty, only the refuelling symbol appears.
E Press #.
Digital speedometer
E Select the digital speedometer in the
Trip menu.
1 Direction of travel
2 Current road
Example illustration
The road you are currently driving on only
E Use the % button to select Yes and
appears if it is in the memory of the Audio
the # button to confirm. 50 APS* or COMAND APS.
1 Digital speedometer
130
Controls
Route guidance active When a manoeuvre is announced, you will Lane recommen- Meaning
see the symbol for the manoeuvre and be- dation display
No manoeuvre announced side it a graphical distance display 2. This
decreases as you approach the announced Lane without lower Uninterrupted lane
manoeuvre. limit
Manoeuvre announced with change of Lane with lower lim- New lane during a
lane it manoeuvre
Lane recommendations are only displayed Lane with arrow Lane recommended
if the relevant data is available on the digi- for the manoeuvre
1 Distance to destination tal map. For more information on lane recommen-
2 Distance to next manoeuvre dations, see the Operating Instructions for
3 Current road Audio 50 APS* and COMAND APS*.
4 Symbol for "follow the road's course"
Navigation status indicators in the
Manoeuvre announced without change multi-function display
of lane
When route guidance is activated, the fol-
1 Road into which the manoeuvre leads lowing messages may appear:
2 Distance to manoeuvre and graphical I <: you have reached the destination.
distance display I Dest area reached: you are approaching
3 Lane recommendation the destination. This message appears,
4 Symbol for manoeuvre for example, with relatively large spe-
On multiple-lane roads, a lane recommen- cial destinations.
1 Road into which the manoeuvre leads
dation 3 may be shown for the next ma-
2 Distance to manoeuvre and graphical I New route: a new route is calculated,
noeuvre. There may be additional lanes for example, because you have devi-
distance display
during a manoeuvre. ee
3 Symbol for manoeuvre ated from the previously calculated
route or due to a traffic warning. Route
guidance is subsequently resumed.
131
Controls
I Calculating route: a route is being cal- Selecting a radio station Operating the CD player/CD changer*/
culated, after which route guidance will DVD changer*/DVD audio*/MP3
E To switch on the audio equipment* or
start.
COMAND APS* and select the radio, E To switch on the audio equipment* or
I Off map: the vehicle is outside the see the separate Operating Instruc- COMAND APS* and select the CD play-
range of the digital map. The vehicle is tions. er or DVD audio or MP3, see the sepa-
in an off-map position. rate Operating Instructions.
E Select the Audio menu.
I Off road: the vehicle is on a road which E Select the Audio menu.
is not on the digital map, or is off the
road, for example in a car park.
I No route: no route to the selected des-
tination could be calculated.
For more information, see the Operating
Instructions for Audio 50 APS and
COMAND APS. 1 Wave band
2 Station Example: view of the CD player
E To select the next or previous 1 Current track
Audio* menu
stored station: briefly press % or E To select the next or previous track:
i Menu overview (e page 126), using the on- $. briefly press % or $.
or or
Use the functions in the Audio menu to op-
erate the audio device. If no audio equip- E To select the next or previous sta- E To search for the next or previous
ment is switched on, the message Audio tion: press and hold % or $. track: press and hold % or $.
off appears in the multi-function display. i You can only change the wave band and i If you are playing a CD or DVD with track
E To adjust the volume: press the + save new stations using COMAND. information, the multi-function display shows
or - button on the luxury multi- the name and number of the track. The track is
function steering wheel. displayed on MP3s.
132
Controls
Operating the DVD video* i If you have a Bluetooth mobile phone, you Mobile phone ready to receive
can set up a Bluetooth connection to the audio
E Switch on COMAND APS* and select The multi-function display shows the name
equipment* or COMAND APS*; see the sepa-
DVD video; see the separate Operating rate Operating Instructions.
of the GSM network provider.
Instructions.
E Switch on the audio equipment* or Accepting a call
E Select the Audio menu. COMAND APS*; see the separate Oper-
ating Instructions. If someone calls you while you are in the
Tel menu, the following message appears
E Select the Tel menu. in the multi-function display:
Mobile phone off
If the mobile phone is in the bracket but
switched off, the message Telephone off
1 Current scene appears in the multi-function display.
E To select the next or previous Mobile phone on
scene: briefly press % or $. E Press s to answer a call.
or PIN code not yet entered
You can also take a call if you have not se-
E To search for the next or previous The message Please enter PIN appears in lected the Tel menu.
scene: press and hold % or $. the multi-function display.
E Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, Rejecting or ending a call
Tel* menu Linguatronic*, audio equipment* or E Press t.
i Menu overview (e page 126), using the on- COMAND APS*.
You can also not take or end a call if you
board computer (e page 125). The mobile phone will search for a net- have not selected the Tel menu.
Use the functions in the Tel menu to oper- work. During this time the message No
ate the mobile phone once you have in- network appears in the multi-function Dialling a number from the phone book
serted it into the mobile phone bracket display. ee
If your mobile phone is able to receive
(e page 187). calls, you can search for and dial a number
133
Controls
from the phone book in the audio equip- number is stored in the NOS. DIALLED computer scrolls through the names rapidly.
ment* or COMAND APS* at any time. list. After four seconds, the rapid scroll speeds up.
The rapid scroll stops when you release the
i You can enter new numbers in the phone If a call is connected, the phone book button or reach the end of the list.
book using the mobile phone, audio equip- entry appears in the multi-function dis-
ment* or COMAND APS*. play. Redialling
E To copy the phone book of your mobile or
phone to the audio equipment* or The on-board computer saves the most re-
E If there is more than one number for cently dialled names and numbers from
COMAND APS*, see the separate Oper-
a particular name: press s or the mobile phone. This means that you do
ating Instructions for the audio equip-
# to display the numbers. not have to search through the entire
ment* or COMAND APS*.
E Press % or $ to select the num- phone book.
E Select the Tel menu.
ber you want to dial. E Select the Tel menu.
The multi-function display shows the
E Press s or # to start dialling. The multi-function display shows the
name of the GSM network provider.
The message Connecting call and the name of the GSM network provider.
E Press %, $ or # to call up
the phone book.
selected number appear in the multi- E Press s to go to the most recently
function display. The name also ap- dialled number or name in the redial
E Press % or $ to select the name pears, provided it is stored in the menu.
you are searching for. phone book. The selected number is
E Press % or $ to select the num-
The stored names are displayed in al- stored in the NOS. DIALLED list.
ber or name you are looking for.
phabetical order. If a call is connected, the phone book
E Press s or # to start dialling.
E If only one telephone number is entry appears in the multi-function dis-
stored for a name: press s or play.
# to start dialling. i To quit the phone book without making a
The Connecting call message appears call, press the t button. The name of the
in the multi-function display as well as GSM operator appears again in the multi-func-
the dialled telephone number. The tion display.
name also appears, provided it is i If you press and hold the % or $ but-
stored in the phone book. The dialled ton for more than one second, the on-board
134
Controls
Service menu drive. You could otherwise cause an acci-
dent by driving an unsafe vehicle.
E Select the Service menu.
E Press % or $, highlight the Mes-
sages submenu and make a selection
with #. In the Settings menu you can:
If there are messages, the text 2 mes- I change the instrument cluster settings
sages, for example, appears in the mul- (e page 135)
ti-function display..
In the Service menu you can: I change the time/date settings
E Press % or $ to scroll through (e page 137)
I call up display messages (e page 135)
the messages.
I restart the tyre pressure loss warning I change the light settings (e page 137)
system (e page 203)
i The possible display messages are ex-
plained in the "Practical advice" section
I change the vehicle settings
I call up the service due date (e page 224). (e page 139)
(e page 215) All display messages are deleted when you turn I change the convenience settings
off the ignition. (e page 139)
Calling up display messages
I restore the factory settings
The on-board computer saves certain dis- Settings menu (e page 140)
play messages. You can call up display
messages in this menu.
i Menu overview (e page 126), using the on- Instrument cluster
G Risk of accident In the Inst.cluster menu there are the
following functions:
The on-board computer only records and
displays messages and warnings from cer-
I Units for speed and distance
tain systems. For this reason, you should al- I Language ee
ways make sure that your vehicle is safe to
135
Controls
I Dig. speedo, on vehicles with manual E Press % or $ to select the Dis- I German
transmission play Unit Speed-/Odometer function. I English
I Permanent display*, on vehicles with You will see the selected setting km or I French
automatic transmission miles.
I Italian
Selecting the units for speed and dis- E Press # to change the selected set-
ting. I Spanish
tance
I Dutch
In the Display unit Speed-/Odometer, you Selecting the language
can specify whether you want data dis- I Danish
This menu is only available on vehicles
played in mph or km/h. without audio equipment. I Swedish
The selected units apply to: i Vehicles with Audio 20, Audio 50 APS or I Portuguese
COMAND APS: this function is not available, I Turkish
I The total distance recorder and the trip
since the language of the audio equipment is
meter used.
I Russian
I The trip computer Use the Language function to select the E Press # to save the selected lan-
I The digital speedometer in the Trip language for the instrument cluster. guage.
menu E Select the Settings menu. Activating or deactivating the addition-
I Cruise control* E Press % or $ to highlight the In- al speedometer on vehicles with man-
I Speedtronic* strument cluster submenu and press ual transmission
E Select the Settings menu. # to select it. i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this menu
is not available.
E Press % or $ to highlight the In- E Press % or $ to select the Lan-
strument cluster submenu and press guage function. With the Additional Speedometer (mph)
# to select it. function, you can select whether the
You will see the selected language.
speed is also displayed in mph in the mul-
E Press # to see the list of languages. ti-function display.
E Press % or $ to highlight the E Select the Settings menu.
language:
136
Controls
E Press % or $ to highlight the In- E Press # to change the selected set- E Press % or $ to set the high-
strument cluster submenu and press ting. lighted display.
# to select it. E Press # to store the entry.
Time/date
E Press % or $ to select the Dig.
speedo (mph) function. This menu is only available on vehicles Setting the date
You will see the selected setting On or without audio equipment* or with Audio E Select the Settings menu.
Off. 20*. E Press % or $ to highlight the
E Press # to change the selected set- i Vehicles with Audio 50 APS* or COMAND Time/date submenu and press # to
ting. APS: this function is not available, since the select it.
time/date of the audio equipment* is used.
E Press % or $, select the Date
Selecting permanent display* on ve- The Time/Date menu has the following function.
hicles with automatic transmission* functions:
You will see the date currently set.
i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this menu I Time
is not available. E Press # to change it.
I Date
With the Permanent display function you E Press & or ( to select the dis-
can select whether the ambient tempera- Setting the time play to be changed: day, month, year.
ture or the speed in mph is shown in the E Select the Settings menu. E Press % or $ to set the high-
multi-function display. lighted display.
E Press % or $ to highlight the
E Select the Settings menu. E Press # to store the entry.
Time/date submenu and press # to
E Press % or $ to highlight the In- select it.
strument cluster submenu and press Lights
E Press % or $ to select the Time
# to select it. function. The Lights menu has the following func-
E Press % or $ to select the Per- You will see the time currently set.
tions:
manent display function. I Intelligent Light System
E Press # to change it.
You will see the selected setting out- I Daytime driving lamps ee
side temperature or Dig. speedo (mph). E Press & or ( to select the dis-
play to be changed: hours, minutes.
137
Controls
I Surround lighting Switching daytime driving lamps on or the key, if it is dark, the following will light
I Interior lighting delayed switch-off off up:
If you have the Daytime driving lamps I The side lamps
Switching the Intelligent Light System* function activated and the light switch is I The tail lamps
on or off set to M, the parking lamps, dipped-
If you switch on the Intell. Light System beam headlamps and licence plate lighting I The licence plate lighting
function, the following functions are acti- will automatically light up when the engine I The front foglamps
vated: is running.
The surround lighting switches off auto-
I Motorway mode In countries where daytime driving lamps matically if you open the driver's door or
are legally required, On is the factory set- after 40 seconds.
I Active light function
ting. E Select the Settings menu.
I Cornering light function
E Select the Settings menu.
I Extended range foglamps E Press % or $ to highlight the
E Press % or $ to highlight the Lights: submenu and press # to
E Select the Settings menu. Lights: submenu and press # to select it.
E Press % or $ to highlight the select it.
E Press % or $ to select the Sur-
Lights: submenu and press # to E Press % or $ to select the Day- round lighting: function.
select it. time driving lamps function.
You will see the selected setting: On or
E Press % or $ to select the In- You will see the selected setting: On or Off.
tell. Light System function. Off.
E Press # to change the selected set-
You will see the selected setting: On or E Press # to change the selected setting.
Off. ting.
E Press # to change the selected set- Activating or deactivating the interior
Switching the surround lighting on or lighting delayed switch-off
ting.
off
If you activate the Interior Lighting De-
If you switch on the Surround lighting lay function and you remove the key from
function and you unlock the vehicle with the ignition lock if it is dark the interior
138
Controls
lighting will light up for approximately You will find further information on auto-
10 seconds. matic locking in the "Automatic locking" G Risk of injury
E Select the Settings menu. section (e page 79). If the easy-entry feature is activated, the
E Select the Settings menu.
steering wheel moves. There is a risk of oc-
E Press % or $ to highlight the cupants becoming trapped. Before activat-
Lights: submenu and press # to E Press % or $ to highlight the Ve- ing the easy-entry feature, make sure that
select it. hicle submenu and press # to se- nobody can become trapped.
E Press % or $ to select the Inte- lect it. Do not leave children unsupervised in the
rior Lighting Delay function. E Press % or $ to select the Auto- vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
matic Door Lock function. restraint system. The children could open
You will see the selected setting: On or the driver's door and thereby unintentionally
Off. You will see the selected setting: On or activate the easy-entry feature and become
E Press # to change the selected set- Off. trapped.
ting. E Press # to change the selected set-
ting. E Select the Settings menu.
Vehicle
Convenience E Press % or $ to highlight the
The Vehicle menu has the following func- Convenience submenu and press #
tions The Convenience menu has the following to select it.
I Limit speed for winter tyres; see per- functions
E Press % or $ to select the Easy
manent Speedtronic (e page 146) I Easy-entry/exit feature* Entry/Exit function.
I Automatic door lock I Fold in mirrors when locking the ve- You will see the selected setting: On or
hicle Off.
Activating/deactivating automatic
door locking Activating/deactivating the Easy En- E Press # to change the selected set-
try/Exit function* ting.
If you activate the Automatic door locks
function, your vehicle will be centrally With the Easy Entry/Exit function you can
locked automatically from a speed of ap- switch the easy entry/exit feature on and
proximately 15 km/h. off (e page 89).
139
Controls
Driving systems
Activating or deactivating the "Fold in Restoring the factory settings Driving systems
mirrors when locking" function*
In the Factory setting menu you can re- Your vehicle's driving systems are de-
If you activate the Fold mirrors in when set the functions of most submenus to the scribed on the following pages:
locking function, the exterior mirrors are factory settings.
folded in when the vehicle is locked. When
I Cruise control* and Speedtronic*,
you switch on the ignition, the exterior For safety reasons, not all functions are re- which you can use to control the speed
mirrors fold out again. set: the Speed limit (winter tyres) of of the vehicle
permanent Speedtronic can only be con- I Hill start assist, which makes pulling
i If you have switched the function on and figured in the Vehicle menu. The Daytime
you fold in the exterior mirrors using the button away easier, particularly on steep uphill
driving lamps function in the Lights menu gradients
on the door (e page 90), they will not fold out is only reset if the vehicle is stationary.
when the ignition is switched on. The exterior I Parktronic*, which assists you with
mirrors can then only be folded out using the E Select the Settings menu. parking and manoeuvring
button on the door. E Press % or $ to highlight the The ABS, BAS, adaptive brake lights, ESP®
E Select the Settings menu. Factory setting submenu and press and EBV (electronic brake-power distribu-
# to select it.
E Press % or $ to highlight the tion) driving safety systems are described
Convenience submenu and press # E Press % or $ to access the Re- in the "Driving safety systems" section
to select it. set all settings? function, then select (e page 67).
either No or Yes. Select Yes if you want
E Press % or $ to select the Fold
to reset all the settings. Cruise control*
in mirrors when locking function.
E Press # to confirm the selection. Cruise control maintains a constant road
You will see the selected setting: On or
Off. The multi-function display shows a con- speed for you. It brakes automatically in
firmation message. order to avoid exceeding the set speed.
E Press # to change the selected set- On long and steep downhill gradients, es-
ting. pecially if the vehicle is laden or towing a
trailer, you must shift to a lower gear in
good time or select shift range 1, 2 or 3
on vehicles with automatic transmission*.
In this way you will make use of the brak-
140
Controls
Driving systems
ing effect of the engine, which relieves the I in road and traffic conditions which do
load on the brake system and prevents the not allow you to maintain a constant
brakes from overheating and wearing too speed (e.g. heavy traffic or winding
quickly. roads). You could otherwise cause an ac-
cident.
G Risk of accident I on slippery roads. Braking or accelerat-
Do not change down for additional engine ing could cause the drive wheels to lose
braking on a slippery road surface. This traction and the vehicle could then skid.
could cause the drive wheels to lose their I when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to
grip and the vehicle could skid. fog, heavy rain or snow
1 Segments
Use cruise control only if road and traffic Cruise control display in speedometer
conditions make it appropriate to maintain (vehicles with luxury multi-function Cruise control lever
a steady speed for a prolonged period. steering wheel*, 12 buttons*)
You can store any road speed above You can operate cruise control and varia-
30 km/h. When cruise control is activated, the seg- ble Speedtronic with the cruise control lev-
ments light up in the multi-function display er.
G Risk of accident from the set speed to the maximum i The last speed stored is cleared when you
Cruise control cannot take account of road speed. switch off the engine.
and traffic conditions. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise con-
Always pay attention to traffic conditions trol lever indicates which system you have
even when cruise control is activated. selected:
Cruise control is only an aid designed to as- I LIM indicator lamp off:
sist driving. You are responsible for the vehi-
cle's speed and for braking in good time. Cruise control is selected
I LIM indicator lamp lit:
ee
G Risk of accident Variable Speedtronic is selected
Do not use cruise control:
141
Controls
Driving systems
If it is not, press the cruise control lever I Always drive at adequate but not excessive
in the direction of arrow 5. engine speeds.
LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise I Change gear in good time.
control lever is off. Cruise control is se- I If possible, do not change down several
lected. gears at a time.
Storing the current speed To select the current or last stored

speed
You can store the current speed if you are
driving faster than 30 km/h.
G Risk of accident
E Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
1 To store the current speed or a higher speed. Only select a stored speed if you know what
speed that speed is and whether it is suitable for
2 LIM indicator lamp E Press the cruise control lever briefly to the current situation. Otherwise, sudden ac-
3 To select the current or last stored the pressure point, either upwards 1 celeration or braking could endanger you or
speed or downwards 4. others.
4 To store the current speed or a lower E Remove your foot from the accelerator
speed pedal. E Pull the cruise control lever briefly to-
5 To switch between cruise control and Cruise control is activated. The vehicle wards you 3.
variable Speedtronic automatically maintains the stored E Remove your foot from the accelerator
6 To deactivate cruise control speed. pedal.
Selecting cruise control i Cruise control may be unable to maintain Cruise control is activated and adjusts
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The the vehicle's speed to the last speed
E Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2 stored speed is resumed when the gradient stored.
is off. evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored
If it is off, cruise control is already se- speed on downhill gradients by automatically Setting a speed
lected. applying the brakes.
E Press the cruise control lever to pres-
Vehicles with manual transmission:
sure point 1 for a higher speed or
down 4 for a lower speed.
142
Controls
Driving systems
E Keep the cruise control lever pressed Adjustment in 10 km/h increments I ESP® (e page 69) is intervening or you
until the desired speed is reached. deactivate ESP®
E Briefly press the cruise control lever up
E Release the cruise control lever. beyond pressure point 1 for a higher I with a vehicle with manual transmis-
The new speed is stored. speed or down 4 for a lower speed. sion, you change into neutral or if the
clutch is depressed for longer than 6
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you de- The last speed stored is increased or seconds
press the accelerator pedal. For example, if you reduced.
accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control I you move the selector lever to N on ve-
adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed To deactivate cruise control hicles with automatic transmission*
stored after you have finished overtaking. while the vehicle is in motion
There are several ways to deactivate
i Deceleration of the vehicle by means of the cruise control: If cruise control is deactivated, you will
cruise control lever is assisted by automatic ap- hear a warning tone. You will see the
plication of the brakes. E Briefly press the cruise control lever Cruise control off message in the multi-
forwards 6. function display for approximately five sec-
Vehicles with automatic transmission*:
or onds.
On long downhill gradients, the automatic
transmission shifts down as a further measure. E Brake i The last speed stored is cleared when you
switch off the engine.
or
Adjustment in 1 km/h increments
E Briefly press the cruise control lever in
E Briefly press the cruise control lever up Speedtronic*
the direction of arrow 5.
to pressure point 1 for a higher speed Speedtronic brakes automatically so that
Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM you do not exceed the set speed. On long
or down 4 for a lower speed.
indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control and steep downhill gradients, especially if
The last speed stored is increased or lever lights up.
reduced. the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you
Cruise control is automatically deactivated must shift to a lower gear in good time or
if: select shift range 1, 2 or 3 on vehicles
I you depress the parking brake with automatic transmission*. In this way
you will make use of the braking effect of ee
I you are driving at less than 30 km/h the engine, which relieves the load on the
brake system and prevents the brakes
143
Controls
Driving systems
from overheating and wearing too quickly.
If you need additional braking, depress the G Risk of accident
brake pedal repeatedly rather than contin- Speedtronic is only an aid designed to assist
uously. driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's
speed and for braking in good time.
G Risk of accident
Never depress the brake pedal continuously i The speed indicated in the speedometer
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never may differ slightly from the limit speed stored.
cause the brakes to rub by applying con-
stant slight pedal pressure. This causes the Variable Speedtronic
brake system to overheat, increases the
braking distance and can lead to the brakes You can operate cruise control* and varia- 1 To store the current speed or a higher
failing completely. ble Speedtronic* with the cruise control speed
lever. 2 LIM indicator lamp
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise con- 3 To select the current or last stored
G Risk of accident trol lever indicates which system you have speed
Do not change down for additional engine selected: 4 To store the current speed or a lower
braking on a slippery road surface. This speed
I LIM indicator lamp off:
could cause the drive wheels to lose their 5 To switch between cruise control* and
grip and the vehicle could skid. Cruise control* is selected variable Speedtronic
I LIM indicator lamp lit: 6 To deactivate variable Speedtronic
You can set a variable or permanent limit Variable Speedtronic is selected Selecting variable Speedtronic
speed: You can use the cruise control lever to re-
E Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2
I Variable for speed limits, e.g. in built- strict the speed to any speed above
is on.
up areas 30 km/h while the engine is running.
If it is on, variable Speedtronic is al-
I Permanent for long-term speed re-
ready selected.
strictions, e.g. when driving with winter
tyres fitted (e page 146)
144
Controls
Driving systems
If it is not, press the cruise control lever E Press the cruise control lever briefly to Adjustment in 10 km/h increments
in the direction of arrow 5. the pressure point, either upwards 1
E Briefly press the cruise control lever up
LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise or downwards 4.
beyond to pressure point 1 for a high-
control lever lights up. Variable The current speed is stored. In the sta- er speed or down 4 for a lower speed.
Speedtronic is selected. tus indicator, or in the multi-function
display for vehicles with a luxury multi- or
G Risk of accident function steering wheel*, you can see E Keep the cruise control lever pressed
If there is a change of drivers, advise the the stored speed, e.g. Limit 100 km/h.. beyond the pressure point until the de-
new driver of the limit speed stored. Vehicles with luxury multi-function sired speed is set. Press the cruise
Only use variable Speedtronic if you are steering wheel*: on the speedometer, control lever up 1 for a higher speed
sure that you will not have to accelerate the segments from the start of the or down 4 for a lower speed.
suddenly to a speed above that stored as scale up to the stored speed are lit up.
the limit speed, otherwise you could cause
To deactivate variable Speedtronic
an accident. To select the current or last stored There are several ways to deactivate varia-
You can only exceed the limit speed stored speed ble Speedtronic:
if you deactivate variable Speedtronic:
E Pull the cruise control lever briefly to- E Briefly press the cruise control lever
I using the cruise control lever wards you 3. forwards 6.
I if you depress the accelerator pedal be-
yond the pressure point (kickdown) Adjustment in 1 km/h increments or
It is not possible to deactivate variable E Briefly press the cruise control lever in
E Briefly press the cruise control lever up the direction of arrow 5.
Speedtronic by braking.
to pressure point 1 for a higher speed
or down 4 for a lower speed. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise
control lever goes out. Variable
Storing the current speed or Speedtronic is deactivated.
You can use the cruise control lever to re- E Keep the cruise control lever pressed Cruise control* is selected.
strict the speed to any speed above to pressure point until the desired
speed is set. Press the cruise control Variable Speedtronic is automatically de- ee
30 km/h while the engine is running.
lever up 1 for a higher speed or down activated if you depress the accelerator
4 for a lower speed. pedal beyond the pressure point (kick-
145
Controls
Driving systems
down) and your current speed does not Setting permanent Speedtronic E Press # to save the entry.
differ by more than 20 km/h from the E Press ( or & to select the Set-
stored speed. You will hear a warning tone tings menu and press # to con- Hill start assist
if this is the case. firm. Hill start assist helps you when pulling
G Risk of accident E Press % or $ to select the Vehi- away on uphill gradients. It causes the ve-
cle submenu and press # to con- hicle to be held for a short time after you
It is not possible to deactivate variable
firm. have removed your foot from the brake
Speedtronic by braking.
E Press % or $ to select the Limit pedal. This allows you enough time to
speed (winter tyres) function. .
move your foot from the brake pedal to
i The last speed stored is cleared when you the accelerator pedal and pull away with-
switch off the engine. You can see the current setting. out the vehicle rolling backwards.
E To change this, press #.
Permanent Speedtronic (vehicles with G Risk of accident
luxury multi-function steering wheel*,
buttons) Never leave the vehicle if it is being braked
by the hill start assist function. After around
i Permanent Speedtronic is only available for one second the hill start assist function will
certain countries. no longer brake your vehicle and it can roll
away.
You can use the on-board computer to lim-
it the speed permanently to a value be-
tween 160 km/h (e.g. for driving with win- E Press % or $ to select the de- E Depress the brake pedal.
ter tyres) and the maximum speed. sired setting. E Make sure that
Shortly before the stored speed is The following settings can be selected: I a forward or reverse gear is en-
reached, it is displayed in the multi-func- I Off gaged on vehicles with manual
tion display. transmission.
Permanent Speedtronic is deacti-
You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, vated. I either D or R is selected on vehicles
even if you depress the accelerator pedal with automatic transmission*.
beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
I Speed limitation between 230 km/h
and 160 km/h in increments of ten. E When pulling away, also make sure that
146
Controls
Driving systems
I in vehicles with manual transmis- ADVANCED AGILITY package with
sion you slowly release the clutch sports mode*
pedal, take your foot off the brake
pedal and carefully depress the ac- The most important part of the AD-
celerator pedal. VANCED AGILITY package with sports
mode is the adjustable suspension sys-
I in vehicles with automatic transmis- tem. This automatically regulates the sus-
sion* you take your foot off the pension in a way optimised for the particu-
brake pedal and carefully depress lar driving conditions. The calibration of
the accelerator pedal. the suspension depends on:
i Once you have taken your foot off the I your driving style
brake pedal, the vehicle is held for around one 1 Indicator lamp
second. I the road surface conditions
2 Button
Hill start assist does not function: I your individual selection
E Start the engine.
I if you are pulling away on a level sur- Your selection remains stored even if you
face or a downhill gradient remove the key from the ignition lock. Sports tuning
I with vehicles with automatic transmis- If your vehicle is equipped with automatic The heightened tension of the suspension
sion* if the gear selector lever is in the transmission*, the ADVANCED AGILITY tuning in sports mode ensures even better
N position package with sports mode also includes contact with the road. Select this mode
steering-wheel gearshift paddles* with a when employing a sporty driving style, e. g.
I if the vehicle is secured with the park- manual gearshift program* (e page 116).
ing brake on winding secondary roads.
E Press button 2.
I if ESP® is defective
Indicator lamp 1 lights up. Sports sus-
pension tuning is selected. Depending
on the engine, the accelerator pedal is
more responsive. On vehicles with au-
tomatic transmission*, program mode
S is selected.
147
Controls
Driving systems
Comfort tuning
G Risk of injury
In comfort mode, the driving characteris- Make sure that no persons or animals are in
tics of your vehicle are more comfortable. the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
Select this mode if you prefer a more com- could be injured.
fortable driving style, but also when driving
fast on straight roads, e.g. motorways.
Parktronic is an electronic parking aid. It
E Press button 2. indicates visually and audibly the distance
Indicator lamp 1 goes out. The com- between your vehicle and an object.
fortable suspension tuning is selected. Parktronic is automatically activated when
On vehicles with automatic transmis- you switch on the ignition and release the 1 Sensors in the front bumper
sion*, program mode C is selected. parking brake.
Parktronic is deactivated at speeds above Range of the sensors
Parktronic* 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and
G Risk of accident Parktronic monitors the area around your slush, otherwise they may not function
vehicle using six sensors in the front correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, tak-
Parktronic is only an aid and may not detect ing care not to scratch or damage them.
all obstacles. It does not relieve you of the
bumper and four sensors in the rear
responsibility to pay attention. bumper.
You are always responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your im-
mediate surroundings when parking and ma-
noeuvring. You could otherwise endanger
yourself and others.
Side view
148
Controls
Driving systems
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a
pneumatic drill could cause Parktronic to mal-
function.
Minimum distance
Centre Approximately 20 cm
Corners Approximately 15 cm
If there is an obstacle within this range,
both warning displays light up and a warn-
Top view ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below Front area warning display
the minimum clearance, it may no longer 1 Left-hand side of the vehicle
Front sensors 2 Right-hand side of the vehicle
be shown.
Centre Approximately 100 cm 3 Indicator segments
Warning displays The warning display for each side of the
vehicle is divided into five yellow and two
The warning displays show the distance
red segments. Parktronic is operational if
Rear sensors between the sensors and the obstacle.
yellow indicator segments 3 light up.
The warning display for the front area is lo-
Centre Approximately 120 cm cated on the dashboard above the centre The gear or selector lever position* deter-
air vents. The warning display for the rear mines which warning display is active:
area is in the roof trim at the rear. Manual transmission:
! Pay particular attention to objects above or Gear lever in Warning display
below the sensors when parking, such as flow-
er pots or trailer towbars. Parktronic does not Forwards gear Front area activated
detect such objects when they are in the imme-
or
diate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage ee
the vehicle or the objects. Neutral
149
Controls
Driving systems
Gear lever in Warning display Activating/deactivating Parktronic
Reverse gear Rear and front areas

activated
Automatic transmission*:
Selector lever at Warning display
D Front area activated
R or N Rear and front areas
activated
P No areas activated
1 Indicator lamp
One or more segments light up as the ve- 2 To activate/deactivate Parktronic
hicle approaches an obstacle, depending
If indicator lamp 1 is on, Parktronic is de-
on the vehicle's distance from the ob-
activated.
stacle. From the:
I sixth segment onwards, you will hear
i Parktronic is automatically activated when
you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
an intermittent warning signal for ap- lock.
proximately two seconds
I seventh segment onwards, you will Trailer towing*
hear a warning signal for approximately Parktronic is deactivated for the rear area
two seconds. You have reached the when you establish an electrical connec-
minimum distance. tion between your vehicle and the trailer.
! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
hitch is not required. The minimum detection
range of Parktronic to an obstacle is measured
from the bumper, not the ball coupling.
150
Controls
Air vents
Air vents
Air vents
1 Airflow thumbwheel for swivelling 5 Side window demister vent, right a Airflow thumbwheel for swivelling side
centre air vent, left 6 Swivelling side air vent, right air vent, left
2 Swivelling centre air vent, left 7 Airflow thumbwheel for swivelling side b Side window demister vent, left
3 Swivelling centre air vent, right air vent, right ee
4 Airflow thumbwheel for swivelling 8 Control panel, front
centre air vent, right 9 Swivelling side air vent, left
151
Controls
Air vents
Centre air vents Rear-compartment air vents*
G Risk of injury
E To open or close the centre air The rear-compartment air vents are lo-
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the
air vents. This could cause burns or frostbite vents: turn thumbwheels 1 and 4 cated in the rear centre console.
to bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the upwards or all the way down.
vents. Keep bare skin away from these air The corresponding centre air vents are
outlets. If necessary, use the air-distribution open or closed.
control to direct the airflow away to a differ-
E To set the air direction: move the
ent area of the vehicle interior.
slider of the left 2 or right 3 centre
air vent to the left, right, up or down.
Please observe the following notes to en-
sure that the air can flow freely through The airflow is directed in the corre-
the air vents: sponding direction.
I Keep the air inlet between the wind- Side air vents
screen and the bonnet free of deposits, 1 Airflow thumbwheel for swivelling rear-
such as ice and snow, to guarantee the E To open or close the side air vents:
turn thumbwheels 7 and a upwards compartment air vent
supply of fresh air into the vehicle inte- 2 Swivelling rear-compartment air vent,
rior. or all the way down.
right
I Never cover the vents or air inlet and The corresponding side air vents are 3 Swivelling rear-compartment air vent,
outlet grilles in the vehicle interior. open or closed. left
E To set the air direction: move the E To open or close rear-compartment
Opening/closing the air vents slider of the left 9 or right 6 side air air vents: turn thumbwheel 1 up-
vent to the left, right, up or down. wards or all the way down.
i Position the sliders for the centre and side
air vents in the central position to provide virtu- The airflow is directed in the corre- The rear-compartment air vents are
ally draft-free ventilation. sponding direction. open or closed.
E To set the air direction: move the
slider of the left rear air vent 3 or right
152
Controls
Air vents
rear air vent 2 to the left, right, up or
down.
The airflow is directed in the corre-
sponding direction.
i Position the sliders for the rear-compart-
ment air vents in the upper position to provide
draft-free ventilation.
153
Controls
Thermatic
Thermatic
Control panel
154
Controls
Thermatic
1 Increases/reduces the 156 6 Increases/reduces the 156 a · Reduces the airflow 157
temperature, left temperature, right
2 ´ Thermatic on/off 156 7 , Air-recirculation 158 b Display
mode
3 z Mono function 157 c Air distribution 156
8 < Rear window heat- 170
4 w Cooling with air de- 160 d U Automatic air dis- 156
ing
humidification on/ tribution and air-
off 9 Q Increases the air- 157 flow
flow
5 y Demists the win- 157
dows
General notes You can only set the temperature sepa- i The interval for replacing the filter depends
rately for the driver's and front-passenger on environmental influences such as heavy air
Thermatic is only operational when the en- sides by setting it manually (e page 156). pollution. The interval may be shorter than that
gine is running. Optimum operation is only indicated in the Service Booklet. A clogged fil-
achieved when you are driving with the i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period dur- ter reduces the amount of air supplied to the
windows and sliding/tilting sunroof* ing warm weather, e.g. using the summer open-
vehicle interior.
closed. ing feature (e page 107). This helps you to
You can allow the air-conditioning system

achieve the desired interior temperature more
quickly.
G Risk of accident
to adjust automatically (e page 156) or Follow the settings recommended on the
In automatic mode, Thermatic cools or following pages for heating or cooling. The
you can adjust it manually.
heats the vehicle interior according to: windows could otherwise mist up. This may
I Setting the air distribution manually I the selected temperature prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
(e page 156) tions, thereby causing an accident.
I the outside temperature
I Setting the airflow manually
(e page 156) The integrated combination filter largely
filters out particles of dust and completely
filters out pollen.
155
Controls
Thermatic
Activating and deactivating Controlling the air conditioning auto- Setting the temperature
Thermatic matically You can set the temperature manually.
E To deactivate: press the ´ button. In automatic mode, you rarely need to The temperature can be set separately for
The indicator lamp in the ´ button change the temperature, airflow and air each side of the vehicle using thumb-
comes on. distribution. The cooling with air-dehumidi- wheels 1 and 6.
fication function is activated. It is possible
i Select this setting if, for example, you are to deactivate automatic mode if neces- Change the temperature settings in small
driving with open windows, an open sliding/tilt- sary. increments only. 22 °C is the ideal tem-
ing sunroof* or open panorama sliding/tilting perature to start with.
sunroof*. When Thermotronic is deactivated, E To activate: press the U button
when the engine is running. E To increase or reduce: turn the tem-
the air supply and air circulation are also
switched off. Select this setting only briefly if perature thumbwheels to the right or
The indicator lamp in the button comes left.
the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panorama on. Airflow and air distribution are con-
sliding/tilting sunroof is closed, otherwise the trolled automatically. i If you turn the temperature thumbwheel on
windows may mist up. one side of the vehicle fully to the right, you will
E Set the desired temperature for the increase the temperature on the other side at
E To activate: make sure that the key is driver's and the front-passenger sides the same time.
in position 2 in the ignition lock or the separately using temperature thumb-
engine is running. If you turn the temperature thumbwheel on one
wheels 1 and 6.
side of the vehicle fully to the left, you will re-
E Press the ´ button again. The vehicle interior temperature is ad- duce the temperature on the other side at the
The indicator lamp in the ´ button justed automatically. same time.
goes out. The previously selected set- E To deactivate: press the U button
tings come into effect again. again. Setting the air distribution manually
or The indicator lamp in the U button If you do not wish the air distribution to be
E Press the U button. goes out. The automatic airflow and adjusted automatically, you can set it man-
The indicator lamp in the U button air-distribution control is deactivated. ually using button c.
comes on. Airflow and air distribution Airflow and air distribution are con- The symbols in display b have the follow-
are controlled automatically. trolled according to the desired level. ing meanings:
156
Controls
Thermatic
Symbol Meaning Setting the airflow manually Demisting
{ Directs air to the windscreen There are eight different airflow levels for You can use the following settings to de-
and side windows through the each side of the vehicle which you can set mist the windscreen, e.g. when it is cov-
demister vents separately and automatically (e page 156) ered with frost.
or manually using the Q and Ï but-
a Directs air through the centre tons. The airflow is controlled in accord- Switching on
and side air vents and the ance with the selected level.
dashboard air vent E Press the y button.
E To increase or reduce the airflow: The indicator lamp in the button comes
Y Directs air into the front and press the Q or Ï button. on.
rear footwells The indicator lamp in the U button Thermatic automatically switches to
goes out. Automatic air distribution re-
i You can also set combinations of air distri- mains activated.
the following functions:
bution positions. I Cooling with air dehumidification on
E Press button c repeatedly until the I Maximum blower and heater output
Mono function
desired setting is reached.
You can use the mono function to adopt I Air to the windscreen and the front
The indicator lamp in the U button side windows
the settings configured for temperature
goes out. The automatic air-distribution
and air distribution on the driver's side for I Air-recirculation mode off
control is deactivated. Airflow and air
the front passenger side.
distribution are controlled according to i You should only select this setting until the
the desired level. E Press the z button. windscreen is clear again.
The mono function is switched on/off.
Changing settings
When the mono function is switched
on, the indicator lamp in the button is You can modify the settings for airflow, air
lit up. distribution and temperature. The other
settings of the demisting function are re-
tained. ee
E Change the airflow (e page 157).
157
Controls
Thermatic
or Windows misted up i The cooling with air-dehumidification func-
tion remains on.
E Change the air distribution
(e page 156). Windows misted up on the inside
Windscreen misted up on the outside
or E Press the y button.
E Switch on the windscreen wipers
E Change the temperature (e page 156). The indicator lamp in the button comes (e page 104).
on.
Switching off When automatic air distribution is
Thermatic automatically switches to switched off:
E Press the y button. the following functions:
E Press button c to set the air distribu-
The indicator lamp in the button goes I Cooling with air dehumidification on tion to a or Y.
out. I Maximum blower and heater output i You should only select this setting until the
The previously selected settings come I Air to the windscreen and the front windscreen is clear again.
into effect again. side windows
i The cooling with air-dehumidification func- I Air-recirculation mode off Air-recirculation mode
tion remains on.
i If you have switched on the demisting func- You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
or tion with the y button, you cannot make unpleasant smells are entering the vehicle
E Press the U button. any other settings. from outside. No more fresh air will be tak-
en in and the air inside the vehicle will be
The indicator lamp in the U button You should only select this setting until the
recirculated.
comes on. The indicator lamp in the windscreen is clear again.
P button goes out. Airflow and air E Press the y button again when the G Risk of accident
distribution are controlled automati- windscreen is clear.
Only switch over to air-recirculation mode
cally. The indicator lamp in the y button briefly at low outside temperatures. Other-
goes out. wise, the windows could mist up, thus im-
The previously selected settings come pairing visibility and endangering yourself
and others. This may prevent you from ob-
into effect again.
serving the traffic conditions, thereby caus-
ing an accident.
158
Controls
Thermatic
Air-recirculation mode with conveni- sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama
E To activate: briefly press the O but- ence opening/closing feature sliding/tilting sunroof* are closed.
ton. The indicator lamp in the button comes
The indicator lamp in the button comes G Risk of injury on. Air-recirculation mode is activated.
on. Make sure that nobody can become trapped E To deactivate and open: press and
i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto- between the side window and the door hold the O button again for longer
matically at high outside temperatures. When frame as the side windows are opened and than two seconds until the side win-
air-recirculation mode is activated automati- closed. Do not place objects or lean against dows and the sliding/tilting sunroof*
cally, the indicator lamp in the O7 button the side window when it is being opened or
or panorama sliding/tilting sunroof*
is off. closed. You or the objects could be drawn
have returned to their previous posi-
in or become trapped between the side win-
Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. dow and the door frame as the window
tions.
E To deactivate: press the O button moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, The indicator lamp in the button goes
again. press the O button again for longer than out. Air-recirculation mode is deacti-
two seconds or operate the switch to move vated.
The indicator lamp in the button goes the side window in the opposite direction,
out. to stop the side window or to open or close
i If you open a window, the panorama slid-
ing/tilting sunroof* or the sliding/tilting sun-
i Air-recirculation mode switches off auto- it again.
roof* manually after closing using the conveni-
matically: Make sure that nobody can become trapped ence closing feature, they will remain in this po-
I after approximately five minutes at outside when you are closing the sliding/tilting sun- sition when opened using the convenience
temperatures below approximately 5 °C roof*. If there is a risk of entrapment, press opening feature.
the O button again for longer than two
I after approximately five minutes if the cool- seconds or press the switch to open the
ing with air dehumidification function is de- sliding/tilting sunroof*.
activated
I after approximately 30 minutes at outside
E To activate and close: press and hold
temperatures above approximately 5 °C
the O button for longer than two
seconds until the side windows and
159
Controls
Thermatic
Cooling with air dehumidification midification has a delayed switch-off
feature.
The cooling function is operational when
the engine is running and cools according E To activate: press the œ button
to the interior temperature selected. The again.
cooling also dries the air inside the vehicle The indicator lamp in the button comes
and thereby effectively prevents the win- on. The cooling with air-dehumidifica-
dows from misting up. tion function is activated.
G Risk of accident
If you deactivate the cooling function with
air dehumidification, the vehicle will not be
cooled in warm weather and the air will not
be dehumidified. The windows could mist up
more quickly. This may prevent you from ob-
ing an accident.
The cooling system uses the refrigerant
R134A. This refrigerant does not damage
the earth's ozone layer.
i Condensate may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when Thermatic is in cooling mode.
E To deactivate: press the œ button.
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out. The cooling function with air dehu-
160
Controls
Thermatic
161
Controls
Thermotronic*
Thermotronic*
Control panel
162
Controls
Thermotronic*
1 Increases/reduces the 164 5 w Cooling with air de- 168 a Air distribution, right 165
temperature, left humidification on/
9 Q Increases the air- 165
off
2 U Automatic air dis- 156 flow
tribution and air- 6 T Residual heat 168
c · Reduces the airflow 165
flow
7 y Demists the win- 165
3 ´ Thermotronic off/ 164 dows
d Display
on
8 Increases/reduces the 164
e Air distribution, left 165
4 z Mono function 165 temperature, right
f , Air-recirculation 167
9 < Rear window heat- 170
mode
ing
General notes i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period dur- i The interval for replacing the filter depends
ing warm weather, e.g. using the summer open- on environmental influences such as heavy air
Thermotronic is only operational when the ing feature (e page 107). This helps you to pollution. The interval may be shorter than that
engine is running. Optimum operation is achieve the desired interior temperature more indicated in the Service Booklet. A clogged fil-
only achieved when you are driving with quickly. ter reduces the amount of air supplied to the
the windows and sliding/tilting sunroof* vehicle interior.
In automatic mode, Thermotronic cools or
closed.
heats the vehicle interior according to:
G Risk of accident
I the selected temperature
You can allow the air-conditioning system Follow the settings recommended on the
to adjust automatically (e page 164) or I the outside temperature following pages for heating or cooling. The
you can adjust it manually. I the intensity of sunlight windows could otherwise mist up. This may
prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
I Setting the air distribution manually The integrated combination filter largely tions, thereby causing an accident.
(e page 165) filters out particles of dust and completely
I Setting the airflow manually filters out pollen.
(e page 165)
163
Controls
Thermotronic*
Activating and deactivating Controlling the air conditioning auto- E Set the airflow to the desired level us-
Thermotronic matically ing the airflow buttons.
E To deactivate: press the ´ button. In automatic mode, you rarely need to E Turn the air distribution thumbwheel to
change the temperature, airflow and air the desired level.
The indicator lamp in the ´ button
comes on. distribution. The cooling with air-dehumidi-
fication function is activated. You can acti- Setting the temperature
i Select this setting if, for example, you are vate and deactivate the automatic mode
driving with open windows, an open sliding/tilt- You can set the temperature manually.
separately for the left and right-hand sides
ing sunroof* or open panorama sliding/tilting of the vehicle as required. The temperature can be set separately for
sunroof*. When Thermotronic is deactivated, each side of the vehicle using thumb-
the air supply and air circulation are also E To activate: press the U button
wheels 1 and 8.
switched off. Select this setting only briefly if when the engine is running.
Change the temperature settings in small
the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panorama The indicator lamp in the U button increments only. 22 °C is the ideal tem-
sliding/tilting sunroof is closed, otherwise the comes on. Airflow and air distribution
windows may mist up. perature to start with.
are controlled automatically.
E To activate: make sure that the key is E To increase or reduce: turn the tem-
E Set the desired temperature for the
in position 2 in the ignition lock or the perature thumbwheels to the right or
driver's and the front-passenger sides left.
engine is running. separately using temperature thumb-
E Press the ´ button again. wheels 1 and 8. i If you turn the temperature thumbwheel on
one side of the vehicle fully to the right, you will
The indicator lamp in the ´ button The vehicle interior temperature is ad- increase the temperature on the other side at
goes out. The previously selected set- justed automatically. the same time.
tings come into effect again. E To deactivate: press the U button If you turn the temperature thumbwheel on one
or again. side of the vehicle fully to the left, you will re-
E Press the U button. The indicator lamp in the U button duce the temperature on the other side at the
goes out. same time.
The indicator lamp in the U button
comes on. Airflow and air distribution The automatic air distribution and air-
are controlled automatically. flow control is deactivated.
164
Controls
Thermotronic*
Setting the air distribution manually Setting the airflow manually E Press the z button.
The air distribution is set separately for There are seven different airflow levels for The mono function is switched on/off.
each side of the vehicle manually using each side of the vehicle which you can set When the mono function is switched
buttons a and e. separately and automatically or manually on, the indicator lamp in the button is
The symbols in display d have the follow- using the Q and · buttons. The air- lit up.
ing meanings: flow is controlled in accordance with the
selected level. Demisting
Symbol Meaning E To increase or reduce the airflow: You can use the following settings to de-
{ Directs air to the windscreen press the Q and · buttons to in- mist the windscreen, e.g. when it is cov-
and side windows through the crease or reduce the airflow. ered with frost.
demister vents The indicator lamp in the U button
Switching on
a Directs air through the centre goes out.
and side air vents and the E To increase or reduce the airflow: E Press the y button.
dashboard air vent press the Q or · button. The indicator lamp in the button comes
Y Directs air into the front and The indicator lamp in the U button on.
rear footwells goes out. Automatic air distribution re- Thermotronic automatically switches to
mains activated. the following functions:
i You can also set combinations of air distri- I Cooling with air dehumidification on
bution positions. Mono function
E Press buttons a and e repeatedly.
I Maximum blower and heater output
You can use the mono function to adopt
The indicator lamp in the U button the settings configured for temperature,
I Air to the windscreen and the front
goes out. The automatic air-distribution air distribution and airflow on the driver's side windows
control is deactivated. Air distribution side for the front passenger side and the I Air-recirculation mode off
is controlled according to the desired rear compartment. i You should only select this setting until the
level. windscreen is clear again.
165
Controls
Thermotronic*
Changing settings E Press the U button. I Air to the windscreen and the front
The indicator lamp in the U button side windows
You can modify the settings for airflow, air
distribution and temperature. The other comes on. The indicator lamp in the I Air-recirculation mode off
settings of the demisting function are re- y button goes out. i If you have switched on the demisting func-
tained. The display comes on. tion with the y button, you cannot make
E Change the airflow (e page 165). any other settings.
Airflow and air distribution are con-
trolled automatically. You should only select this setting until the
or
windscreen is clear again.
E Change the air distribution
Windows misted up E To switch off: press the y button
(e page 165).
again when the windscreen is clear.
or Windows misted up on the inside The indicator lamp in the button goes
E Change the temperature (e page 164). If you switch off the blower when air-recir- out.
Switching off culation mode is activated, the vehicle in- The previously selected settings come
terior will no longer be ventilated and the into effect again.
E Press the y button. windows could mist up.
i The cooling with air-dehumidification func-
The indicator lamp in the button goes E To activate: make sure that automatic tion remains on.
out. mode is activated.
Windscreen misted up on the outside
The previously selected settings come If the windows are still misted up:
into effect again. E Press the y button. E Switch on the windscreen wipers
i The cooling with air-dehumidification func- (e page 104).
The indicator lamp in the button comes
tion remains on. on. When automatic air conditioning is
or switched off:
Thermotronic automatically switches to
the following functions: E Press buttons a and e to set the air
distribution to a or Y.
I Cooling with air dehumidification on
i You should only select this setting until the
I Maximum blower and heater output windscreen is clear again.
166
Controls
Thermotronic*
Air-recirculation mode E To deactivate: press the O button the side window in the opposite direction,
again. to stop the side window or to open or close
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if it again.
unpleasant smells are entering the vehicle The indicator lamp in the button goes
from outside. No more fresh air will be tak- out. Make sure that nobody can become trapped
when you are closing the sliding/tilting sun-
en in and the air inside the vehicle will be i Air-recirculation mode switches off auto- roof*. If there is a risk of entrapment, press
recirculated. matically: the O button again for longer than two
G Risk of accident I after approximately five minutes at outside
temperatures below approximately 7 °C
seconds or press the switch to open the
sliding/tilting sunroof*.
Only switch over to air-recirculation mode I after approximately five minutes if the cool-
briefly at low outside temperatures. Other-
ing with air dehumidification function is de- E To activate and close: press and hold
wise, the windows could mist up, thus im-
pairing visibility and endangering yourself
activated (e page 168) the O button for longer than two
and others. This may prevent you from ob- I after approximately 30 minutes at outside seconds until the side windows and
serving the traffic conditions, thereby caus- temperatures above approximately 5 °C sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama
ing an accident. sliding/tilting sunroof* are closed.
Air-recirculation mode with conveni-
The indicator lamp in the button comes
ence opening/closing feature
E To activate: briefly press the O but- on. Air-recirculation mode is activated.
ton. G Risk of injury E To deactivate and open: press and
The indicator lamp in the button comes hold the O button again for longer
Make sure that nobody can become trapped than two seconds until the side win-
on. between the side window and the door
dows and the sliding/tilting sunroof*
i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto- frame as the side windows are opened and
matically at high outside temperatures. When closed. Do not place objects or lean against
air-recirculation mode is activated automati- the side window when it is being opened or
have returned to their previous posi-
cally, the indicator lamp in the O button is closed. You or the objects could be drawn tions.
off. in or become trapped between the side win- The indicator lamp in the button goes
Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. dow and the door frame as the window out. Air-recirculation mode is deacti-
moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, ee
vated.
press the O button again for longer than
two seconds or operate the switch to move
167
Controls
Thermotronic*
i If you open a window, the panorama slid- E To deactivate: press the T button
ing/tilting sunroof* or the sliding/tilting sun- again. H Environmental note
roof* manually after closing using the conveni- The cooling system uses the refrigerant
ence closing feature, they will remain in this po-
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out. R134A. This refrigerant does not damage
sition when opened using the convenience the earth's ozone layer.
opening feature. i Residual heat/auxiliary ventilation is deac-
tivated automatically: i Condensate may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when Thermatic is in cooling mode.
Residual heat/auxiliary ventilation I if you turn the key to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock E To deactivate: press the œ button.
After the engine is turned off, you can still
heat the stationary vehicle with the resid- I after about 30 minutes The indicator lamp in the button goes
ual heat of the engine for 30 minutes after I if the battery voltage drops out. The cooling function with air dehu-
removing the key or turning it to position midification has a delayed switch-off
0 or 1 in the ignition lock. The maximum feature.
Cooling with air dehumidification
heating time is 30 minutes. It depends E To activate: press the œ button
upon the interior temperature previously The cooling function is operational when again.
set and the coolant temperature. the engine is running and cools according
to the interior temperature selected. The The indicator lamp in the button comes
i If you activate residual heat at high temper- cooling also dries the air inside the vehicle on. The cooling with air-dehumidifica-
atures, only ventilation will be activated. tion function is activated.
and thereby effectively prevents the win-
i The blower will run at a low speed regard- dows from misting up.
less of the airflow setting. Rear-compartment air conditioning
E To activate: turn the key to position 1 G Risk of accident
You can also adjust the temperature and
or 0 in the ignition lock or remove it. If you deactivate the cooling function with airflow using the rear-compartment con-
E Press the T button. air dehumidification, the vehicle will not be trol panel.
cooled in warm weather and the air will not
The indicator lamp in the button comes be dehumidified. The windows could mist up
on. more quickly. This may prevent you from ob-
ing an accident.
168
Controls
Thermotronic*
The rear-compartment control panel is lo- i Position the sliders for the rear-compart- Setting the airflow manually
cated in the rear centre console. ment air vents in the upper position to provide
draught-free ventilation. You can configure the airflow manually
with the Q or Ï button. The airflow
E To open or close rear-compartment air is controlled in accordance with the se-
vents: turn thumbwheel 1 upwards or lected level.
downwards.
E To increase or reduce the airflow:
The rear-compartment air vents are Press the Q or Ï button.
open or closed.
Setting the temperature
The temperature can be set separately for
each side of the vehicle using buttons 3.
Rear-compartment control panel Change the temperature settings in small
Thermotronic increments only. 22 °C is the ideal tem-
1 Airflow thumbwheel for swivelling rear- perature to start with. The temperature
compartment air vent set is shown in the display. Thermotronic
2 Swivelling rear-compartment air vent, adjusts to the set temperature.
right
3 Increases/reduces the airflow E Set the temperature you desire with
4 Display the buttons.
5 Increases/reduces the temperature The rear passenger compartment tem-
6 Swivelling rear-compartment air vent, perature is adjusted automatically.
left i The rear-compartment air conditioning
does not cool the air if the cooling function has
Rear-compartment air vents
been deactivated on the front control panel
You can set the airflow volume and direc- (e page 168).
tion individually using the rear-compart-
ment air vents.
169
Controls
Rear window heating
Rear window heating
The rear window heating switches off auto-
matically within a period of 15 to 30 mi-
nutes. The heating time depends on the
outside temperature and the driving condi-
tions.
G Risk of accident
Clear all windows of ice or snow before set-
ting off. Impaired visibility could otherwise
endanger yourself and others.
i The rear window heating has a high current

draw. You should therefore switch off the heat-
ing as soon as the rear window is clear.
E To switch on and off: make sure that
the key is in position 2 in the ignition
lock.
E Press the < button in the control
panel:
I Thermatic (e page 154)
I Thermotronic* (e page 162)
The indicator lamp in the button lights
up or goes out.
170
Controls
Sliding/tilting sunroof*
Sliding/tilting sunroof* point in the direction of arrow 2 and
release it.
G Risk of injury The sliding/tilting sunroof opens fully.
Make sure that nobody can become trapped To stop:
when closing the sliding/tilting sunroof. If
danger threatens, release the switch and E Press or pull the switch in any direc-
push the opening switch. tion.
The glass in the sliding/tilting sunroof could The sliding/tilting sunroof stops in its
smash in an accident. current position.
If you are not wearing a seat belt, there is a
risk that you could be thrown through the Sliding/tilting sunroof operation Closing
opening in the event of the vehicle overturn- 1 To raise at the rear
ing. Therefore, always wear a seat belt to re- E To operate manually: pull the switch
2 To open to the pressure point in the direction of
duce the risk of injuries.
3 To close arrow 3 and hold it until the sliding/
E Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the tilting sunroof has reached the desired
! Only open the sliding/tilting sunroof if it is ignition lock. position.
free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions
may occur. or
Opening E To operate automatically: pull the
Do not allow objects to protrude from the slid-
ing/tilting sunroof, as they could damage the E To operate manually: press the switch briefly beyond the pressure
sealing strips. switch to the pressure point in the di- point in the direction of arrow 3 and
i It is also possible to open and close the rection of arrow 2 and hold it until the release it.
sliding/tilting sunroof from the outside using panorama sliding/tilting sunroof and The sliding/tilting sunroof closes fully.
the “Summer opening” (e page 107) and “Con- the cover have reached the desired po-
sition. To stop:
venience closing” (e page 107) features re-
spectively. or E Press or pull the switch in any direc-
tion. ee
E To operate automatically: press the
switch briefly beyond the pressure The sliding/tilting sunroof stops in its
current position.
171
Controls
Sliding/tilting sunroof*
E Close the cover manually if necessary. E To operate automatically: press the Rain-closing feature*
switch briefly beyond the pressure
G Risk of injury point in the direction of arrow 1 and The sliding/tilting sunroof closes auto-
release it. matically when the key is removed or the
If the sliding/tilting sunroof blocks and key is in position 0 in the ignition lock:
opens again, close it by pressing the switch To stop:
again up to the pressure point in the direc- I if it starts to rain
tion of arrow 3 within 2 seconds with more E Press or pull the switch in any direc-
tion.
I at extreme outside temperatures
force.
The sliding/tilting sunroof stops in its
I after 6 hours
If the sliding/tilting sunroof still blocks and
opens again, close it by pressing the switch current position. I if there are voltage supply malfunctions
once again up to the pressure point in the The sliding/tilting sunroof then rises at
direction of arrow 3 within 2 seconds with Lowering and closing the rear to continue to ventilate the ve-
the obstruction sensor switched off. hicle interior.
E To operate manually: pull the switch
and a serious or even fatal injury is not to the pressure point in the direction of i The sliding/tilting sunroof does not close
caused as you close the sliding/tilting sun- arrow 3 and hold it until the sliding/ if:
roof without the obstruction sensor. tilting sunroof is lowered and fully I it is raised at the rear
closed.
I it is blocked
or
I no rain is falling within the field of the rain
Raising E To operate automatically: press the sensor in the windscreen (e.g. because the
The sliding/tilting sunroof can be raised at switch briefly beyond the pressure vehicle is under a bridge or in a carport)
the rear for ventilation. point in the direction of arrow 3 and
release it.
E To operate manually: press the
switch to the pressure point in the di- To stop:
rection of arrow 1 and hold it until the E Press or pull the switch in any direc-
sliding/tilting sunroof has reached the tion.
desired position.
The sliding/tilting sunroof stops in its
or current position.
172
Controls
Panorama sliding/tilting sunroof*
Opening and closing the cover Panorama sliding/tilting sunroof* The switch for the roller sunblind and the
panorama sliding/tilting sunroof is located
The cover is used to protect you from sun- The roller sunblind protects you from on the overhead control panel.
light. When you open the sliding/tilting strong sunlight shining through the pano-
sunroof, the cover moves back with it. rama sliding/tilting sunroof.
When the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed
or raised at the rear, you can open or close Opening and closing the roller sun-
the cover manually. blind
The two roller sunblinds can only be
Resetting the sliding/tilting sunroof opened or closed when the panorama slid-
Reset the sliding/tilting sunroof if it does ing/tilting sunroof is closed. The roller
not open or close smoothly or if it cannot sunblinds can only be operated simultane-
be operated automatically. ously.
E Make sure the key is in position 1 or 2 G Risk of injury 1 To open
in the ignition lock. 2 To open
E Press and hold the switch in the direc- as you open or close the roller sunblinds. 3 To close
tion of arrow 1 until the sliding/tilting E Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the
sunroof is fully raised at the rear. ignition lock.
E Keep the switch pressed for an addi-
Opening
tional second.
E Check that the sliding/tilting sunroof E To operate manually: press the
can be opened or closed fully again switch to the pressure point in the di-
(e page 171). rection of arrow 1 or 2 and hold it
until the roller sunblinds have reached
E If this is not the case, it will be neces- the desired position.
sary to reset the sliding/tilting sunroof
once more. or ee
173
Controls
E To operate automatically: push the E Press or pull the switch in any direc- side using the "Summer opening" (e page 107)
switch briefly beyond the pressure tion. and "Convenience closing" (e page 107) fea-
point in the direction of arrow 1 or tures respectively.
The roller sunblinds stop in their cur-
2. rent positions.
The roller sunblinds open fully.
To stop: Panorama sliding/tilting sunroof
E Press or pull the switch in any direc-
tion.
G Risk of injury
The roller sunblinds stop in their cur- when you are closing the panorama sliding/
rent positions. tilting sunroof. If there is a risk of entrap-
ment, press the opening switch.
Closing
The glass in the panorama sliding/tilting
E To operate manually: pull and hold sunroof could break in an accident. 1 To raise at the rear
the switch in the direction of arrow 3 If you are not wearing a seat belt, there is a 2 To open
until the roller blinds have reached the risk that you could be thrown through the 3 To close
desired position. opening in the event of the vehicle overturn- E Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the
The roller sunblinds close fully. ing. Therefore, always wear a seat belt to re- ignition lock.
duce the risk of injuries.
Opening
E To operate automatically: pull the ! Only open the panorama sliding/tilting sun-
switch briefly beyond the pressure E To operate manually: press the
roof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise,
point in the direction of arrow 3. malfunctions may occur.
switch to the pressure point in the di-
rection of arrow 2 and hold it until the
The roller sunblinds open fully. Do not allow objects to protrude from the pan- panorama sliding/tilting sunroof has
To stop: orama sliding/tilting sunroof, as they could reached the desired position.
damage the sealing strips.
or
i It is also possible to open and close the
panorama sliding/tilting sunroof from the out- E To operate automatically: press the
174
Controls
point in the direction of arrow 2 and E Press or pull the switch in any direc- rection of arrow 1 and hold it until the
release it. tion. panorama sliding/tilting sunroof has
The panorama sliding/tilting sunroof The panorama sliding/tilting sunroof reached the desired position.
opens fully. stops in its current position. or
E
To stop:
G Risk of injury To operate automatically: press the
E Press or pull the switch in any direc-
If the panorama sliding/tilting sunroof point in the direction of arrow 1 and
tion. blocks and opens again, it can be closed release it.
The panorama sliding/tilting sunroof again by pressing the switch to the pressure
stops in its current position. point in the direction of arrow 3 within 2 To stop:
seconds with more force. E Press or pull the switch in any direc-
Closing If the panorama sliding/tilting sunroof still tion.
E To operate manually: pull the switch blocks and opens again, it can be closed by The panorama sliding/tilting sunroof
to the pressure point in the direction of again pressing the switch to the pressure stops in its current position.
point in the direction of arrow 3 within
arrow 3 and hold it until the panorama
2 seconds with the anti-entrapment feature Lowering and closing
sliding/tilting sunroof has reached the
switched off.
desired position. E To operate manually: pull the switch
or and a serious or even fatal injury is not to the pressure point in the direction of
E To operate automatically: pull the caused as you close the panorama sliding/ arrow 3 and hold it until the panorama
switch briefly beyond the pressure tilting sunroof without the anti-entrapment sliding/tilting sunroof is lowered and
point in the direction of arrow 3 and feature. fully closed.
release it. or
The panorama sliding/tilting sunroof Raising E To operate automatically: pull the
closes fully. switch briefly beyond the pressure
You can raise the panorama sliding/tilting point in the direction of arrow 3 and
To stop: sunroof at the rear to provide ventilation. release it. ee
E To operate manually: press the To stop:
switch to the pressure point in the di-
175
Controls
E Press or pull the switch in any direc- Resetting the panorama sliding/tilt- E Keep the switch pressed for an addi-
tion. ing sunroof and roller sunblind tional second.
The panorama sliding/tilting sunroof Reset the panorama sliding/tilting sunroof E Press and hold the switch to the pres-
stops in its current position. and the roller sunblinds if the panorama sure point in the direction of arrow 2
sliding/tilting sunroof or the roller sun- and hold it until the roller sunblinds are
Rain-closing feature* blind does not open smoothly or if they fully opened.
If the panorama sliding/tilting sunroof is cannot be operated automatically. E Press the switch to the pressure point
open, it closes automatically when the key in the direction of arrow 2 and hold it
is removed or when the key is turned to until the panorama sliding/tilting sun-
position 0 in the ignition lock: roof is open about 10 cm.
I if it starts to rain E Pull the switch to the pressure point in
the direction of arrow 3 and hold it
I at extreme outside temperatures until the panorama sliding/tilting sun-
I after 6 hours roof is fully closed.
I if there are voltage supply malfunctions E Keep the switch pressed for an addi-
i The panorama sliding/tilting sunroof does tional second.
not close if: E Check that the panorama sliding/tilting
I it is blocked
1 To raise sunroof can be opened fully again auto-
2 To open matically (e page 174).
I no rain is falling within the field of the rain 3 To close
sensor in the windscreen (e.g. because the E If this is not the case, it will be neces-
vehicle is under a bridge or in a carport) E Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the sary to reset the panorama sliding/tilt-
ignition lock. ing sunroof once more.
E Pull and hold the switch to the pressure
point in the direction of arrow 3 and
hold it until the roller sunblinds are fully
closed.
176
Controls
Loading and stowing
Loading and stowing Cup holder in the rear seat armrest Roof rack system*
Cup holder G Risk of accident

An incorrectly secured roof rack, ski rack or
G Risk of injury load could work loose from the vehicle and
Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle thereby cause an accident. Follow the roof
is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants rack/ski rack manufacturers' installation in-
could be injured by objects being thrown structions and special instructions for use.
around if you: The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of
I brake sharply gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling.
You must observe the maximum roof load of
I change direction suddenly 50 kg. Always adapt your driving style to
I have an accident 1 Release button the prevailing road, traffic and weather con-
Only use the cup holders for containers of 2 Cup holder ditions and drive with particular care if the
the right size and which have lids. Other- roof is laden.
E To open: open the stowage compart-
wise, the drinks could spill.
ment in the rear seat armrest.
Cup holders should not be used for hot i Mercedes-Benz roof racks have been spe-
drinks. Otherwise, you may scald yourself. E Press the release button and fold the
cially developed and tested in accordance with
cup holder forwards. Mercedes-Benz standards. These roof racks
i You can now close the stowage compart- comply with DIN standard 75302 and are addi-
ment again. tionally subjected to crash and durability tests.
E To close: open the stowage compart- ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
ment in the rear seat armrest. use roof rack systems which have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz. This helps to
E Fold the cup holder back until it en- prevent damage to the vehicle.
gages.
Position the load on the roof rack in such a way
that the vehicle is not damaged, even when it ee
is in motion.
177
Controls
Loading and stowing
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, make E Vehicle with panorama sliding/tilt- Loading guidelines
sure that you can: ing sunroof: carefully open cover 1
I raise the sliding/tilting sunroof* fully against the direction of the arrow. G Risk of injury
I raise the panorama sliding/tilting sunroof* E Fold covers 1 upwards. Keep the boot lid closed while the vehicle is
fully E Only secure the roof rack to the an- in operation. Otherwise, you could be pois-
chorage points under covers 1. oned by exhaust fumes entering the vehicle.
I open the boot lid fully
Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions included with the roof The handling characteristics of a laden ve-
rack. hicle are dependent on the distribution of
the load within the vehicle. You should
therefore load your vehicle as shown in
Luggage net in the front-passenger the illustrations.
footwell
G Risk of injury
Only place lightweight objects in the lug-
gage net. Do not use it to transport heavy,
Illustration applies to vehicles with or with- sharp-edged or fragile objects. The luggage
out a sliding/tilting sunroof net cannot secure the objects sufficiently in
the event of an accident.
1 Covers
! Do not use any metallic or hard objects to
open the roof flaps, as you could otherwise
damage or scratch the roof flaps or roof trim
strips. Load distribution
E Vehicle with or without sliding/tilt- Observe the following notes when trans-
ing sunroof: carefully open cover 1 in porting a load:
the direction of the arrow. I When transporting a load, never exceed
the maximum permissible gross vehicle
178
Controls
Loading and stowing
weight or the permissible axle loads for I Secure the load using the lashing eye-
the vehicle (including occupants). lets.
I Position heavy loads as far forwards I Do not use elastic straps or nets to se-
and as low in the boot as possible. cure a load as these are only intended
I The load must not protrude above the as an anti-slip protection for light
upper edge of the backrests. loads.
I Always place the load against the front I If you are using tensioning straps, only
or rear seat backrests. use straps with a minimum permissible
tensile strength of 600 daN and a per-
I Always place the load behind unoccu- centage elongation of approximately
pied seats if possible. 7%. 1 Lashing eyelets
I Secure the load with sufficiently strong I Do not route lashing materials across E Secure the load to lashing eyelets 1.
and wear-resistant load restraints. Pad sharp edges or corners.
sharp edges for protection.
I Pad sharp edges for protection. Rear bench seat through-loading fea-
i Load restraints are available at any quali- ture*
fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz I Load the anchorages evenly.
Service Centre. I Use all the lashing eyelets if possible. The left-hand and right-hand rear seat
backrests can be folded down to increase
I Do not overload the lashing eyelets if the boot capacity.
Securing a load you are using tensioning devices.
Lashing eyelets I Please read and observe the operating G Risk of injury
instructions for the lashing material Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside
G Risk of injury used. the vehicle or in the boot unless they are se-
There are four lashing eyelets in the boot. cured.
Spread the load evenly between the lashing
eyelets. Observe the loading guidelines. Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants
could be injured by objects being thrown
around the vehicle in the event of sharp ee
Observe the following notes on securing braking, a sudden change in direction or an
loads: accident.
179
Controls
Loading and stowing
E Pull right-hand or left-hand release han- Folding the rear seat backrest back
dle 1 on the rear seat backrest.
G Risk of poisoning
The corresponding rear seat backrest
Always drive with the boot lid closed. Ex- is unlocked.
haust fumes could otherwise enter the ve-
hicle interior. E Fully insert the rear seat backrest head
restraints (e page 86).
E If necessary, move the driver's or front-
Folding the rear seat backrest for- passenger seat forward.
wards
The release handles are at the top of the
boot on the left- and right-hand sides.
1 Rear seat backrest
E Swing rear seat backrest 1 back until
it engages.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not be-
come trapped.
G Risk of injury
2 Rear seat backrest Make sure that the rear seat backrest is cor-
E Fold rear seat backrest 2 forward.
rectly engaged in position. Otherwise, ve-
hicle occupants could be injured by objects
E If necessary, move the driver's or front- being thrown around if you:
1 Rear seat backrest release handle
passenger seat back. I brake sharply
E Open the boot/luggage compartment.
I change direction suddenly
I have an accident
180
Controls
Loading and stowing
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, the Stowage well under the boot floor E Hook handle 1 into rain trough 2.
appropriate display will be shown in the in-
TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are lo- ! Unhook the handle before closing the boot,
strument cluster. as you could otherwise damage the handle.
cated in the stowage well.
i You should always engage the rear seat Stowage compartments
backrests if you do not need the through-load-
ing feature. This will prevent access to the boot G Risk of injury
from the vehicle interior.
The stowage compartments must be closed
when items are stored in them. Luggage
Bag holder nets are not designed to secure heavy items
of luggage.
You or other vehicle occupants could be in-
jured by objects being thrown around if you:
I brake sharply
1 Handle I change direction suddenly
E To open: pull handle 1 upwards. I have an accident
Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not
be carried in the luggage net.
Do not place hard objects in the map pock-
ets. Objects must not protrude from the
1 Bag holder map pockets.
There is a bag holder 1 on each side of
the boot.
! The bag holder can bear a maximum load
of 5 kg. Do not tie a load to it.
1 Handle
2 Rain trough
181
Controls
Loading and stowing
Glove compartment Stowage compartment on top of the
dashboard
1 To unlock
2 To lock
1 Handle
2 Glove compartment cover E To lock: insert the emergency key ele- 1 Stowage compartment
ment (e page 279) into the lock and 2 Button
E To open: pull handle 1 and open
turn it 90° clockwise to position 2.
glove compartment cover 2. E To open: press button 2.
E To unlock: insert the emergency key
E To close: fold glove compartment cov- Stowage compartment 1 opens.
element (e page 279) into the lock and
er 2 up until it engages. i In vehicles with Audio 20, Audio 50 and
turn it 90° anti-clockwise to position
1. COMAND, the audio display is under the cover.
i Vehicles with Audio/COMAND: the AUX
connection is in the glove compartment.
182
Controls
Loading and stowing
Stowage compartment in the centre Stowage compartment under the arm- Stowage compartment in the rear seat
console rest armrest
1 Cover 1 Right-hand button E Fold down the rear seat armrest.

E To open: slide cover 1 back. 2 Left-hand button E Lift the cover of the rear seat armrest.
E To open: press left-hand button 2 or
right-hand button 1.
The stowage compartment opens.
i A small and a large stowage compartment
are located under the armrest. The small stow-
age compartment can be removed for empty-
ing. The telephone bracket* is located in the
large stowage compartment.
183
Controls
Features
Features Glare from the front Rear window blind*
E Fold down the sun visor.
Sun visors
Glare from the side
G Risk of accident
E Fold down the sun visor.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered
while driving. You could otherwise be E Pull sun visor from retainer 2.
dazzled, thereby endangering yourself and E Swing the sun visor to the side.
others.
Mirror in the sun visor
i Mirror light 1 only comes on if the sun vi-
sor is clipped into retainer 2. 1 Button for rear window blind
E Fold down the sun visor. ! Make sure that the rear window blind can
E Fold up mirror cover 5. move freely. Otherwise, the blind or other ob-
jects could be damaged.
Mirror light 1 comes on.
E To extend or retract: briefly press but-
ton 1.
The rear window blind fully extends or
fully retracts.
Sun visor
1 Mirror light
2 Retainer
3 Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
4 Vanity mirror
5 Mirror cover
184
Controls
Features
Ashtray* (vehicles with ashtray and Ashtray in the rear compartment Cigarette lighter* (vehicles with ash-
cigarette lighter*) tray and cigarette lighter*)
Ashtray in the cockpit G Risk of injury and fire
Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its
knob. Otherwise, you might burn yourself.
Make sure that children travelling in the ve-
hicle are not able to injure themselves on
the hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with
it.
1 Insert
2 Ashtray
3 Release button
1 Cover E To open: pull ashtray 2 out by its top
2 To remove the insert edge.
3 Ashtray
E To remove the insert: press release
E To open: slide cover 1 forwards until
button 3 and remove the insert up-
it engages. wards.
E To remove the insert: touch the insert
E To replace the insert: press insert 1
on the ribbing at the side and lift it up into the holder until it engages. 1 Cover
and out 2. 2 Cigarette lighter
E To replace the insert: press the insert
into the holder until it clicks into place. in the ignition lock.
E To close: press cover 1 briefly at the ee
E Slide cover 1 forwards until it en-
front. gages.
The cover moves back.
185
Controls
Features
E Press in cigarette lighter 2. An additional socket is fitted in the centre Socket in the rear passenger compart-
Cigarette lighter 2 will pop out auto- console on vehicles without the ashtray ment
matically when the heating element is with cigarette lighter*.
A socket is fitted in the centre console in
red-hot. the rear on vehicles with the ashtray with
cigarette lighter*.
12V socket
The socket can be used for accessories
with a maximum power consumption of
180 watts.
Dashboard sockets*
The socket is installed in vehicles with an
audio system* or COMAND APS*.
1 Cover
2 Socket
E To open: Slide cover 1 forwards until 1 Socket
it engages. 2 Stowage compartment
E Lift up the cover of socket 2. E Pull out stowage compartment 2 us-
E To close: Press cover 1 briefly at the ing the handle edge.
front. E Lift up the cover of socket 1.
The cover moves back.
1 Socket
E Open the glove compartment
(e page 181).
E Lift up the cover of socket 1.
186
Controls
Features
Mobile phone* the person you are calling using the
i In order to ensure optimum signal quality hands-free system.
G Risk of accident for mobile phones and minimise mutual inter- ! Do not attempt to remove the mobile
ference between the vehicle electronics and phone and the telephone bracket together. You
Observe the legal requirements of the coun-
mobile phones, Mercedes-Benz recommends could otherwise damage the mobile phone
try in which you are currently driving regard-
the use of an approved exterior aerial. An exte- bracket.
ing operating mobile communications equip-
rior aerial conducts the electromagnetic fields
ment in a vehicle. E Remove the round cover on the back of
generated by a wireless device to the exterior
If it is permitted by law to operate communi- of the vehicle; the field strength within the ve- the mobile phone and keep it in a safe
cations equipment while the vehicle is in hicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that place.
motion, you must only do so when the traf- does not have an exterior aerial.
fic situation allows. You could otherwise dis-
tracted from the traffic conditions, cause an i There are various mobile phone brackets
accident and injure yourself and others. that may be fitted to your vehicle. You can ob-
tain these mobile phone brackets from a quali-
Two-way radios and fax equipment used
fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
without low-reflection exterior aerials can
Service Centre.
interfere with the vehicle's electronics and
thereby jeopardise the operating safety of The functions and services available when you
the vehicle and your safety. You must there- use the phone depend on your mobile phone
fore only use this equipment if it is correctly model and service provider.
connected to a separate reflection-free ex- The mobile phone bracket is in the arm-
terior aerial. rest. Example illustration
E Open the telephone compartment 1 To engage the mobile phone
G Risk of injury (e page 183). 2 Connector contact
3 Mobile phone bracket
Excessive electromagnetic radiation may al- Inserting the mobile phone into the mo-
so cause damage to your health and the E Slide the lower end of the mobile
bile phone bracket phone into connector contact 2 in
health of others. Using an exterior aerial
takes into account current scientific discus- If the mobile phone is inserted in the mo- mobile phone bracket 3. ee
sions relating to the possible health hazards bile phone bracket, you can only speak to
that may result from electromagnetic fields.
187
Controls
Features
E Push the top part of the mobile phone Removing the mobile phone from the Removing the existing mobile phone
in the direction of arrow 1 until it en- mobile phone bracket bracket
gages in mobile phone bracket 3.
The mobile phone is connected to the
hands-free system and to the luxury
multi-function steering wheel*.
The battery is charged depending on
the charge status and the position of
the key in the ignition lock. The charg-
ing process is shown in the mobile
phone display.
E For information on copying the mobile
phone's telephone book to the audio Example illustration Example illustration
system* or COMAND APS*, see the 1 To release the mobile phone 1 To release the mobile phone bracket
separate operating instructions for the 2 Mobile phone bracket 2 To remove the mobile phone bracket
audio system* or COMAND APS*. 3 Mobile phone bracket
E Press the release catch in the direction
You can make a call using the s and of arrow 1 and remove the mobile E Press the release button in the direc-
t buttons on the luxury multi-function phone upwards from mobile phone tion of arrow 1 and remove mobile
steering wheel*. You can control other bracket 2. phone bracket 3 in the direction of ar-
mobile phone functions via the on-board row 2.
computer (e page 133). Fitting a different mobile phone brack-
i When you take the key out of the ignition et
lock, the mobile phone stays on but you can no If you require a different mobile phone
longer use the hands-free system.
bracket for your mobile phone, remove the
If you are making a call and you would like to existing mobile phone bracket and then fit
take the key out of the ignition lock, first re- the new one.
move the mobile phone from the bracket. Oth-
erwise, the call will be terminated.
188
Controls
Features
Fitting a different mobile phone brack- Floormat* on the driver's side E Slide seat backwards.
et E To fit: place the floormat in position.
G Risk of accident
E Press retainer 1 onto stud 2.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance
around the pedals when floormats are used, E To remove: pull the floormat off studs
and that the floormats are properly secured. 2.
The floormats must be secured at all times E Remove the floormat.
using retainers and studs.
Before you drive off, make sure that the
floormats are secure and rectify if neces-
sary. A floormat which is not properly se-
cured can slip and thereby interfere with the
movement of the pedals.
Example illustration
Do not place floormats on top of one anoth-
1 Contact plate
er.
2 Recesses
3 Mobile phone bracket
E Insert mobile phone bracket 3 into re-
cesses 2 of contact plate 1.
E Slide mobile phone bracket 3 for-
wards until it engages.
1 Retainers
2 Stud
189
190
Operation
The first 1,500 km. . . . . . . . . . . 192
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . 195
Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Trailer towing*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
191
Operation
The first 1,500 km
The first 1,500 km
If you treat the engine with sufficient care
from the very start, it will reward you with
excellent performance for a very long peri-
od afterwards.
I You should therefore drive at varying
road and engine speeds for the first
1,500 km.
I Avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full
throttle, during this time. Do not ex-
ceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible
engine speed for each gear.
I Change gear in good time.
I Do not shift down a gear manually in
order to brake.
Vehicles with automatic transmission*:
I Try to avoid depressing the accelerator
pedal beyond the pressure point (kick-
down).
I Only use ranges 3, 2 or 1 for slow driv-
ing, e.g. in mountainous terrain.
After 1,500 km you may gradually bring
the vehicle up to full road and engine
speeds.
192
Operation
Refuelling
Refuelling The fuel filler flap is unlocked and locked E Insert the fuel filler cap into the re-
automatically by the key or KEYLESS GO* tainer on the inside of the fuel filler
when you open or close the vehicle. flap.
Refuelling
The fuel filler flap is to the rear on the E Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
G Risk of explosion right. switches off.
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames E Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it to
and smoking are therefore prohibited when the right.
handling fuels.
You will hear the fuel filler cap lock.
Switch off the engine before refuelling.
E Close the fuel filler flap.
i Vehicles with a diesel engine:
G Risk of injury
If you have run the tank completely dry, it will
Do not allow fuel to come into contact with be necessary to bleed the fuel system
skin or clothing. (e page 268).
Allowing fuels to come into direct contact
with your skin or inhaling fuel vapours is 1 Opens the fuel filler flap Petrol (EN 228)
damaging to your health. 2 Inserts the fuel filler cap ! Refuel using only unleaded premium grade
3 Tyre pressure table petrol with a minimum octane number of 95
4 Fuel type
G Risk of fire RON/85 MON conforming to European stand-
ard EN 228.
Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
E Push the fuel cap in the direction of ar- You could otherwise impair engine output or
diesel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol.
row 1 for a moment. damage the engine.
This would damage the fuel system and en-
gine and could result in a vehicle fire. You will find further information about petrol
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
under “Technical data” in the index.
E Open the fuel filler flap.
! Damage caused by adding petrol to diesel i You will generally find information about
is not covered by the warranty. E Turn the fuel filler cap to the left and the petrol grade on the filling pump. Otherwise, ee
remove it. ask the filling station attendant.
193
Operation
Refuelling
If the recommended fuel is not available and i You will generally find information about I Petrol
only as a temporary measure, you may also use the diesel grade on the filling pump. Otherwise, I Petroleum
regular unleaded petrol, 91 RON/82.5 MON. ask the filling station attendant.
This may reduce performance and increase pet- I Kerosene
! When refuelling vehicles with a diesel par-
rol consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle. ticle filter in countries outside the EU, only low- I Heating oil
In some countries, the available petrol quality sulphur Euro diesel with less than 0.005 per- Do not mix fuels such as these with diesel fuel.
may not be sufficient and could cause coking cent sulphur content by weight should be used. Do not use any special additives. For excep-
around the inlet valve. In these cases, and in In countries in which diesel with a higher sul- tions, see "Low outside temperatures, flow im-
consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service phur content is available (e.g. 0.035 percent by provers".
Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the addi- weight), the engine oil should be renewed at
The use of such non-approved fuels and/or fuel
tive sold and recommended by Mercedes-Benz more frequent intervals. More information
additives will result in a restriction of your war-
(part no. A000989254510). You must observe about intervals for changing the engine oil can
ranty entitlement.
the notes and mixing ratios given on the con- be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service
tainer. Centre. Do not start the engine if you accidentally refu-
elled with the wrong fuel. Otherwise you risk
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a Information about intervals for changing
engine damage. Have the fuel system emptied
petrol engine. Never mix petrol with diesel. the engine oil can be obtained from any completely.
Even small amounts of diesel result in damage Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
to the injection system. Damage caused by ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
adding diesel is not covered by the warranty.
i Commercially available diesel may contain diesel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol.
5 % bio-diesel. This proportion will not affect ve- Even small amounts of petrol result in damage
hicle performance or wear. to the injection system. Damage caused by
Diesel (EN 590)
! Using diesel fuel that does not comply with adding petrol is not covered by the warranty.
! Only use diesel that complies with the EN 590 requirements (or comparable stand-
EN 590 European standard. ards) can lead to increased wear, engine dam- Bio-diesel (VME fuels, oil methyl ester)
You could otherwise impair engine output or age and damage to the exhaust system. Do not and vegetable oil
damage the engine. use the following:
! Your vehicle is not suitable for use with
You will find further information about diesel I Marine diesel bio-diesel or vegetable oil. The use of bio-diesel
under "Technical data" in the index. I Bio-diesel or vegetable oil may lead to increased wear or
engine damage.
I Vegetable oil
194
Operation
Engine compartment
If you use bio-diesel/vegetable oil or mix diesel
with bio-diesel/vegetable oil, your warranty en- G Risk of fire Engine compartment
titlement will be restricted. Bio-diesel is some- Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
times referred to as fatty acid methyl ester diesel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol.
Bonnet
G
(FAME). This would damage the fuel system and en- Risk of accident
gine and could result in a vehicle fire.
Low outside temperatures Do not pull the release lever while the ve-
hicle is in motion. The bonnet could other-
The flow properties of diesel may be insuf-
Flow improver wise open.
ficient at low ambient temperatures.
The effectiveness of a flow improver is not
In order to prevent operating problems,
guaranteed with every fuel. Observe the in- Opening
diesel with improved cold flow qualities is
formation provided by the manufacturer
available during the winter months. Your
vehicle must be refuelled with this winter
when using a flow improver. Only use flow
improvers that have been tested and ap- G Risk of injury
diesel at temperatures of -5 °C or below. There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open,
proved by Mercedes-Benz. Information
You can use this winter diesel at tempera- about flow improvers that have been even if the engine is not running.
tures down to about -20 °C without prob- tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz Parts of the engine can become very hot.
lems. can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz To avoid burning yourself, only touch those
Mix a quantity of flow improver or kero- Service Centre. components described in the Operating In-
sene with summer diesel fuel or less cold- E Allow the engine to run for a while, so structions and observe the relevant safety
resistant winter diesel fuel according to that the additive can run through the notes.
the outside temperature. entire fuel system.
Mix the additive with the diesel in good G Risk of injury
time, before the flow properties of the die-
sel become insufficient. Malfunctions can The radiator fan is located between the radi-
only be rectified by heating the entire fuel ator and the engine block. It may start turn-
ing automatically even if there is no key in
system, e.g. by parking the vehicle in a
the ignition lock. Keep away from the area ee
heated garage.
of rotation of the fan blades. Otherwise, you
could be injured.
195
Operation
Engine compartment
Vehicles with a petrol engine: The bonnet release lever is located in the
The engine has an electronic ignition system driver's footwell above the parking brake.
which carries a high voltage. For this rea-
son, you must never touch the ignition sys-
tem components (ignition coil, ignition ca-
bles, spark plug connections, test socket)
while:
I the engine is running
I the engine is being started
I the ignition is switched on and the en-
gine is being cranked by hand 1 Bonnet catch handle
E Reach into the gap between the bonnet
E Make sure that the windscreen wipers 1 Bonnet release lever and the radiator grille.
are switched off.
E Pull release lever 1. E Push bonnet catch handle 1 upwards
G Risk of injury The bonnet is released. in the direction of the arrow and lift the
bonnet.
The windscreen wipers and wiper rods could ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
be set in motion. not folded away from the windscreen. You Closing
When the bonnet is open, you or others could otherwise damage the windscreen wipers
could be injured by the wiper rods. or the bonnet.
G Risk of injury
Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
switched off and that the key has been
as you close the bonnet.
pulled out of the ignition lock before open-
ing the bonnet.
E Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a
i Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system*: If height of approximately 20 cm.
you open the bonnet while the windscreen The bonnet must engage audibly.
wipers are switched on, they are turned off for
as long as the bonnet is open.
196
Operation
Engine compartment
E Check that the bonnet has engaged Checking the engine oil level
properly.
i If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not When checking the engine oil level, the ve-
properly engaged. Open it again and close it hicle must:
with a little more force. I be standing level
I have had the engine switched off for at
Engine oil least five minutes if the engine was at
Depending on how it is driven, the vehicle normal operating temperature
consumes a maximum of 0.8 l oil per I have had the engine switched off for at
1,000 km. The oil consumption may be least 30 minutes if the engine was not
higher than this when the vehicle is new at normal operating temperature Illustration: vehicle with a diesel engine
or if you frequently drive at high engine 1 Oil dipstick
speeds. 2 Maximum mark
You can only estimate the oil consumption 3 Minimum mark
after you have driven a considerable dis- E Pull oil dipstick 1 out of the oil dip-
tance. stick tube.
You will find further information about en- E Wide off oil dipstick 1.
gine oil in the "Technical data" section E Insert oil dipstick 1 slowly into the oil
(e page 330). dipstick guide tube to the stop.
! Lubricant additives may not be used since E Wait roughly five seconds and pull out
they lead to increased wear and damage to the oil dipstick 1 again.
mechanical assemblies. The use of fuel addi- Illustration: vehicle with a petrol engine
tives limits warranty claims. You can obtain fur- The oil level is correct if the level is be-
1 Oil dipstick
ther information from any Mercedes-Benz tween lower mark 3 and upper mark
2 Maximum mark
Service Centre. 2.
3 Minimum mark
E Top up the oil if necessary. ee
197
Operation
Engine compartment
i The difference in quantity between lower Oil level in the automatic transmis-
mark 3 and upper mark 2 is approximately 2 sion*
litres.
There is no need for you to check the oil
Topping up the engine oil level in the automatic transmission. In the
event of oil loss or problems with gear
shifts, have the automatic transmission
checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Coolant
Example illustration of a vehicle with a die-
sel engine G Risk of injury
1 Filler neck cap The cooling system is pressurised. There-
E Unscrew cap 1 on the filler neck and fore, only unscrew the cap once the engine
remove it. has cooled down. This means the coolant
Example illustration of a vehicle with a pet- temperature gauge must display less than
E Top up by the amount of oil required.
rol engine 70 °C. You could otherwise be scalded by
1 Filler neck cap ! Have excess oil siphoned off. There is a risk escaping hot coolant.
of damage to the engine or the catalytic con-
verter if there is excess oil in the engine.
Coolant consists of water and antifreeze/
E Screw cap 1 onto the filler neck. corrosion inhibitor.
When topping up the oil, take care not to
spill any. Oil must not be allowed to escape
into the soil or waterways. You would other-
wise be damaging the environment.
198
Operation
Engine compartment
marker bar 3 in the filler neck when Windscreen washer system/head-
cold or approximately 1.5 cm higher lamp cleaning system*
when hot.
The headlamp cleaning system* is also
E Replace cap 1 and tighten it until it supplied from the windscreen washer fluid
clicks into place. reservoir.
Refilling coolant:
E Switch off Thermatic or Thermotronic*
(e page 156), (e page 164).
E Slowly turn cap 1 by half a turn anti-
1 Cap clockwise to allow excess pressure to
2 Expansion tank escape.
3 Marker bar
E Turn cap 1 further anti-clockwise and
E Make sure that remove it.
I the vehicle is on a level surface E Top up the coolant to marker bar 3.
I the engine is switched off 1 Cap
E Replace cap 1 and tighten it until it
I the engine has cooled down. clicks into place. E Add windscreen washer concentrate to
the washer fluid all year round.
E Leave the engine running for approxi-
Checking the coolant level
mately five minutes. G Risk of fire
E Slowly turn cap 1 by half a turn anti- E Check the coolant level again and refill Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
clockwise to allow excess pressure to if necessary. flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking
escape. are prohibited when windscreen washer
E Replace cap 1 and tighten it until it
E Turn cap 1 further anti-clockwise and clicks into place. concentrate is being handled.
remove it. You will find further information about
coolant in the "Technical data" section ee
There is sufficient coolant in expansion Use:
tank 2 if the coolant is level with (e page 332).
199
Operation
Tyres and wheels
I a washer fluid additive, e.g. MB Sum- You will find further information about the Tyres and wheels
merwash, for temperatures above battery in the "Practical advice" section
freezing point, to prevent smearing (e page 301).
Points to remember
I a washer fluid additive, e.g. MB Winter-
wash, when there is a risk of frost to
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use tyres and wheels
prevent the washer fluid from freezing which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz
on the windscreen specifically for your vehicle. These tyres are
E Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a specially adapted for use with the control sys-
container beforehand. Adapt the mixing tems, such as ABS or ESP, and are marked as
ratio to the outside temperatures. follows:
! Only use windscreen washer fluid which is I MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable I MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
windscreen washer fluid could damage the (with run-flat characteristics)
plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps.
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended Tyres should
E To open: pull cap 1 upwards by the only be used on wheels that have been specifi-
tab. cally approved by Mercedes-Benz.
E To close: press cap 1 onto the filler If you use other tyres and wheels, Mercedes-
neck until it clicks into place. Benz cannot accept any responsibility for dam-
age that may result from this. Further informa-
Battery tion about tyres, wheels and approved combi-
nations can be obtained from any Mercedes-
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery. Benz Service Centre.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, it
If you use tyres other than those which have
is located either on the right side of the
been tested and recommended for Mercedes-
front bulkhead (direction of travel) under Benz, characteristics such as handling, noise
the air filter box or in the boot under the levels and fuel consumption could be adversely
flooring. affected. In addition, when driving with a load
or when using snow chains, dimensional varia-
200
Operation
Tyres and wheels
tions and different tyre deformation character- Notes on selecting, fitting and replac- Notes on regularly inspecting wheels
istics could cause the tyres to make contact ing tyres and tyres
with the bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damage to the tyres or the ve- I Only fit tyres and wheels of the same I Regularly check the wheels and tyres
hicle. type and make. of your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts,
! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor rec- I Only fit tyres of the correct size onto punctures, tears, bumps on tyres and
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous the wheels. deformation, cracks or severe corro-
damage cannot always be detected on re- sion on wheels), at least every 14 days,
I After fitting new tyres, run them in at as well as after off-road trips or after
treaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz can-
moderate speeds for the first 100 km travelling on rough roads. Damaged
not guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres
as they only reach their full perform- rims could cause a loss of tyre pres-
are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no
information about their previous usage.
ance after this distance. sure.
I Fit new tyres on the front wheels first if I Regularly check the tyre tread depth
G Risk of accident tyres of the same size are required on and the condition of the tread across
If wheels or tyres other than those which the front and rear wheels. the whole width of the tyre
have been tested are fitted: I Replace the tyres after six years at the (e page 202). If necessary, turn the
I the brakes or chassis components could latest, regardless of wear. This also ap- front wheels to full lock in order to in-
be damaged plies to the spare wheel. spect the inner side of the tyre surface.
I wheel and tyre clearances can no longer I Do not drive with tyres which have too I All wheels must have a valve cap to
be guaranteed little tread depth as this significantly re- protect the valve against dirt and mois-
This could cause an accident. duces the traction on wet roads (aqua- ture.
planing). I Regularly check the pressure of all
Modification work on the brake system ! Store tyres that are not being used in a tyres (including the spare tyre*), partic-
and wheels is not permitted, nor is the use cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the ularly prior to long trips, and correct
of spacer plates or brake dust shields. Any tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. the pressure as necessary
such modifications would invalidate the (e page 203).
vehicle's general operating permit.
201
Operation
Tyres and wheels
Notes on driving ! Do not clean your wheel rims with acidic warning system* and on wheels especially
wheel cleaner as this will cause the wheel bolts certified by Mercedes-Benz.
I While driving, pay attention to vibra- and, if the wheels are fitted at the time, the
tions, noises and unusual handling brakes and brake discs to rust. You can obtain
You will find notes on driving with a flat
characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. details about acid-free wheel cleaner as well as tyre in the “Practical advice” section
This may indicate that the wheels or further information on wheel care at your (e page 300).
tyres are damaged. If you suspect that Mercedes Benz Service Centre.
a tyre is defective, reduce your speed Tyre tread
and stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
ble to check the wheels and tyres for
Direction of rotation
G Risk of accident
damage. Hidden tyre damage could al- Tyres with a specified direction of rotation
Bear in mind that:
so be causing the unusual handling have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a
risk of aquaplaning. These benefits will I tyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roads
characteristics. If you find no signs of when the tread depth is less than 3 mm.
damage, have the wheels and tyres ex- only be available to you if the correct di- You should thus replace tyres that have
amined at a specialist workshop, for ex- rection of rotation is observed. insufficient tread depth.
ample at a Mercedes-Benz Service An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indi- I Winter tyres should be replaced when
Centre. cates its correct direction of rotation. the tread depth is 4 mm or less because
I When parking your vehicle, make sure i You may fit a spare tyre* against the direc- otherwise they no longer provide ad-
that the tyres do not come into contact tion of rotation. equate grip.
with the kerb or other obstacles. If it is I the tread on a tyre may not wear evenly.
necessary to drive over kerbs, speed MOExtended run-flat system* You should thus regularly check the
humps or potholes, try to do so slowly tread depth and the condition of the
and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise the The MOExtended run-flat system allows tread across the entire width of all tyres.
tyres, particularly the sidewalls, could you to continue driving the vehicle even If necessary, turn the steering wheel so
be damaged. when one or more tyres lose all air pres- that you can see the tyre tread more
sure. easily.
Notes on cleaning the wheels You can recognise MOExtended tyres by You could otherwise lose control of the ve-
I Do not use powerful cleaning devices, the lettering MOExtended on the tyre wall. hicle and cause an accident due to the re-
duced grip of the tyres on the road.
such as high-pressure cleaning equip- Only use the MOExtended run-flat system
ment, as this could damage the tyres. in connection with the tyre pressure loss
202
Operation
Tyres and wheels
Tyre pressures Tyre pressure changes by approximately i The tyre pressure values given for low
0.1 bar for every 10 °C change in ambient loads are minimum values which offer you good
G Risk of accident temperature. ride comfort characteristics.
Tyre pressure that is either too high or too If you measure the tyre pressure indoors You can, however, also use the values given for
low has a negative effect on the vehicle’s where the temperature differs from the higher loads. These are permissible and will not
active safety, which could lead to you caus- outside temperature, you will have to cor- adversely affect the running of the vehicle.
ing an accident. You should therefore regu- rect the measured value accordingly. However, ride comfort will be impaired to some
larly check the pressure of all your tyres (in- degree.
When the vehicle is driven, the tyre tem-
cluding the spare tyre*), particularly prior to Also check the tyre pressure of the spare
long trips, and correct the pressure as nec-
perature, and with it the tyre pressure, will
wheel*.
essary. increase depending on the road speed and
the load on the tyres. H Environmental note
To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pres- Therefore, you should only correct tyre Check tyre pressures regularly, at least
sure gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. every two weeks.
does not permit any reliable conclusion The pressure of warm tyres should only be
about the tyre pressure. corrected if it is too low for the current op-
Tyre pressure loss warning system
If the vehicle is to be heavily laden or driv- erating conditions. Warm tyres always
have higher pressures than cold tyres. While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre
en at high speeds, the tyre pressure must
pressure loss warning system monitors
be adapted according to the specifications You will find a table of tyre pressures for
the set tyre pressure using the rotational
given in the fuel filler flap (e page 193). various operating conditions on the inside
speed of the wheels. This enables the sys-
Use the highest specified tyre pressure for of your vehicle's fuel filler flap.
tem to detect significant pressure loss in a
the spare wheel. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel
G Risk of accident or too low: changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a
corresponding warning message will ap-
I shortens the service life of the tyres
If a tyre's pressure drops repeatedly: pear in the multi-function display.
I inspect the tyre for foreign objects I causes increased tyre damage
The function of the tyre pressure loss ee
I check whether the tyre is punctured or I has a negative effect on handling char- warning system is limited or delayed if:
the valve is leaking. acteristics and thus driving safety as
well (e.g. by causing aquaplaning).
203
Operation
Tyres and wheels
I snow chains are fitted to your vehicle's In the event of a sudden loss of pressure,
tyres bring the vehicle to a halt by braking care-
Configuring with the multi-function
I road conditions are wintry fully. Do not make any sudden steering
movements when doing this.
steering wheel
I you are driving on sand or gravel E Make sure that the key is in position 2
I you adopt a very sporty driving style in the ignition lock.
Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn-
(cornering at high speeds or driving E Press è to select Tyre pressure
with high rates of acceleration) ing system
menu: R from the menu.
I you are towing a very heavy or large Restart the tyre pressure loss warning sys- E Press the í button.
trailer tem if you have:
The following appears in the multi-func-
I you are driving with a heavy load (in I changed the tyre pressure tion display: RFI active Reactivate: R.
the vehicle or on the roof) I changed the wheels or tyres E Press the í button.
G Risk of accident I fitted new wheels or tyres The following appears in the multi-func-
The tyre pressure loss warning system does E Before restarting, consult the table of tion display: Tyre press. OK?
not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pres- tyre pressures on the inside of the fuel Yes+ Cancel-.
sure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler filler flap to ensure that the tyre pres- E Press the + button.
flap will help you decide whether the tyre sure in all four tyres is set correctly for
pressures should be corrected. the operating conditions concerned. Confirmation that the Run flat indi-
cator is activated: the following ap-
The tyre pressure loss warning system does E Also observe the notes in the section pears in the multi-function display: Run
not replace the need to regularly check your on tyre pressures (e page 203). Flat Indicator restarted.
vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss
of pressure on several tyres at the same G Risk of accident After a teach-in period, the tyre pres-
time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor
sure loss warning system. The tyre pressure loss warning system can the set tyre pressures of all four tyres.
only give reliable warnings if you have set
The tyre pressure loss warning system is the correct tyre pressure. or
not able to warn you of a sudden loss of
pressure, e.g. following penetration by a for- If an incorrect tyre pressure has been set, E To cancel activation: press - but-
eign object. this incorrect value will be used for monitor- ton.
ing purposes.
204
Operation
Tyres and wheels
The previous settings will not be After a teach-in period, the tyre pres- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
changed. sure loss warning system will monitor mends that you only use wheel bolts of the
the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. correct size which have been approved for
Configuring with the luxury multi-func- Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
tion steering wheel* or
E To cancel activation: press $ or
% to select Cancel. The wheels may be interchanged every
in the ignition lock. 5,000 km to 10,000 km depending on the
E Press ( or & to select the
E Press #. degree of tyre wear, provided that the ve-
Service menu. The previous settings will not be hicle has the same size front and rear
changed. tyres. Do not reverse the direction of tyre
E Press $ or % to select the Tyre
rotation.
pressure menu.
Interchanging the wheels The wear patterns on the front and rear
E Press #.
tyres differ depending on the operating
The following appears in the multi-func- G Risk of accident conditions. Interchange the wheels before
tion display: Run Flat Indicator active Interchange the front and rear wheels only if a clear wear pattern has formed on the
Restart with OK. they have the same dimensions, for exam- tyres. The front tyres typically wear more
E To confirm tyre pressure activation: ple size, offset, etc. on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the
press #. After every wheel interchange/change, have centre.
The following appears in the multi-func- the tightening torque checked at a qualified Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel
tion display: Tyre press. now OK?. specialist workshop that has the necessary and the brake disc thoroughly every time a
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre
E Press $ or % to select Yes. the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom- pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre
E Press #. mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz pressure loss warning system.
Service Centre for this purpose. In particu-
The following appears in the multi-func- lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-re-
tion display: Run Flat Indicator related systems must be carried out at a quali-
started. fied specialist workshop.
The wheels could work loose if they are not
tightened to a tightening torque of 130 Nm.
205
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
G Risk of accident ity will be impaired owing to unstable cor-
nering characteristics caused by the differ-
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a quali- You must replace winter tyres with a tread ent tyres. You should therefore adapt your
fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- depth of less than 4 mm immediately. They driving style and drive carefully.
Benz Service Centre, at the onset of win- are no longer suitable for winter use, in par- Have the spare wheel* replaced at the near-
ter. This service includes the following: ticular because they do not provide suffi- est qualified specialist workshop which has
I The engine oil will be changed, if the cient grip. This could cause you to lose con- the necessary specialist knowledge and
current oil has not been approved for trol of your vehicle and cause an accident. tools to carry out the work required.
winter use. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
I The antifreeze/anti-corrosion concen- Always observe the maximum permitted Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
speed specified for the winter tyres you pose. In particular, work relevant to safety
tration will be checked.
have fitted. If you fit winter tyres which or on safety-related systems must be car-
I Windscreen washer concentrate will be ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
have a lower maximum permitted speed
added to the windscreen and headlamp
than that of the vehicle, affix an appropri-
cleaning system* fluid.
ate warning sign in the driver's field of vi-
I The battery will be checked. sion. This can be obtained at a qualified Snow chains
I The tyres will be changed. specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
Benz Service Centre. mends that you only use snow chains
Winter tyres In such circumstances, you should also re- which have been approved for Mercedes-
strict the maximum speed of the vehicle to Benz vehicles.
Use winter tyres at temperatures below
the maximum permissible speed for winter ! The information about the use of snow-
+7 °C and on snow or ice-covered roads.
tyres using permanent Speedtronic*14 chain-compatible AMG winter tyres is applica-
Only then can the maximum effect of the
(e page 143). ble for AMG tyres. Use of snow chains is only
ABS and ESP® driving systems be ensured
permissible with these tyres.
in winter. G Risk of accident
If you intend to fit snow chains, please
Use winter tyres of the same make and If you fit the spare wheel* when driving with
tread on all wheels to maintain safe han- bear the following points in mind:
winter tyres, bear in mind that driving stabil-
dling characteristics.
14 Only available for certain countries.
206
Operation
Driving tips
I Snow chains cannot be fitted on all Drive particularly carefully on slippery Driving tips
wheel/tyre combinations. roads in winter. Avoid sudden accelera-
I Snow chains cannot be fitted on emer- tion, steering and braking manoeuvres.
Rolling with the engine switched off
gency spare wheels, e.g. on a If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel. be stopped when moving at low speed: G Risk of accident
I Fit snow chains on both rear wheels. I Vehicles with manual transmission: en- There is no power assistance for the steer-
Comply with the manufacturer's instal- gage neutral. ing and the service brake when the engine
lation instructions. is not running.
I Vehicles with automatic transmission*:
Do not exceed the maximum permissible shift the selector lever to N. Therefore, steering and braking require sig-
speed of 50 km/h. When you are back on nificantly more effort and you could lose
I Try to bring the vehicle under control control of the vehicle and cause an accident
snow-free roads, remove the snow chains using corrective steering. as a result.
as soon as possible.
Do not switch off the engine while the ve-
i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when hicle is in motion.
pulling away with snow chains fitted
(e page 69). This way you can allow the wheels
to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an in-
creased driving force (cutting action). Braking
Winter driving
G Risk of accident
Do not change down for additional engine
G Risk of accident braking on a slippery road surface. This
could cause the drive wheels to lose their
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface. This
could cause the drive wheels to lose their
G Risk of accident
Make sure that other road users are not en-
dangered by your braking.
207
Operation
Driving tips
Downhill gradients stant slight pedal pressure. This causes the Limited braking performance on salted
brake system to overheat, increases the roads
On long and steep downhill gradients, es- braking distance and can lead to the brakes
pecially if the vehicle is laden or towing a failing completely. Note that braking performance on salted
trailer, you must shift to a lower gear in road surfaces can be limited. The reason
good time or select shift range 1, 2 or 3 is that a layer of salt residue may form on
on vehicles with automatic transmission*. If you only use the brake moderately, you the brake discs and linings, resulting in a
should occasionally check its effective- significant reduction in the coefficient of
i This also applies if you have activated ness. To do this, brake more firmly from a
cruise control or Speedtronic*. friction between the brake disc and brake
higher speed. This improves the grip of the lining. This occurs particularly after ex-
This uses the braking effect of the engine brakes. tended periods of driving without using
and you will not have to brake to such an your brakes, e.g. on motorways, and also
extent to maintain the same speed. This Wet roads
when the vehicle has been parked for sev-
relieves the load on the brake system and eral hours.
If you have been driving in heavy rain for a
prevents the brakes from overheating and
long period without braking, the first time
wearing too quickly. If you need additional
you brake G Risk of accident
braking, depress the brake pedal repeat-
I the brakes may not react immediately The layer of salt on the brake discs and the
edly rather than continuously.
brake linings may cause a delay in the brak-
I you may have to depress the brake ing effect, resulting in a significantly longer
Heavy and light loads pedal more firmly braking distance, which could lead to an ac-
If the brakes have been subjected to a You must therefore maintain a greater dis- cident.
heavy load, do not stop the vehicle imme- tance from the vehicle in front. To avoid this danger, you should:
diately, but drive on for a short while. This I occasionally brake carefully when you
Brake firmly after driving on a wet road.
allows the airflow to cool the brakes more are driving on salted roads, so that any
This way the brake discs will become
quickly. layer of salt that may have started to
warm, drying more quickly, which will pro-
build up on the brake discs and the
G Risk of accident tect them against corrosion.
Never depress the brake pedal continuously
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never
208
Operation
Driving tips
brake linings is removed without putting Driving on flooded roads
other road users at risk.
If you have to drive on stretches of road
I maintain a greater distance to the ve- Tyre grip
on which water has collected, please bear
hicle ahead and drive with particular Whereas the vehicle can be fully controlled in mind that:
care. at a certain speed on dry roads, you must
I carefully apply the brakes at the end of a
I the maximum permitted still water
reduce your speed on wet or icy roads to
trip and immediately after commencing depth is 25 cm.
achieve the same road safety.
a new trip, so that salt residues are re- I you should drive no faster than at walk-
moved from the brake disc. Pay particular attention to the road condi-
ing pace.
tions at temperatures around freezing
point. ! Bear in mind that vehicles in front and on-
New brake linings coming vehicles create waves. This may mean
If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g. that the maximum permissible water depth is
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- from fog), a light film of water rapidly exceeded.
mends that you only use brake pads/lin- forms on the ice when you brake, and this
considerably reduces tyre grip. Drive with You must observe these notes, otherwise dam-
ings which have been specially approved
by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Brake particular care in such weather conditions. age may occur to the:
I Engine
pads/linings which have not been ap-
proved for Mercedes-Benz could affect Driving on wet roads I Electrical system
your vehicle's operating safety. If water has accumulated to a certain I Transmission
depth on the road surface, there is a dan-
G Risk of accident ger of aquaplaning occurring, even if:
New brake linings only reach their optimum I you drive at low speeds
braking effect after several hundred kilo-
metres of driving. Before this optimum brak- I the tyres have adequate tread depth
ing effect is reached, you should compen- For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts
sate for the reduced braking effect by apply- and brake carefully.
ing greater pressure when braking. This also
applies after the brake discs or the brake
linings have been replaced.
209
Operation
Driving abroad
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service net-
work is also available in other countries.
You can obtain the relevant workshop di-
rectories from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
Only low-octane fuel is available in certain
countries.
You can find further information about fuel
grades on (e page 193).
Symmetrical dipped beam

If your journey takes you to countries
where vehicles are driven on the opposite
side of the road to the country where the
vehicle is registered, your headlamps must
be switched to symmetrical dipped beam.
Oncoming traffic will be dazzled less.
E Have the headlamps switched over at a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
! Remember to switch your headlamps back
to asymmetrical dipped beam when you are
once again driving on the same side of the road
as in the country in which your vehicle is regis-
tered.
210
Operation
Trailer towing*
Trailer towing* E Pull out release wheel 2.
E Turn release wheel 2 anti-clockwise.
Folding out the ball coupling The ball coupling disengages and folds
Before you can tow a trailer with your ve- out from under the rear bumper. Indica-
hicle, you must fold out the ball coupling. tor lamp 1 flashes.
The release wheel is located in the boot
behind the trim on the left-hand side.
G Risk of accident
Make sure that the ball coupling is engaged, 1 Handle
either in its folded out or folded in position,
2 Cover
and that the indicator lamp is off.
Do not turn the release wheel when a trailer E To open: turn handle 1 in the oppo-
is coupled up. The trailer might otherwise site direction to the direction of travel.
become detached. E Fold cover 2 down.
E Press the ball coupling in the direction
of the arrow by hand until it engages in
a vertical position.
Indicator lamp 1 goes out. The power
socket folds away automatically.
Vehicles with a multi-function steer-
ing wheel (4 buttons): the message
Trailer hitch Check lock mech. ap-
pears in the multi–function display until
the ball coupling is engaged.
ee
1 Indicator lamp Vehicles with a luxury multi-func-
2 Release wheel for the trailer tow hitch tion steering wheel* (12 buttons):
211
Operation
Trailer towing*
the message Trailer hitch Check lock You will find the applicable permissible val- E Position the trailer level behind the ve-
mech. appears in the multi-function dis- ues which must not be exceeded in the vehicle.
play until the ball coupling is engaged. hicle documents. E Make sure that the ball of the ball cou-
E Make sure that the ball of the ball cou- You will find the values approved by the pling is clean and that, depending on
pling is clean and that, depending on manufacturer on the vehicle identification the trailer specification, it is greased or
the trailer specification, it is greased or plates and those for the towing vehicle in dry (without grease) when used.
dry (without grease) when used. the “Technical data” section.
E Couple up the trailer.
Notes on towing a trailer You will find installation dimensions and G Risk of accident
loads in the "Technical data" section
G Risk of accident (e page 326).
Do not uncouple a trailer with an overrun
brake when the brake is engaged. You could
When reversing the vehicle towards the The maximum permissible trailer drawbar otherwise trap your hand between the
trailer, make sure there is nobody between noseweight on the ball coupling is 75 kg. bumper and drawbar.
the trailer and the vehicle. However, the weight must not exceed the
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If figure given on the trailer tow hitch and
you do not couple the trailer to the towing trailer identification plates. The lowest Driving tips
vehicle correctly, the trailer could become weight applies. In Germany, the maximum permitted
detached. ! Use a noseweight as close as possible to speed for vehicle/trailer combinations is
Make sure that the following values are not the maximum permissible noseweight. Do not 80 km/h.
exceeded: use a noseweight of less than 50 kg, otherwise
I The permitted trailer drawbar nose- the trailer may come loose.
! A maximum speed of 80 km/h should not
be exceeded, even in countries where higher
weight Bear in mind that the payload and the rear axle speeds are permitted for vehicle/trailer combi-
I The permitted trailer load load are reduced by the actual noseweight. nations.
I The permitted rear axle load of the tow- i The height of the ball coupling changes When towing a trailer, your vehicle's han-
ing vehicle with the load of the vehicle. If necessary, you dling characteristics will be different from
I The maximum permissible gross vehicle should use a trailer with a height-adjustable those it presents when driven without a
weight of both the towing vehicle and drawbar. trailer.
the trailer
The vehicle/trailer combination:
212
Operation
Trailer towing*
I is heavier brake system to overheat, increases the
braking distance and can lead to the brakes G Risk of accident
I is restricted in its acceleration and gra-
dient climbing capability failing completely. On no account should you attempt to draw
the vehicle/trailer combination out by in-
I has an increased braking distance creasing speed.
I is affected more by strong crosswinds Driving tips
I demands more sensitive steering I Maintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front than when driving with- Folding in the ball coupling
I consumes more fuel. out a trailer. i Fold in the ball coupling when you are not
On long and steep downhill gradients, you I Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, using the trailer tow hitch.
must shift to a lower gear or, on vehicles brake gently at first to allow the trailer
with automatic transmission*, select shift to run on. Then increase the braking G Risk of injury
range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. force rapidly. Make sure that no persons or animals are in
i This also applies if you have activated I The values given for gradient-climbing the pivoting range of the ball coupling. Oth-
cruise control or Speedtronic*. erwise, they could be injured.
capabilities from a standstill refer to
This uses the braking effect of the engine sea level. When driving in mountainous
and you will not have to brake to such an areas, note that the power output of The release wheel is located in the boot
extent to maintain the same speed. This the engine and with it its gradient behind the trim on the left-hand side.
relieves the load on the brake system and climbing capability decrease with in-
prevents the brakes from overheating and creasing altitude.
wearing too quickly. If you need additional If the trailer swings from side to side:
braking, depress the brake pedal repeat-
edly rather than continuously. E Do not accelerate.
E Do not counter-steer.
G Risk of accident
E Brake if necessary.
Never depress the brake pedal continuously
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never ee
stant slight pedal pressure. This causes the
213
Operation
Trailer towing*
E Pull out release wheel 2. Trailer power supply
E Turn release wheel 2 anti-clockwise. When delivered from the factory, your ve-
The ball coupling disengages and folds hicle's trailer socket outlet is equipped
out from under the rear bumper. Indica- with a permanent power supply and a
tor lamp 1 flashes. power supply that is switched on via the
ignition lock.
The permanent power supply is supplied
via trailer socket pin 9.
The power supply that is switched on via
the ignition lock is supplied via trailer
1 Handle
socket pin 10.
2 Cover
! You can connect consumers with a power
E To open: turn handle 1 in the oppo- rating of up to 240 W to the permanent power
site direction to the direction of travel. supply and up to 180 W to the power supply
E Fold cover 2 down. that is switched on via the ignition lock.
E Press the ball coupling in the direction You must not charge a trailer battery using the
of the arrow by hand until it engages power supply.
behind the bumper. You may obtain further information about
Indicator lamp 1 goes out and the installing the trailer electrics from a quali-
message in the multi-function display fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-
disappears. Benz Service Centre.
E To switch the switched power sup-
ply on or off: turn the key in the igni-
tion lock to position 2 or 0, respec-
tively.
1 Indicator lamp
2 Release wheel for the trailer tow pitch
214
Operation
Service
Trailer with 7-pin connector E If you are using an adapter cable, se- Service
cure the cable to the trailer with cable
If your trailer has a 7-pin connector, you ties.
can connect it to the 13-pin socket on the Active Service System
ball coupling using an adapter or, if neces- ! Make sure that there is sufficient cable ASSYST PLUS, the Active Service System,
sary, an adapter cable. Both of these can play so that the cable cannot become detached
when cornering. tells you when the next service is due.
be obtained at a qualified specialist work-
shop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Approximately one month before the next
Centre. service is due, the service due date is dis-
played in days or kilometres, depending
Fitting the adapter on the distance travelled. One of the fol-
lowing messages will appear in the multi-
function display while you are driving or
while the ignition is switched on:
Service A due in .. days
Service A due in .. km
Service A due
1 Connector with lug

2 Socket with groove
E Open the socket cover.
Illustration shows vehicle with luxury mul-
E Insert the connector with lug 1 into ti-function steering wheel*
groove 2 on the socket and turn the
The letter indicates which service must be ee
connector clockwise to the stop.
carried out. A stands for a minor service
E Make the cover engage. and B for a major service. A number or an-
215
Operation
Service
other letter may be displayed after the let- Service A due E Press $ or % to highlight the
ter. This figure indicates any necessary ad- Service A overdue by ... days ASSYST PLUS submenu and select it with
ditional maintenance work to be per- #.
formed. If you report this displayed infor- Service A overdue by ... km
The service due date appears in the dis-
mation to a qualified specialist workshop, A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a play.
for example a Mercedes-Benz Service Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset
Centre, they can inform you of costs the the service indicator after the necessary
service will incur. service work has been carried out.
i If you fail to have the service performed by
i Periods when the battery is disconnected the specified date, your warranty and ex gratia
from electrical consumers are not recorded by claims, as well as Mobilo-Life services, may be
ASSYST PLUS. You yourself must therefore invalidated.
subtract these periods of disconnection from
Calling up the service due date
the days displayed in order to ensure that you
have the vehicle serviced at the correct time.
Hiding the service indicator tons)
E Multi-function steering wheel (4 but-
tons): press í.
E Select the ASSYST PLUS menu by
E Luxury multi-function steering
pressing è.
wheel (12 buttons): press L.
or Vehicles with luxury multi-function
E Press #. steering wheel (12 buttons)
Missing the service due date in the ignition lock.
If you have exceeded the service due date, E Press ( or & to select the
one of the following messages will appear Service menu.
in the multi-function display:
216
Operation
Care
Care I Fuel Vehicle care
I Tar stains ! Do not park the vehicle for a long period of
Notes on care time directly after cleaning, especially if the
The value of your vehicle will be retained
G Risk of poisoning wheels have just been cleaned with a wheel
Always follow the instructions for using the cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause rapid cor-
by regular and proper care. The best way
care products. rosion of the brake discs and brake pads/lin-
to protect your vehicle from harmful envi- ings. After cleaning, park the vehicle when it is
ronmental influences is to wash it and use Always keep care products tightly closed
and out of the reach of children. at normal operating temperature.
protective treatments regularly.
i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care Automatic car wash
products. These are designed specifically for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and represent the
H Environmental note You can clean the vehicle in an automatic
state of the art. Mercedes-Benz care products Dispose of empty packaging, cleaning cloths car wash from the very start, but prefera-
are available from any Mercedes-Benz Service and polishing wads in an environmentally-re- bly one without brushes.
Centre. sponsible manner. ! Do not use high pressure car wash sys-
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas af- ! Do not affix: tems. The strong water jet could damage
painted parts or attachments.
fected by corrosion and damage caused I unsuitable stickers
by neglect or inadequate care cannot al- If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it be-
ways be completely repaired. In such I films fore cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop I magnetic plates or similar ! Make sure that the windows are fully
immediately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service to painted surfaces, otherwise you could dam- closed, the ventilation/heating is switched off
Centre. age the paintwork. (level 0) and the windscreen wipers are set to
Repair damage caused by loose chippings 0. Otherwise the rain sensor could, for exam-
and remove the following immediately: ple, be activated and trigger the wipers unin-
tentionally. This could cause damage to the ve-
I Insect remains hicle.
I Bird droppings After using an automatic car wash, wipe ee
I Tree resin off wax from the windscreen and the wiper
blades. This will prevent smears and re-
I Oils and grease
217
Operation
Care
duce wiping noises caused by residue on components can be damaged by water that commercially-available glass cleaner. Avoid
the windscreen. seeps in. touching the inside of the rear windscreen and
the side windows with hard objects, e.g. ice
! Make sure that the automatic car wash is Have this work performed at a qualified special-
scrapers or rings. You could otherwise cause
suitable for the size of the vehicle. Fold in the ist workshop, e.g. your Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre. damage to the windows, rear window heating
exterior mirrors before the vehicle is washed.
or aerial on the rear window.
There is otherwise a risk of damage to the exte-
rior mirrors. Cleaning the wiper blades and the out- i Anti-glare film retrofitted to the insides of
side of the windscreen the windows could interfere with radio or mo-
High-pressure cleaners bile phone reception, especially if it is conduc-
! Do not use high-pressure cleaners with G Risk of injury tive or metal-coated film. Information about
anti-glare film can be obtained from any
round-spray jets to clean the tyres, as they Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
could damage them. Replace damaged tyres. lock before cleaning the windscreen or the
wiper blades. There is otherwise a risk of Cleaning the headlamps
E Observe the instructions issued by the
the windscreen wipers being set in motion
equipment manufacturer concerning and causing injury. E Clean the headlamp lenses with a wet
the distance to be maintained between sponge.
the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner
and the vehicle. However, make sure E Fold the wiper arms away from the ! Only use windscreen washer fluid which is
you always maintain a distance of 30 windscreen until you feel them engage. suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable
cm. windscreen washer fluid could damage the
E Clean the windscreen and the wiper
plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. There-
E Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle blades. fore, do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
around when cleaning your vehicle. E Fold the windscreen wipers back again solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
! When doing so, do not point directly at before the ignition is switched on. vents. You could otherwise scratch or damage
door joints, air spring bellows, electrical com- the surface of the lenses.
ponents, connectors or seals. Cleaning the windows
Cleaning the engine compartment

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents
! Do not clean the engine compartment with to clean the inside of the windows. Clean the
high-pressure cleaning equipment. Electronic insides of the windows with a damp cloth or
218
Operation
Care
Cleaning Parktronic* Plastic trim E Clean the plastic parts and the dash-
board.
The sensors are located in the front and ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and
rear bumpers. do not scrub. Doing so will scratch or damage E If particularly dirty, use a mild deter-
the surfaces. gent.
E Light soiling: wipe plastic parts down
with a damp, lint-free cloth (e.g. a mi-
G Risk of injury
crofibre cloth). Use a low-foaming Do not use cleaners and cockpit care sprays
grease solvent diluted in water as a containing solvents to clean the cockpit and
cleaning agent (e.g. washing-up liquid). steering wheel boss. Cleaners containing
solvents cause the surface to become po-
After cleaning, the surface may change rous and in the event of an airbag being trig-
shade temporarily. The normal shade will gered, plastic parts that have become loose
return after the surface dries. could cause considerable injuries.
E Heavy soiling: wipe plastic parts down
1 Parktronic sensors in the front bumper with a damp, lint-free cloth (e.g. a mi-
Cleaning the wooden trim*
crofibre cloth). Use a non-corrosive
E Clean the sensors in the bumper with
cleaning agent that does not contain E Moisten a clean lint-free cloth with
water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
solvents. Mercedes-Benz recommends water.
! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and that you use a Mercedes-Benz product
do not scrub. You will otherwise scratch or E Clean the wooden trim.
for this purpose.
damage the sensors. If you intend to use a E If particularly dirty, use a mild deter-
high-pressure cleaner or a steam cleaner to After cleaning, the surface may change
gent.
clean the sensors, observe the instructions is- shade temporarily. The normal shade will
sued by the equipment manufacturer concern- return after the surface dries. ! Do not use cleaning agents containing sol-
ing the distance to be maintained between the vents because these can damage the wooden
nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner and the ve- Cleaning the steering wheel boss and trim.
hicle. dashboard
E Moisten a clean lint-free cloth with
water.
219
220
Practical advice
Where will I find...? . . . . . . . . . . 222
Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Locking/unlocking in an emer-
gency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO
head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Changing the batteries . . . . . . . 283
Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 284
Replacing the wiper blades . . . 290
Flat tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Jump-starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Towing and tow-starting. . . . . . 305
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
221
Practical advice
Where will I find...?
Where will I find...? Setting up the warning triangle
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is secured on the in-
side of the boot lid.
1 Rotary catch
2 Cover
1 Press stud
2 Side reflectors E To open: turn handle 1 toward the
3 Feet rear of the vehicle.
E Fold feet 3 down and out to the side. E Fold down cover 2.
1 Warning triangle E Pull side reflectors 2 upwards to form
E Turn catch in the direction of the arrow a triangle and lock them at the top us- Fire extinguisher*
and remove warning triangle 1. ing press-stud 1. i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after
each use and checked every one or two years.
First-aid kit Otherwise, it may fail in an emergency.
i Check the expiry dates of the first-aid kit Observe the legal requirements in all countries
contents annually, and replace them if neces- concerned.
sary.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
first-aid kit is located either in the boot in
the open storage compartment or behind
the cover on the left side.
222
Practical advice
Where will I find...?
The fire extinguisher is located underneath I a towing eye Vehicles with TIREFIT kit
the front of the driver's seat. I a wheel wrench
I a folding wheel chock
I a pair of gloves
G Risk of injury
If your vehicle has been raised and is being
held only by the jack and you are working
next to or underneath the vehicle, there is a
risk of the jack tipping over and the vehicle
slipping off. The vehicle sliding off the jack
could cause serious injuries. 1 TIREFIT kit
1 Tab For safety reasons, place the vehicle on 2 Electric air pump
2 Fire extinguisher stands if you intend to work under it or if 3 Towing eye
E Pull tab 1 upwards. you intend to keep it raised for a long period 4 Folding wheel chock
of time. The jack is designed only to raise 5 Jack
E Remove fire extinguisher 2. the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is
being changed. Removing the jack
Vehicle tool kit, TIREFIT, jack, spare E Open Velcro fastener.
tyre* and "Minispare"/collapsible
emergency spare wheel* G Risk of injury E Remove jack 6.
The vehicle tool kit, TIREFIT, etc. are lo- Only use the jack on solid and level ground.
cated in the stowage well underneath the Secure the vehicle's wheels with chocks so
boot floor. that it cannot move or slip off the jack. Oth-
erwise, you could be injured.
E Open the stowage well under the boot
floor (e page 181).
i When using the jack, you should also ob-
The vehicle tool kit contains: serve the safety notes in the "Flat tyre" section
(e page 291).
223
Practical advice
Display messages
Vehicles with a spare wheel Setting up the folding wheel chock Display messages
The folding wheel chock serves as an addi-
tional measure for securing the vehicle, Notes
e.g. when a wheel is being changed. The on-board computer shows warnings or
malfunctions in the multi-function display.
Certain messages are accompanied by an
audible warning signal or a continuous
tone.
High-priority messages are highlighted in
red in the multi-function display. These
messages are printed in red in the follow-
1 Vehicle tool kit tray ing tables.
2 Stowage well
3 Spare wheel Please respond in accordance with the
messages and follow the additional notes
Removing the spare wheel in this Owner's Manual.
E Remove vehicle tool kit tray 1. 1 Folds the plates upwards Vehicles with multi-function steering
E Turn stowage well 2 anti-clockwise 2 Folds out the lower plate wheel (4-button)
and remove it. 3 Slots in the plate
Use the í button on the multi-function
E Remove spare wheel 3. E Fold both plates upwards 1. steering wheel to acknowledge low-priority
E Fold out lower plate 2. messages. They are then stored in the
E Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully message memory. The highest-priority
into the openings in base plate 3. messages cannot be acknowledged and
are automatically stored in the message
memory.
For some messages, the _ symbol ap-
pears in the multi-function display. Look
224
Practical advice
Display messages
these messages up in the "Display mes- and use the $ or % button to scroll relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
sages" section of the Owner's Manual through the messages. tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
(e page 225). This contains more detailed cialist workshop.
information. All vehicles
i If you turn the key to position 2 in the igni-
Select the "Display messages" menu in
the on-board computer (e page 124), and G Risk of accident
tion lock or press the KEYLESS GO* button
use the í button to scroll through the No messages can be displayed if there is a twice, all the warning/indicator lamps (except
messages. malfunction in the instrument cluster and/ the main-beam headlamp and the turn signal
or the multi-function display. indicator lamps) and the multi-function display
Vehicles with luxury multi-function This means that you will not see information are activated. Please check that they are work-
steering wheel* (12-button) about the driving situation, such as the ing properly before driving off.
speed, outside temperature, warning/indi- The following tables contain all the display
Use the L or # button on the luxury cator lamps, malfunction/warning mes-
multi-function steering wheel to acknowl- messages. To make it easier for you to
sages or system failures. The handling char- find the relevant message, the messages
edge low-priority messages. They are then acteristics may be affected.
stored in the message memory. The high- are divided into text messages
Immediately consult a qualified specialist (e page 225) in alphabetical order and
est-priority messages cannot be acknowl- workshop which has the necessary special-
edged and are automatically stored in the symbol messages (e page 237).
ist knowledge and tools to carry out the
message memory. work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends
Go to the Service menu in the on-board that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
computer, select Messages (e page 135) Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
225
Practical advice
Display messages
Text messages

Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
the work required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. There is a risk of an acci-
dent and injury if this work is carried out incorrectly.
Vehicles with multi-function steering wheel (4-button)
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

ABS and ESP inoperative GRisk of accident E Drive a short distance with gentle corners
ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE–SAFE®*, hill start at a speed above 20 km/h.
assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are The message goes out when ABS, ESP®,
temporarily unavailable. It is possible BAS, PRE–SAFE®*, hill start assist and
that the self diagnosis is not yet com- ESP® trailer stabilisation are available
plete. The v warning lamp also lights again.
up in the instrument cluster. The brake
system is functioning normally.
226
Practical advice
Display messages
ABS and ESP inoperative GRisk of accident E Drive on carefully.
ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE–SAFE®*, hill start E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation
have been deactivated due to undervolt-
age. The v warning lamp also lights
up in the instrument cluster.
The brake system is still available with
complete brake boosting effect.
ABS and ESP inoperative GRisk of accident E Drive on carefully.
® ®
ABS, ESP , BAS, PRE–SAFE *, hill start E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation
have been deactivated due to a mal-
function. The v warning lamp also
lights up in the instrument cluster.
Trailer hitch Check lock mech. The trailer tow hitch* is not correctly E Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
engaged. conditions as you do so.
E Allow the ball coupling to engage in the end
position.
ee
227
Practical advice
Display messages
Check brake fluid level GRisk of accident E Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.
There is insufficient brake fluid in the E Do not continue driving under any circum-
brake fluid reservoir. stances.
E Consult the nearest qualified specialist
workshop.
E Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not
rectify the malfunction.
EBV, ABS, ESP inoperative GRisk of accident E Drive on carefully.
® ®
EBV, ABS, ESP , BAS, PRE–SAFE *, hill E Visit a qualified specialist workshop imme-
start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisa- diately.
tion have been deactivated due to a
malfunction. The v warning lamp al-
so lights up in the instrument cluster.
The brake system is functioning nor-
mally.
ESP inoperative GRisk of accident E Drive on carefully.
® ®
ESP , BAS, PRE–SAFE *, hill start as- E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
sist and ESP® trailer stabilisation have
been deactivated due to a malfunction.
The v warning lamp also lights up in
the instrument cluster.
228
Practical advice
Display messages
ESP inoperative GRisk of accident E Drive a short distance with gentle corners
ESP®, BAS, PRE–SAFE®*, hill start as- at a speed above 20 km/h.
sist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are The message goes out when ESP®, ABS,
ESP inoperative ESP®, BAS, PRE–SAFE®*, hill start as- E Drive on carefully.
sist and ESP® trailer stabilisation have E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
been deactivated due to undervoltage.
It is possible that the battery is not
being charged. The v warning lamp
also lights up in the instrument cluster.
mally.
ESP inoperative If this message appears and the v ETS switches on again as soon as the brakes
warning lamp flashes at the same time, have cooled down. The display message disap-
this means that ETS has been deacti- pears and the v warning lamp goes out.
vated to prevent the brakes on the drive
wheels from overheating.
P Shift to P You have switched off the engine using E Move the selector lever to P.
the KEYLESS GO button* and opened The engine can be started again.
the driver's door. ee
You have attempted to lock the vehicle.
229
Practical advice
Display messages
To start engine, shift to either P or N You have attempted to start the engine E Move the selector lever to P or N.
while the selector lever is not in position
P or N.
Clean the fuel filter E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Top up coolant The coolant level is too low. E Top up the coolant, observing the warning
notes (e page 198).
E Have the coolant system checked at a
qualified specialist workshop if the coolant
needs topping up more often than usual.
Intell. Light inoperative The Intelligent Light System* is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
System The lights remain available without Intel-
ligent Light System*.
Switch off lights remove key Automatic headlamp mode is switched E Turn the light switch to M.
or on and you forgot to switch off the or
lights before leaving the vehicle.
230
Practical advice
Display messages
Check tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system E Stop the vehicle without making any sud-
has detected a significant pressure loss. den steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay
attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
E Check the tyres.
E Check the tyre pressure and correct it if
necessary (e page 203).
E Repair or change the faulty wheel as neces-
sary (e page 291).
E Then restart the tyre pressure loss warning
system once the tyre pressure is correct
(e page 203).
Run Flat Indica- inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system E Have the tyre pressure loss warning system
tor is deactivated due to a malfunction. checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Check tyres Restart system There was a tyre pressure warning mes- E Make sure that the pressure is correct for
sage. all tyres.
system (e page 203).
ee
231
Practical advice
Display messages
Key not detected The KEYLESS GO key* was not detected E Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
while the engine was running, because conditions as you do so.
it is not in the vehicle or it is suffering E Locate the KEYLESS GO key* or operate
from interference from a strong source the vehicle using the key in the ignition
of radio waves. lock.
Otherwise, it will no longer be possible to
centrally lock the vehicle or start the engine
if the engine is switched off.
Key not detected The KEYLESS GO key* cannot be de- E Alter the position of the KEYLESS GO key*
tected. in the vehicle.
E Operate the vehicle using the key in the
ignition lock if necessary.
Key does not belong to vehicle You have put the wrong key in the igni- E Use the correct key.
tion lock.
Close doors to lock veh. Not all doors were closed as you at- E Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
tempted to lock the vehicle.
Rear left seat backrest not engaged The rear left seat backrest is not en- E Fully engage the rear seat backrest
gaged. (e page 179).
Rear right seat backrest not engaged The rear right seat backrest is not en- E Fully engage the rear seat backrest
gaged. (e page 179).
PRE-SAFE inoperative Important PRE-SAFE®* functions have E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
failed. All other occupant safety sys-
tems, e.g. airbags, remain available.
232
Practical advice
Display messages
Child seat posi- Vehicles with automatic child seat rec- E Position the child seat correctly.
tion ognition in the front-passenger seat*:
the child seat is not positioned cor-
rectly.
Child seat posi- Vehicles with automatic child seat rec- E Have the sensor checked at a qualified spe-
tion ognition in the front-passenger seat*: cialist workshop.
the child seat recognition sensor is
faulty.
Left windowbag malfunction:wkshp The left windowbag is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Right windowbag malfunction:wkshp The right windowbag is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise ctrl. / LIM inoperative Cruise control and Speedtronic* are not E Have Speedtronic* and cruise control
operational. checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise control --- A condition for activating cruise control E If conditions permit, drive faster than
has not been met. You have tried to 30 km/h and store the speed.
store a speed below 30 km/h, for exam- E Check the conditions for activating cruise
ple. control:
I ESP® must be activated.
I The parking brake must be released.
I In vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion* the selector lever must be on D.
233
Practical advice
Display messages
Vehicles with luxury multi-function steering wheel* (12-button)

ESP inoperative See Own- GRisk of accident E Drive on carefully.
er's Manual ® ®
ESP , BAS, PRE–SAFE *, hill start as- E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
sist and ESP® trailer stabilisation have
been deactivated due to a malfunction.
the instrument cluster.
ESP currently unavail- GRisk of accident E Drive a short distance with gentle corners
able See Owner's Man- ESP®, BAS, PRE–SAFE®*, hill start as- at a speed above 20 km/h.
ual sist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are The message goes out when ESP®, ABS,
temporarily unavailable. The v warn- BAS, PRE–SAFE®*, hill start assist and
ing lamp also lights up in the instrument ESP® trailer stabilisation are available
cluster. It is possible that the self diag- again.
nosis is not yet complete. The brake
ESP currently unavail. ESP®, BAS, PRE–SAFE®*, hill start as- E Drive on carefully.
See Owner's Manual sist and ESP® trailer stabilisation have E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
been deactivated due to undervoltage.
the instrument cluster. It is possible
that the battery is not being charged.
mally.
234
Practical advice
Display messages
ESP currently unavail. If this message appears and the v ETS switches on again as soon as the brakes
See Owner's Manual warning lamp flashes at the same time, have cooled down. The display message disap-
this means that ETS has been deacti- pears and the v warning lamp goes out.
vated to prevent the brakes on the drive
wheels from overheating.
P Shift to P You have switched off the engine using E Move the selector lever to P.
the KEYLESS GO button* and opened The engine can be started again.
the driver's door.
You have attempted to lock the vehicle.
To start engine, shift to either P or N You have attempted to start the engine E Move the selector lever to P or N.
while the selector lever is not in position
P or N.
Tyre pressure Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure loss warning system E Stop the vehicle without making any sud-
has detected a significant pressure loss. den steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay
attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
E Check the tyres.
E Check the tyre pressure and correct it if
necessary (e page 203).
E Repair or change the faulty wheel as neces-
sary (e page 291).
system once the tyre pressure is correct ee
(e page 203).
235
Practical advice
Display messages
Run Flat Indica- inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system E Have the tyre pressure loss warning system
tor is deactivated due to a malfunction. checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Run Flat Indica- Check tyre pressures There was a tyre pressure warning mes- E Make sure that the pressure is correct for
tor then restart sage. all tyres.
system (e page 203).
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Own- Important PRE-SAFE®* functions have E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
er's Manual failed. All other occupant safety sys-
tems, e.g. airbags, remain available.
Child seat in wrong position See Vehicles with automatic child seat rec- E Have the sensor checked at a qualified spe-
Owner's Manual ognition in the front-passenger seat*: cialist workshop.
the child seat recognition sensor is
faulty.
Cruise control inoperative Cruise control and Speedtronic* are not E Have Speedtronic* and cruise control
and Speedtronic operational. checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise control --- A condition for activating cruise control E If conditions permit, drive faster than
has not been met. You have tried to 30 km/h and store the speed.
store a speed below 30 km/h, for exam- E Check the conditions for activating cruise
ple. control:
I ESP® must be activated.
I The parking brake must be released.
I In vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion* the selector lever must be on D.
236
Practical advice
Display messages
Symbol messages

the work required.
Vehicles with multi-function steering wheel (4-button)
Ê The boot lid is open. E Close the boot lid.
Y GRisk of accident E Stop immediately and safely when traffic

Vehicles with an anti-theft alarm sys- conditions allow.
tem*: you are driving with the bonnet E Close the bonnet.
open.
V At least one door is open. The display

symbol shows you which doors are
E Close the doors.
open.
ee
237
Practical advice
Display messages
# The battery is not being charged. Possi-

ble causes:
E Stop immediately and safely when traffic
conditions allow and check the poly-V-belt.
I Faulty alternator E If it has torn: do not drive on. Contact the
I Torn poly-V-belt nearest qualified specialist workshop.
I Malfunction in the electronic system E If it is not damaged: have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
2 Check brake wear The brake pads/linings have reached

their wear limit.
E Have the brake pads/linings replaced as
soon as possible at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Î Release parking brake You are driving with the parking brake
on.
E Release the parking brake.
E
D Stop vehicle Engine
off
The coolant is too hot. Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
conditions as you do so.
E Switch off the engine.
E Wait until the message disappears before
restarting the engine. There is otherwise a
risk of engine damage.
E Observe the coolant temperature gauge.
E If the temperature increases again, visit a
qualified specialist workshop immediately.
238
Practical advice
Display messages
E
D Stop vehicle Engine
off
The poly-V-belt may have torn. Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
E Check the poly-V-belt.
E If it is not damaged: do not start the en-
gine again until the message goes out.
There is otherwise a risk of engine damage.
E If it has torn: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
E
D The cooling fan for the coolant is faulty. If the coolant temperature is less than
120 † you can continue driving to the
E In doing so, avoid heavy loads on the en-
gine (e.g. driving in mountainous terrain)
and stop-and-go driving.
. Left-hand cornering
light
The left-hand cornering light* is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
. Right corner. light The right-hand cornering light* is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
. Dipped beam, left The left dipped-beam headlamp is

faulty.
E Halogen headlamps: replace the bulb as
soon as possible (e page 284).
E Bi-xenon headlamps*: visit a qualified ee
specialist workshop as soon as possible.
239
Practical advice
Display messages
. Right-hand dipped
beam
The right dipped-beam headlamp is
faulty.
E Bi-xenon headlamps*: visit a qualified
. Left-hand trailer
turn signal
The left-hand trailer turn signal is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
. Trailer rt. turn sig. The right-hand trailer turn signal is

faulty.
E Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
. Trailer brake lamp The trailer brake lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
. Trailer left tail

lamp
The left-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
. Trailer right tail

lamp
The right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
. AUTO lights inopera-

tive
The light sensor is faulty. Daytime driv-
ing lights are switched on.
E Use the light switch to switch the lighting
on/off (e page 97).
. Rear left turn signal The rear left turn signal is faulty. For ve- E Vehicles without LEDs: replace the bulb as
hicles with LEDs, this message only ap- soon as possible (e page 284).
pears when all LEDs have failed. Vehicles with LEDs: visit a qualified special-
ist workshop as soon as possible.
240
Practical advice
Display messages
. Rear right turn sig-

nal
The rear right turn signal is faulty. For
vehicles with LEDs, this message only
E Vehicles without LEDs: replace the bulb as
soon as possible (e page 284)
appears when all LEDs have failed. Vehicles with LEDs: visit a qualified special-
. Left mirror turn sig- The turn signal in the left-hand exterior
nal mirror is faulty. This message will only
E Visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
appear if all LEDs have failed.
. Right mirror turn

signal
The turn signal in the right-hand exterior
mirror is faulty. This message will only
soon as possible.
. Front left-hand turn

signal
The front left turn signal is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Front right turn sig- The front right turn signal is faulty.
nal
E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Third brake lamp The third brake lamp is faulty. This mes-
sage will only appear if all LEDs have
soon as possible.
failed.
. Tail/brake lamp, left The left-hand tail/brake lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Tail/brake lamp,
right
The right-hand tail/brake lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Left-hand brake lamp The left brake lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
ee
241
Practical advice
Display messages
. Right-hand brake lamp The right brake lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Main beam, left The left main-beam headlamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Right main beam The right main-beam headlamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Left-hand licence
plate lamp
The left licence plate lamp is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
. Right licence plate

lamp
The right licence plate lamp is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
. Front left-hand fog-

lamp
The left front foglamp is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
. Right foglamp The right front foglamp is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
. Rear left foglamp The left rear foglamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Rear right foglamp The right rear foglamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Front left-hand park- The front left parking lamp is faulty.

ing lamp
(e page 284).
. Front right parking

lamp
The front right parking lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
242
Practical advice
Display messages
. Left-hand reversing
lamp
The left reversing lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Right revers.lamp The right reversing lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Left-hand tail lamp The left tail lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Right-hand tail lamp The right tail lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Switch off lights You've forgotten to switch off the lights

when leaving the vehicle.
E Turn the light switch to M.
. Left daytime driving

lamp
The left daytime driving light is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
. Right dayt. driving

lamp
The right daytime driving light is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
ò Replace air cleaner The engine air filter must be replaced. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
N Check eng. oil level There is insufficient oil in the engine.

There is a danger of engine damage.
E Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
E Top up the engine oil and check the level
(e page 197).
ee
E
I Change battery The KEYLESS GO key* batteries are dis-
charged.
Change the batteries (e page 283).
243
Practical advice
Display messages
E
I Key still in vehicle The KEYLESS GO key* was detected in
the vehicle when you attempted to lock
Remove the KEYLESS GO key* from the ve-
hicle.
the vehicle.
E
I Replace key The key no longer functions. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
E
I Insert key KEYLESS GO* has malfunctioned or is
faulty.
Pull out the KEYLESS GO* button from the
ignition lock.
E Start your vehicle using the KEYLESS GO*
key in the ignition lock.
= Malfunction -Work-
shop-
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem) is faulty.
E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
= FL malfunc. -Work-
shop-
The front left SRS (Supplemental Re-
straint System) is faulty.
= FR malfunc. -Work-
shop-
The front right SRS (Supplemental Re-
= RL malfunc. -Work-
shop-
The rear left SRS (Supplemental Re-
= RR malfunc. -Work-
shop-
The rear right SRS (Supplemental Re-
= R.cent.malf. -Work-
shop-
The rear centre SRS (Supplemental Re-
244
Practical advice
Display messages
W Reserve fuel level The level of fuel has fallen below the re-
serve range.
E Refuel at the nearest filling station.
W Top up washer fluid The washer fluid level in the washer

fluid reservoir has dropped below the
E Top up the washer fluid (e page 199).
minimum.
Vehicles with luxury multi-function steering wheel* (12-button)
Ê The boot lid is open. E Close the boot lid.
Y GRisk of accident E Stop immediately and safely when traffic

Vehicles with an anti-theft alarm sys- conditions allow.
tem*: you are driving with the bonnet E Close the bonnet.
open.
V At least one door is open. The display

symbol shows you which doors are
E Close the doors.
open.
ee
245
Practical advice
Display messages
- ABS and ESP inopera- GRisk of accident E Drive on carefully.

tive See Owner's Man- ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE–SAFE®*, hill start E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ual assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation
have been deactivated due to a mal-
function. The v warning lamp also
lights up in the instrument cluster.
- ABS and ESP currently GRisk of accident E Drive on carefully.

unavailable See Own- ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE–SAFE®*, hill start E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
er's Manual assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation
have been deactivated due to undervolt-
age. The v warning lamp also lights
up in the instrument cluster.
- ABS and ESP currently GRisk of accident E Drive a short distance with gentle corners
unavail. See Owner's ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE–SAFE®*, hill start at a speed above 20 km/h.
Manual ®
assist and ESP trailer stabilisation are The message goes out when ABS, ESP®,
246
Practical advice
Display messages
\ Trailer tow hitch

Check locking mech.
The trailer tow hitch* is not correctly
engaged.
E Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
E Allow the ball coupling to engage in the end
position.
# The battery is not being charged. Possi-

ble causes:
E Stop immediately and safely when traffic
conditions allow and check the poly-V-belt.
I Faulty alternator E If it has torn: do not drive on. Contact the
I Torn poly-V-belt nearest qualified specialist workshop.
I Malfunction in the electronic system E If it is not damaged: have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
2 Brake wear The brake pads/linings have reached

their wear limit.
E Have the brake pads/linings replaced as
soon as possible at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Check brake fluid le- GRisk of accident
3 vel
E Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.
There is insufficient brake fluid in the E Do not continue driving under any circum-
brake fluid reservoir. stances.
E Consult the nearest qualified specialist
workshop.
E Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not
rectify the malfunction.
3 Release parking brake You are driving with the parking brake
on.
E Release the parking brake. ee
247
Practical advice
Display messages
3 EBV, ABS, ESP inop- GRisk of accident E Drive on carefully.

erative See Owner's EBV, ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE–SAFE®*, hill E Visit a qualified specialist workshop imme-
Manual start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisa- diately.
tion have been deactivated due to a
malfunction. The v warning lamp al-
so lights up in the instrument cluster.
ñ Clean the fuel filter E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
E
D Coolant Stop vehicle
Switch engine off
The coolant is too hot. Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
E Wait until the message disappears before
restarting the engine. There is otherwise a
risk of engine damage.
E Observe the coolant temperature gauge.
E If the temperature increases again, visit a
qualified specialist workshop immediately.
248
Practical advice
Display messages
E
D Coolant Stop vehicle
Switch engine off
The poly-V-belt may have torn. Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
E Check the poly-V-belt.
E If it is undamaged: do not start the engine
again until the message disappears. There
is otherwise a risk of engine damage.
E If it has torn: do not drive on. Contact the
E
D The cooling fan for the coolant is faulty. If the coolant temperature is less than
120 † you can continue driving to the
E In doing so, avoid heavy loads on the en-
gine (e.g. driving in mountainous terrain)
and stop-and-go driving.
H Top up coolant See

Owner's Manual
The coolant level is too low. E Top up the coolant, observing the warning
notes (e page 198).
E Have the coolant system checked at a
qualified specialist workshop if the coolant
needs topping up more often than usual.
. Left-hand cornering
light
The left-hand cornering light* is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ee
. Right corner. light The right-hand cornering light* is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
249
Practical advice
Display messages
. Dipped beam, left The left dipped-beam headlamp is

faulty.
. Right-hand dipped
beam
The right dipped-beam headlamp is
faulty.
. Left-hand trailer
turn signal
The left-hand trailer turn signal is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
. Trailer right turn

signal
The right-hand trailer turn signal is
faulty.
E Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
. Trailer brake lamp The trailer brake lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
. Trailer left-hand
tail lamp
The left-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
. Trailer rt. tail lamp The right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
. AUTO lights inopera-

tive
The light sensor is faulty. Daytime driv-
ing lights are switched on.
E Use the light switch to switch the lighting
on/off (e page 97).
. Rear left-hand turn

signal
The rear left turn signal is faulty. For ve-
hicles with LEDs, this message only ap-
pears when all LEDs have failed. Vehicles with LEDs: visit a qualified special-
250
Practical advice
Display messages
. Rear right turn sig-

nal
The rear right turn signal is faulty. For
vehicles with LEDs, this message only
appears when all LEDs have failed. Vehicles with LEDs: visit a qualified special-
. Turn signal in left-

hand mirror
The turn signal in the left-hand exterior
soon as possible.
. Right mirror turn

signal
The turn signal in the right-hand exterior
soon as possible.
. Front left-hand turn

signal
The front left turn signal is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Front right turn sig- The front right turn signal is faulty.
nal
(e page 284).
. Third brake lamp The third brake lamp is faulty. This mes-
sage will only appear if all LEDs have
soon as possible.
failed.
. Left-hand tail lamp/

brake lamp
The left rear brake lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Right-hand tail lamp/ The right brake lamp is faulty.

brake lamp
(e page 284).
. Left-hand brake lamp The left brake lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
ee
251
Practical advice
Display messages
. Right-hand brake lamp The right brake lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Main beam, left The left main-beam headlamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Right main beam The right main-beam headlamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Intell. Light System

inoperative
The Intelligent Light System* is faulty.
The lights remain available without Intel-
ligent Light System*.
. Left-hand licence
plate lamp
The left licence plate lamp is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
. Right licence plate

lamp
The right licence plate lamp is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
. Front left-hand fog-

lamp
The left front foglamp is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
. Right foglamp The right front foglamp is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
. Rear left-hand fog-

lamp
The left rear foglamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Rear right foglamp The right rear foglamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Front left-hand park- The front left parking lamp is faulty.

ing lamp
(e page 284).
252
Practical advice
Display messages
. Front right parking

lamp
The front right parking lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Left-hand reversing
lamp
The left reversing lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Right revers.lamp The right reversing lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Left-hand tail lamp The left tail lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Right-hand tail lamp The right tail lamp is faulty. E Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(e page 284).
. Switch off lights You've forgotten to switch off the lights

when leaving the vehicle.
. Left daytime driving

lamp
The left daytime driving light is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
. Right dayt. driving

lamp
The right daytime driving light is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
. Switch off lights or

remove key
Automatic headlamp mode is switched
on and you forgot to switch off the
or
lights before leaving the vehicle.
ò Replace air cleaner The engine air filter must be replaced. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ee
253
Practical advice
Display messages
N Check eng. oil level

when next refuelling
The engine oil level has dropped to a
critical level.
E Check the engine oil level (e page 197) and
top up the oil if necessary.
E Have the engine checked for leaks if the en-
gine oil needs topping up more often than
usual.
E
I Change key batteries The KEYLESS GO key* batteries are dis-
charged.
Change the batteries (e page 283).
E
I Key not detected The KEYLESS GO key* was not detected
while the engine was running, because
Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
it is not in the vehicle or it is suffering E Locate the KEYLESS GO key* or operate
from interference from a strong source the vehicle using the key in the ignition
of radio waves. lock.
Otherwise, it will no longer be possible to
centrally lock the vehicle or start the engine
if the engine is switched off.
E
I Key not detected The KEYLESS GO key* cannot be de-
tected.
Alter the position of the KEYLESS GO key*
in the vehicle.
E Operate the vehicle using the key in the
ignition lock if necessary.
E
I Key still in vehicle The KEYLESS GO key* was detected in
the vehicle when you attempted to lock
Remove the KEYLESS GO key* from the ve-
hicle.
the vehicle.
E
I Replace key The key no longer functions. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
254
Practical advice
Display messages
E
I Key does not belong to You have put the wrong key in the igni-
vehicle tion lock.
Use the correct key.
E
I Close doors to lock
vehicle
Not all doors were closed as you at-
tempted to lock the vehicle.
Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
E
I Remove starting but-
ton, then insert key
KEYLESS GO* has malfunctioned or is
faulty.
Pull out the KEYLESS GO* button from the
ignition lock.
E Start your vehicle using the KEYLESS GO*
key in the ignition lock.
? Rear left backrest

not locked
The rear left seat backrest is not en-
gaged.
E Fully engage the rear seat backrest
(e page 179).
? Rear right seat

backr. not locked
The rear right seat backrest is not en-
gaged.
E Fully engage the rear seat backrest
(e page 179).
= Restraint system mal- The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

function Consult tem) is faulty.
workshop
= Front left-hand side

malfunction Consult
The front left SRS (Supplemental Re-
workshop
= Front right malfunc- The front right SRS (Supplemental Re-

tion Consult workshop straint System) is faulty.
= Rear left malfunction The rear left SRS (Supplemental Re-

Consult workshop straint System) is faulty.
ee
255
Practical advice
Display messages
= Rear right malfunc- The rear right SRS (Supplemental Re-

= Rear centre malfunc- The rear centre SRS (Supplemental Re-

= Left windowbag mal-

function Consult
The left windowbag is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
workshop
= Right windowbag mal-

function Consult
The right windowbag is faulty. E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
workshop
W Reserve fuel level The level of fuel has fallen below the re-
serve range.
E Refuel at the nearest filling station.
W Top up washer fluid The washer fluid level in the washer

fluid reservoir has dropped below the
E Top up the washer fluid (e page 199).
minimum.
256
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

the work required.
Indicator and warning lamps in switches and buttons

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
The warning lamp on the sports If you select the comfort mode E Have the ADVANCED AGILITY package with sports mode*
mode button of the ADVANCED and the indicator lamp does not checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
AGILITY package with sports go out, the ADVANCED AGILITY
mode* is lit. package with sports mode* is
faulty.
The indicator lamp in the 2 The air-conditioning system is E Have the air-conditioning system checked at a qualified spe-
button on the Thermatic/ losing refrigerant. cialist workshop.
Thermotronic control panel is
on or flashes when you press
the button. The cooling system
cannot be switched on.
ee
257
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Vehicles with automatic child A special Mercedes-Benz child
seat recognition on the front- seat with automatic child seat
passenger seat* recognition has been fitted to
The 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG the front-passenger seat. The
OFF warning lamp on the centre front-passenger airbag has
console is lit. therefore been deactivated.
Vehicles with automatic child GRisk of injury E Remove electronic equipment from the front passenger seat,
seat recognition on the front- There is no child seat fitted to e.g.:
passenger seat* the front-passenger seat. The I Notebooks
The 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG automatic child seat recognition I Mobile phones
OFF warning lamp on the centre on the front-passenger seat is
console is lit. faulty. I Cards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access passes
If the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the
centre console is still lit:
E Have the automatic child seat recognition on the front-
passenger seat checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
258
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
- The yellow ABS warning GRisk of accident E Drive on carefully.
lamp lights up while the ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE–SAFE®*, E Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
engine is running. hill start assist and ESP® trailer (e page 224).
stabilisation have been deacti- E Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
vated due to a malfunction.
If the ABS control unit malfunc-
tions, there is also a possibility
of malfunctions in other sys-
tems, such as Parktronic*,
cruise control, Distronic*, the
navigation system* and the au-
tomatic transmission*.
The brake system continues to
function normally, but without
electronic support. The wheels
could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
ee
259
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
v The yellow ESP warning GRisk of accident
®
E Reactivate ESP® (e page 69).
lamp is lit while the en- ESP® is deactivated. ESP® does Exceptions: (e page 69).
gine is running. not stabilise the vehicle when it E Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather condi-
starts to skid or a wheel starts tions.
to spin.
GRisk of accident E Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
ESP® has been deactivated due (e page 224).
to a malfunction. ESP® does E Drive on carefully.
not stabilise the vehicle when it E Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
starts to skid or a wheel starts
to spin.
v The yellow ESP® warning GRisk of accident E Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when
lamp flashes while the ESP® or traction control has in- pulling away.
vehicle is in motion. tervened because at least one E Release the accelerator pedal while you are driving.
wheel has started to spin. E Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather condi-
Cruise control is switched off. tions.
E Do not deactivate ESP®. Exceptions: (e page 69).
GRisk of accident E Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
At least one tyre is spinning and (e page 224).
ETS is deactivated to prevent ETS switches on again as soon as the brakes have cooled down.
the brakes on the drive wheels The display message disappears and the v warning lamp goes
from overheating. out.
260
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
3 The red brake system You are driving with the parking E Release the parking brake (e page 111).
warning lamp lights up brake on. The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
while you are driving and
a warning tone sounds.
3 The red brake system GRisk of accident E Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
warning lamp lights up There is insufficient brake fluid E Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
while the engine is run- in the fluid reservoir.
ning. E Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
(e page 224).
You will also hear a
warning tone. E Under no circumstances should you top up the brake fluid.
This will not rectify the fault.
D The red coolant warning There is insufficient coolant in E Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Pay attention to the traf-
lamp lights up while the the reservoir. fic conditions as you do so.
engine is running. The coolant is too hot and the E Allow the engine and coolant to cool.
engine is no longer being cooled E Check the coolant level. Observe the warning notes
sufficiently. (e page 198). Top up the coolant if necessary.
E Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often than
usual.
D The red coolant warning If the coolant level is correct, E If the coolant temperature is less than 120 °C you can contin-
lamp lights up while the the radiator fan may be faulty. ue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
engine is running. The coolant is too hot and the E In doing so, avoid heavy loads on the engine (e.g. driving in
engine is no longer being cooled mountainous terrain) and stop-and-go driving. ee
sufficiently.
261
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
D The red coolant warning The coolant level is too low. E Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Pay attention to the traf-
lamp lights up while the The coolant temperature has fic conditions as you do so.
engine is running. exceeded 130 °C. The engine is E Allow the engine and coolant to cool.
You will also hear a not being cooled sufficiently E Check the coolant level. Observe the warning notes
warning tone. and can be damaged. (e page 198). Top up the coolant if necessary.
E Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often than
usual.
D The red coolant warning If the coolant level is correct, E Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
lamp lights up while the the radiator fan may be faulty. E Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
engine is running. The coolant temperature has
You will also hear a exceeded 130 °C. The engine is
warning tone. not being cooled sufficiently
and can be damaged.
± The yellow engine diag- Vehicles with diesel engine: the E Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.
nostic warning lamp fuel tank has run dry. Emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not
lights up while the en- be checked.
gine is running.
262
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
± The yellow engine diag- There may be a malfunction: E Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
nostic warning lamp I in the fuel injection system specialist workshop.
lights up while the en- or
gine is running.
I in the exhaust system or
I in the ignition system (on ve-
hicles with a petrol engine)
The emission limit values may
be exceeded and the engine
may be running in emergency
mode.
= The red SRS warning GRisk of injury E Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
lamp lights up while the The restraint systems are faulty.
engine is running. The airbags or belt tensioners
may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or not at all in the event
of an accident.
< The red seat belt warn- The seat belt warning lamp re- E Fasten your seat belt (e page 94).
ing lamp lights up for 6 minds you and the front
seconds after starting passenger to fasten their seat
the engine.15 belt.
< You will hear a warning GRisk of injury E Fasten your seat belt (e page 94).
tone for a maximum of 6 The driver's seat belt is not fas- The warning tone ceases.
seconds after starting ee
tened.
the engine.15
263
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
< The red seat belt warn- GRisk of injury E Fasten your seat belt (e page 94).
ing lamp comes on after Either the driver's or the front The warning lamp goes out.
starting the engine, as passenger's seat belt is not fas-
soon as the driver's door tened.
or the front-passenger
door is closed. GRisk of injury E Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
There are objects on the front- them in a secure place.
passenger seat. The warning lamp goes out.
264
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
< The red seat belt warn- GRisk of injury E Fasten your seat belt (e page 94).
ing lamp flashes and you Either the driver's or the front- The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
hear an intermittent passenger's seat belt is not fas- ceases.
warning tone. tened and you are driving faster
than 25 km/h or have driven
faster than 25 km/h for a short
time.
GRisk of injury E Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
There are objects on the front- them in a secure place.
passenger seat and you are The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
driving faster than 25 km/h or ceases.
have driven faster than
25 km/h for a short time.
W The yellow reserve fuel The level of fuel has fallen be- E Refuel at the nearest filling station.
warning lamp lights up low the reserve range.
while the engine is run-
ning.
15 Only for certain countries
265
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Warning tones
The anti-theft alarm system* is You opened the vehicle using Key:
suddenly triggered. the emergency key element E Press the Œ or ‹ button.
without first deactivating the
anti-theft alarm system*. or
E Insert the key into the ignition lock.
The anti-theft alarm system* is deactivated.
KEYLESS GO*:
E Pull the door handle. The KEYLESS GO key* must be outside
the vehicle.
or
E Press the KEYLESS GO button* on the dashboard. The KEY-
LESS GO key* must be in the vehicle.
You hear a warning tone. A message appears in the multi- E See the explanations for the message (e page 224).
function display.
You hear a warning tone. You are driving with the parking E Release the parking brake.
brake on.
266
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
You hear a warning tone. You have opened the driver's E Turn the light switch to M or *.
door and forgotten to switch off
the lights.
You hear a warning tone. GRisk of injury E Fasten your seat belt (e page 94).
You or the front passenger have
not fastened their seat belt.
Accident
Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The fuel line or the fuel tank has E Switch off the ignition immediately.
been damaged. E Remove the ignition key.
E Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The leaking fuel creates a risk of fire or explosion.
E Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
You are unable to determine the E Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

extent of the damage.
You cannot detect any damage. E Start the engine as normal.
The NECK-PRO head restraints Your vehicle has had a rear col- E Reset the NECK-PRO head restraints (e page 282).
on the driver's and front- lision.
passenger seats have been de-
ployed.
267
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Fuel and fuel tank
Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The fuel line or the fuel tank is E Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately and
damaged. remove it.
E Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The leaking fuel creates a risk of fire or explosion.
The fuel filler flap cannot be The fuel filler flap is not re- E Unlock the vehicle (e page 76).
opened. leased.
The opening mechanism is E Release the fuel filler flap by hand (e page 281).
jammed.
The fuel tank has been run com- There is air in the fuel system. E Refuel the vehicle.
pletely dry on a vehicle with a E Switch on the ignition for approximately 10 seconds (key in
diesel engine. position 2 in the ignition lock)
E Start the engine continuously for up to 40 seconds until it runs
smoothly.
The fuel system is now free of air.
If the engine does not start:
E Wait two minutes.
E Repeat the starting procedure for up to 40 seconds.
If the engine still does not start:
268
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Engine
The engine will not start. You I There may be a malfunction E Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before the
can hear the starter motor oper- in the engine electronics. next starting attempt.
ating. I There may be a malfunction E Try to start the engine again. When doing so, remember that
in the fuel supply. excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine will
drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
Vehicles with a diesel engine: The fuel tank has been run dry. E Refuel the vehicle.
The engine will not start. You E Bleed the fuel system (e page 268).
can hear the starter motor oper-
ating. The reserve fuel warning
lamp is on and the fuel gauge
shows 0.
The engine will not start. You The on-board voltage is too low E Jump-start the vehicle.
cannot hear the starter motor because the starter battery is If the engine does not start despite attempting to jump-start it:
operating. too weak or discharged.
Vehicles with a petrol engine: The engine electronics or a me- E Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
The engine is not running chanical component of the en- E Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
smoothly and is misfiring. gine control unit have been workshop.
damaged.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con- ee
verter and damage it.
269
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
The coolant temperature display The coolant level is too low. The E Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
is above 120 °C. The coolant coolant is too hot and the en- to cool down.
warning lamp may also be on gine is no longer being cooled E Check the coolant level. Observe the warning notes as you do
and a warning signal may sound sufficiently. so and top up the coolant if necessary (e page 198).
(e page 261).
If the coolant level is correct, E If the coolant temperature is less than 120 °C, you can contin-
the radiator fan may be faulty. ue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
The coolant is too hot and the E Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. when driv-
engine is no longer being cooled ing on mountain roads and stop/start driving.
sufficiently.
Automatic transmission*
Problems with gearshifts. The transmission is losing oil. E Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
270
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
The acceleration ability is dete- The transmission is in emer- E Stop the vehicle.
riorating. gency mode. E Move the selector lever to P.
The transmission no longer It is only possible to shift into E Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock.
changes gear. 2nd gear and reverse gear.
E Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
E Move the selector lever to position D or R.
At D, the transmission shifts into 2nd gear; at R, the transmis-
sion shifts into reverse gear.
E Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
Parktronic*
Only the red segments in the Parktronic has malfunctioned E If problems persist, have Parktronic checked at a qualified
Parktronic warning displays are and has switched itself off. specialist workshop.
lit. You also hear a warning sig-
nal for approximately two sec-
onds.
Parktronic is deactivated after
approximately 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in the Park-
tronic button lights up. ee
271
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Only the red segments in the The Parktronic sensors are dirty E Clean the Parktronic sensors (e page 219).
Parktronic warning displays are or there is interference. E Switch the ignition back on.
lit. Parktronic is deactivated
after approximately 20 sec-
onds.
Only the red segments in the The problem may be caused by E Check Parktronic functions in a different location.
Parktronic warning displays are an external source of radio or
lit. Parktronic is deactivated ultrasound waves.
after approximately 20 sec-
onds.
Headlamps and turn signals

The headlamps and the turn sig- Air humidity is very high. E Drive with the headlamps switched on.
nals in the exterior mirrors are The headlamps are demisted after a short distance.
misted up on the inside.
The headlamps and the turn sig- The headlamp housing is not E Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist work-
nals in the exterior mirrors are sealed and moisture has been shop.
misted up on the inside. able to enter.
272
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers are Leaves or snow, for example, E For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the igni-
jammed. may be obstructing the wind- tion lock.
screen wiper movement. The E Remove the cause of the obstruction.
wiper motor has been deacti-
vated. E Switch the windscreen wipers back on.
The windscreen wipers fail com- The windscreen wiper drive is E Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
pletely. malfunctioning. E Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The windscreen wipers leave There is wax or other residue on E Clean the windscreen with washer fluid after the vehicle has
smears on the windscreen after the windscreen. been cleaned in an automatic car wash (e page 105).
the vehicle has been washed in
an automatic car wash.
273
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Windows
A side window does not close GRisk of injury E Open the side window again.
fully when you pull the switch I An object has become trap- E Remove the object(s).
beyond the pressure point and ped between the window
then release it. E Pull the switch beyond the pressure point and release it.
and the door frame.
E Make sure that nobody becomes trapped.
I There are objects in the win-
dow guide rail which are pre-
venting the window being
raised.
A side window does not close GRisk of injury E Pull the window switch until the side window is closed.
fully when you pull the switch You cannot see the cause. E Make sure that nobody becomes trapped.
beyond the pressure point and
then release it.
The side window in the driver's GRisk of injury E Pull the switch until the side window in the driver's door is
door does not close fully when You cannot see the cause. closed.
you pull the switch beyond the If the side window in the driver's door has opened again slightly:
pressure point and then release The side window in the driver's
it. door stops during automatic E Pull the switch beyond the pressure point again within five
closing, the closing procedure is seconds and release it.
interrupted and the window The side window in the driver's door is closed without the ob-
opens again slightly. struction sensor.
Make sure that nobody can become trapped.
The obstruction sensor is switched back on again automatically
after approximately five seconds.
274
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Mirrors
An exterior mirror has been Vehicles without exterior mirrors that can be folded in/out elec-
pushed forwards or backwards trically:
out of position. E Push the mirror into the correct position manually.
Vehicles with exterior mirrors that can be folded in/out electri-
cally*:
E Press the mirror-folding button* (e page 90) repeatedly in
quick succession until you hear a distinct click.
The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the
mirror as usual (e page 90).
Key
You cannot lock or unlock the The key batteries are dis- E Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close
vehicle using the key. charged or nearly discharged. range and try to open the vehicle again.
If this does not work:
E Lock (e page 280) or unlock (e page 279) the vehicle using
the emergency key element.
E Check the key batteries and change them if necessary
(e page 283). ee
275
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
You cannot lock or unlock the The key is faulty. E Lock (e page 280) or unlock (e page 279) the vehicle using
vehicle using the key. the emergency key element.
E Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The battery check lamp on the The key batteries are dis- E Change the batteries (e page 283).
key does not light up when charged.
tested.
You have lost a key. E Have the key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
E Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
E If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.
You have lost the emergency E Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
key element. E If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.
The key cannot be turned in the The on-board voltage is too low. E Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. the seat heating* or
ignition lock. interior lighting, and try to turn the key again.
E Check the starter battery and recharge it if necessary
(e page 302).
or
E Jump-start the vehicle (e page 303).
or
276
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
KEYLESS GO*
You cannot lock or unlock the The KEYLESS GO key batteries E Lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote control function
vehicle using the KEYLESS GO are discharged or nearly dis- of the KEYLESS GO key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's
key. charged. door handle from close range, as for the summer opening or
the convenience closing feature, (e page 107) and try to open
the vehicle again.
E Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(e page 280).
E Check the KEYLESS GO key batteries and change them if nec-
essary (e page 283).
You cannot lock or unlock the There is a fault with KEYLESS E Check the KEYLESS GO key batteries (e page 77) and change
vehicle using the KEYLESS GO GO. them if necessary (e page 283).
key. E Have the KEYLESS GO key checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
You cannot lock or unlock the There is interference from a E Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
vehicle using the KEYLESS GO powerful source of radio waves. (e page 280).
key.
The battery check lamp in the The KEYLESS GO key batteries Change the batteries (e page 283).
KEYLESS GO key does not light are discharged.
up when tested.
ee
277
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
The vehicle does not start using A door is open. The key there- E Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
the KEYLESS GO key and the fore cannot be detected so easi-
KEYLESS GO button on the se- ly.
lector lever. The KEYLESS GO
key is in the vehicle.
The vehicle does not start using You did not depress the brake E Depress the brake pedal and press the KEYLESS GO button on
the KEYLESS GO key and the when starting the engine. the selector lever.
KEYLESS GO button on the se-
The vehicle does not start using There is interference from a E Start your vehicle using the KEYLESS GO key in the ignition
the KEYLESS GO key and the powerful source of radio waves. lock.
KEYLESS GO button on the se-
You have lost the KEYLESS GO E Have the KEYLESS GO key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz
key . Service Centre.
E Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
E If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.
278
Practical advice
Locking/unlocking in an emergency
Trailer towing*
The ball coupling cannot be GRisk of accident E Remove the ball coupling and clean it. If the ball coupling still
locked. The ball coupling is dirty. cannot be locked, remove the ball coupling. It must no longer
The key cannot be removed be used to tow a trailer, as safe operation is not guaranteed.
The trailer tow hitch is dam-
from the ball coupling. E Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at a qualified special-
aged.
ist workshop.
Parking up the vehicle

The vehicle is to be left parked E Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.
up for longer than six weeks. E Disconnect the battery (e page 301).
Locking/unlocking in an emergency There are several ways of turning off the E Insert the key into the ignition lock.
alarm: The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
Unlocking the vehicle E Press the k or j button on the
If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle us- key.
ing the key, use the emergency key ele- or
ment to unlock the driver's door. E Insert the key into the ignition lock.
If you unlock the vehicle with the emer- If you unlock the vehicle using the emer-
gency key element, the anti-theft alarm gency key element, the fuel filler flap will
system* will be triggered (e page 71) as not be unlocked automatically.
soon as the driver's door is opened.
279
Practical advice
Unlocking the driver's door press down the locking knobs by hand
on the front-passenger door and the
rear doors.
E Lock the vehicle from the outside on
the driver's door with the emergency
key element. Turn the key to position
2.
The locking knob in the driver's door
goes down. The door is locked.
E Check whether the doors and the boot
1 To unlock lid are locked.
2 To lock
Releases and removes the emergency key
element E Insert emergency key element fully into Opening the boot
1 Release catch the lock and turn it anti-clockwise to
If the boot cannot be unlocked using the
2 Emergency key element position 1.
key or KEYLESS GO*, use the emergency
E Pull release catch 1 in the direction of The locking knob pops up and the door key element.
the arrow and at the same time com- unlocks.
i The anti-theft alarm system* will be trig-
pletely remove emergency key element gered if you unlock the boot with the emer-
2 from the key. Locking the vehicle gency key element (e page 71).
If your vehicle can no longer be locked There are several ways of turning off the alarm:
centrally using the key: E Press the k or j button on the key.
E Close the front-passenger door, the
or
rear doors and the boot.
E Insert the key into the ignition lock.
E Press the central locking button
(e page 80). or
E Press the KEYLESS GO button*
E Check whether the locking knobs on
the doors are still visible. If necessary, (e page 82).
280
Practical advice
The emergency release is located in the Releasing the parking lock manually
boot, behind the fuse box on the right- (vehicles with automatic transmis-
hand side when viewed in the direction of sion*)
travel.
In the event of an electrical fault, it is pos-
E Open the fuse box in the boot sible to release the selector lever lock
(e page 309). manually to move it out of position P, e.g.
if you wish to tow the vehicle away.
Boot lock
1 Basic setting
2 To unlock the boot
E Turn the emergency key element left as
far as it will go to position 2.
The boot opens automatically.
1 Release cord
E Turn the emergency key element back
to position 1 and remove it. E Pull release cord 1 . 1 Selector lever cover
2 Release button
E Open the fuel filler flap.
Emergency fuel filler flap release E Depress the parking brake firmly.
E Press selector lever cover 1 to the left
G Risk of injury and remove it upwards.
Avoid touching the edges of the vehicle E Press release button 2 down and si-
walls when operating the emergency re- multaneously move the selector lever
lease. You could otherwise injure yourself. out of position P.
The selector lever can now be moved
freely until it is returned to position P.
281
Practical advice
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head E Push the head restraint cushion down
restraints into the guide as far as it will go 3.
If the NECK-PRO head restraints are trig- E Firmly press back the head restraint
gered in an accident, you must reset the cushion until it engages 1.
head restraints on the driver's and front- i This work requires a lot of strength; if you
passenger seat. If you do not, the addition- have difficulty resetting the head restraints,
al protection will not be available in the have the work carried out by a qualified special-
event of another rear-end collision. You ist workshop, such as a Mercedes-Benz Service
can recognise when head restraints have Centre.
been triggered by the fact that they have ! For safety reasons, have NECK-PRO head
been moved forwards and can no longer restraints checked at a qualified specialist
be adjusted. workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre, following a rear collision.
1 Fold back
2 Push back
3 Push down
E Push the head restraint cushion back-
wards by the lower part as far as it will
go 2.
282
Practical advice
Changing the batteries
Changing the batteries i Always replace the batteries in pairs. E Insert emergency key element 1 into
You can obtain suitable batteries from a quali- the opening in the key and push in the
fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz direction of the arrow.
Notes
Service Centre. Battery tray 2 is released.
If the batteries in the key are discharged,
you will only be able to lock or unlock the They will also change batteries for you and take E Pull the battery tray out of the key in
back old batteries. In many EU countries and the direction of the arrow.
vehicle using the emergency key element
some other countries, retailers are legally ob-
(e page 279).
liged to take back old batteries.
It is then advisable to have the batteries
replaced at a qualified specialist work- Key
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre. You need two CR 2025 3 V cell batteries.
G Risk of poisoning
Batteries contain toxic and caustic substan-
ces. For this reason, keep batteries away
from children.
If a battery is swallowed, consult a doctor 3 Battery
immediately. 4 Contact springs
E Prise old batteries 3 out of the battery
H Environmental note tray using emergency key element .
Do not dispose of batteries with the house- E Insert the new batteries underneath
1 Emergency key element
hold rubbish. They contain highly toxic sub- contact springs 4 with the positive
2 Battery tray
stances. terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free
E Pull out emergency key element 1 cloth to do so.
Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe-
(e page 279).
cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz E Push the battery tray back into the key ee
Service Centre, or to a special collection housing until the battery tray engages.
point for old batteries.
283
Practical advice
Changing the bulbs
i When inserting the batteries, make sure Changing the bulbs contacts on bi-xenon* bulbs. Do not, there-
that they are clean and lint-free. fore, remove the cover from bi-xenon*
E Check the function of all key buttons bulbs.
Notes on changing bulbs
on the vehicle. Do not change bi-xenon* bulbs yourself, but
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect have them replaced at a qualified specialist
of vehicle safety. You must therefore make workshop which has the necessary special-
sure that all bulbs function correctly at all ist knowledge and tools to carry out the
times. work required.
G Risk of injury
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
Bulbs and lamps can be very hot. You pose. In particular, work relevant to safety
should therefore allow them to cool down or on safety-related systems must be car-
before you change them. Otherwise, you ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
could be burned if you touch them.
Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Oth- i If one of the following bulbs fails, another
erwise, they could damage them, for exam- bulb will take over its function:
ple, and injure themselves.
I Turn signals
Never use a bulb which has been dropped.
Such a bulb may explode and injure you. I Brake lamps
H7 bulbs are pressurised and could explode I Parking lamp
when you change them, particularly if they I Tail lamps
are very hot. You should therefore wear eye
protection and gloves when you are chang-
ing them.
G Risk of injury
Bi-xenon* bulbs carry a high voltage. You
could get an electric shock and be seriously
or fatally injured if you touch the electric
284
Practical advice
Changing the bulbs
Overview Bulb Type Before changing bulbs
Front and rear lamps 4 Main-beam H7 55 W I Only fit 12 V bulbs of the same type
headlamps and of the correct wattage.
I Switch the lights off before changing a
5 Side marker W5W
bulb to prevent a short-circuit.
Rear foglamp P 21 W I Only hold bulbs with a clean, lint-free
17
6 Turn signals PY 21 W cloth.
7 Brake lamp/tail 2 x P 21 W I Do not work with wet or greasy fingers.
lamp I If the new bulb still does not light up,
8 Reversing lamps P 21 W consult a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
9 Licence plate W5W
lighting
I Have the following bulbs changed at a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
a Third brake LED Mercedes-Benz Service Centre:
lamp I the additional turn signals in the ex-
b Front foglamps H11 55 W terior mirrors
c Parking lamp 2 x W 5 W–BV I the indicator lamp* (vehicles with
16 Vehicles with bi-xenon* headlamps are fitted with light package*)
D1S 35 W bulbs. Always have these bulbs re- I the third brake lamp
Bulb Type placed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. I the front foglamp bulbs
17 Vehicles with light package*: the turn signals are
1 Additional turn LED I the bi-xenon* bulbs
LEDs.
signals
I the licence plate lamp
2 Turn signals PY 21 W
i Due to the location of the front headlamps, ee
3 Dipped-beam H7 55 W it is best to have the bulbs changed at a quali-
headlamps16
285
Practical advice
Changing the bulbs
fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz 4 Housing cover for main-beam head-
Service Centre. lamp
i Have the headlamp setting checked regu- 5 Housing cover for dipped-beam head-
larly at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a lamp
Changing the front bulbs

E Switch off the lights.
E Open the bonnet (e page 195).
Vehicles with halogen headlamps 1 Mark
2 Retainer
3 Bulb holder for turn signal
E Place bulb holder 3 in the headlamp
6 Bulb holder for side lamp so that retainer 2 is upright and mark
7 Bulb holder for main-beam headlamp 1 is at the top.
8 Bulb holder for dipped-beam headlamp E Turn bulb holder 3 clockwise.
Changing the front turn signal bulbs Replacing the bulbs in the dipped-beam
E Turn bulb holder 1 anti-clockwise and headlamps
remove it along with the bulb. E Turn housing cover 5 anti-clockwise.
E Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, applying E Disconnect the connector from the
Left-hand headlamp, mirror image of right-
slight pressure, and remove it from the bulb.
hand headlamp
bulb holder.
1 Bulb holder for turn signal E Gently push in retaining spring of lamp
2 Housing cover for parking lamp E Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder holder 8 and detach it downwards.
3 Housing cover for parking lamp and turn it clockwise.
E Remove the bulb from the bulb holder,
holding the base (not the glass tube).
286
Practical advice
Changing the bulbs
E Insert the new bulb so that the base E Disconnect the connector from the or fatally injured if you touch the electric
fits flat into the recess in the bulb hold- bulb. contacts on bi-xenon* bulbs. Do not, there-
er. E Attach the connector to the new bulb. fore, remove the cover from bi-xenon*
E Attach the retainer spring. bulbs.
E Put the lamp in at the bottom and push Do not change bi-xenon* bulbs yourself, but
E Attach the connector to the bulb. it up until it clips into place, so that the have them replaced at a qualified specialist
E Put on the housing cover and turn it base fits flush in the recess on the bulb workshop which has the necessary special-
clockwise until it clips into place. holder. ist knowledge and tools to carry out the
E Put on the housing cover and turn it work required.
Replacing the bulbs in the main-beam clockwise until it clips into place. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
headlamps Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
E Turn housing cover 4 anti-clockwise. Changing the bulbs in the side lamps pose. In particular, work relevant to safety
and parking lamps or on safety-related systems must be car-
E Turn one of housing covers 2 or 3 ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
anti-clockwise.
E Pull out bulb holder 6 with the bulb.
E Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
E Push the new bulb into the bulb holder.
E Insert the bulb holder into the head-
lamp and push it in.
E Put on the housing cover and turn it
7 Bulb holder for main-beam headlamp clockwise until it clips into place.
E Push down the lamp on the connector Vehicles with bi-xenon* headlamps
until it is released. Left-hand headlamp, mirror image of right-
E Remove the bulb from bulb holder 7, G Risk of injury hand headlamp ee
holding the base (not the glass tube). Bi-xenon* bulbs carry a high voltage. You 1 Bulb holder for turn signal
could get an electric shock and be seriously 2 Housing cover for parking lamp
287
Practical advice
Changing the bulbs
3 Housing cover for parking lamp
4 Housing cover for main-beam head-
lamp
5 Housing cover for bi-xenon headlamp
1 Mark 7 Bulb holder for main-beam headlamp

2 Retainer E Push down the lamp on the connector
3 Bulb holder for turn signal until it is released.
E Place bulb holder 3 in the headlamp
E Remove the bulb from bulb holder 7,
6 Bulb holder for side lamp so that retainer 2 is upright and mark holding the base (not the glass tube).
7 Bulb holder for main-beam headlamp 1 is at the top.
E Disconnect the connector from the
E Turn bulb holder 3 clockwise.
Changing the front turn signal bulbs bulb.
E Turn bulb holder 1 anti-clockwise and Replacing the bulbs in the main-beam E Attach the connector to the new bulb.
remove it along with the bulb. headlamps E Put the lamp in at the bottom and push
E Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, applying E Turn housing cover 4 anti-clockwise. it up until it clips into place, so that the
slight pressure, and remove it from the base fits flush in the recess on the bulb
bulb holder. holder.
E Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder E Put on the housing cover and turn it
and turn it clockwise. clockwise until it clips into place.
288
Practical advice
Changing the bulbs
Changing the bulbs in the side lamps 5 Parking lamp and brake lamp/tail lamp
and parking lamps 6 Reversing lamp
E Turn one of housing covers 2 or 3 E Push the corresponding bulb back and
anti-clockwise. remove it from the bulb holder anti-
E Pull out bulb holder 6 with the bulb. clockwise.
E Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder. E Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder
and turn it clockwise.
E Push the new bulb into the bulb holder.
E Reinsert the bulb holder and lock in po-
E Insert the bulb holder into the head- sition.
lamp and push it in.
1 Retaining clips E Close the side trim panel.
E Put on the housing cover and turn it
clockwise until it clips into place. E Press retaining clips 1 together and
remove the bulb holder with the bulb.
Changing the rear bulbs
Tail lamps
E Switch off the lights.
E Open the boot (e page 80).
E Remove the trim.
or
E Open the left-* or right-hand stowage
compartment in the boot.
Right bulb holder, left reversed image
1 Rear foglamp/side marker lamp
2 Side marker lamp
3 Turn signals
4 Parking lamp and brake lamp/tail lamp
289
Practical advice
Replacing the wiper blades
Replacing the wiper blades Removing Fitting
E Turn the key to position 0 in the igni- E Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper
Notes on changing wiper blades tion lock. arm in the opposite direction to the ar-
row.
G Risk of injury E Fold the wiper arm away from the win-
dow until it engages. E Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wip-
Remove the key from the ignition lock be- er arm.
E Position the wiper blade at right an-
fore replacing the wiper blades. The wind-
screen wipers could otherwise be set in mo- gles. E Fold the wiper arm back onto the win-
tion and injure you. dow.
G Risk of accident
Wiper blades are wear parts. Replace the
wiper blades twice a year, ideally in the
spring and in the autumn. The windows will
otherwise not be properly wiped. This may
prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
tions, thereby causing an accident.
Windscreen wiper arm and wiper blade

! Under no circumstances should you open
the bonnet when a wiper arm is folded away E Remove the wiper blade from the hold-
from the windscreen. Otherwise, you could er on the wiper arm in the direction of
damage the bonnet. the arrow.
Place wiper arms on the windscreen carefully if
they do not have a wiper blade fitted. They may
otherwise damage the windscreen.
290
Practical advice
Flat tyre
Flat tyre For all vehicles or on safety-related systems must be car-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with: E Place the warning triangle (e page 222)
I The TIREFIT kit (e page 223) (the ve- or warning lamps at a suitable dis-
tance. Observe legal requirements. E Do not remove any foreign objects
hicle has no spare wheel)
which have penetrated the tyre, e.g.
I The MOExtended run-flat system* screws or nails.
(e page 202) (the vehicle has no spare Using the TIREFIT kit
E Remove TIREFIT with the two-part
wheel) You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small
sticker reading "max. 80 km/h" and
I A "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* punctures, particularly those in the tyre
the electric air pump from the stowage
(e page 223) tread. You can use TIREFIT in outdoor tem-
well underneath the boot floor
peratures down to -20 °C.
I A spare wheel* (e page 223) (e page 223).
G Risk of accident
Preparing the vehicle In the following situations, your safety is at
E Stop your vehicle as far away as possi- particular risk and TIREFIT is unable to pro-
ble from traffic on solid, non-slippery, vide breakdown assistance:
level ground. I if there are cuts or punctures in the tyre
greater than 4 mm
E Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
I if the wheel rim is damaged
E Firmly depress the parking brake. I if you have driven at very low tyre pres-
Vehicles with manual transmission sures or on a flat tyre
Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified
E Shift to either first or reverse gear. specialist workshop which has the neces- 1 Driver's field of vision sticker
sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry 2 Wheel sticker
Vehicles with automatic transmission* out the work required. E Attach part 1 of the sticker in the driv-
E Move the selector lever to P. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a er's field of vision.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- ee
pose. In particular, work relevant to safety
291
Practical advice
Flat tyre
E Attach part 2 of the sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective G Risk of injury 5 Electric connector with cable
6 Air pump hose
tyre. Comply with the manufacturer's safety in- 7 Flange
structions shown on the sticker on the elec-
G Risk of injury tric air pump. E Open flap 2 on the electric air pump.
TIREFIT must not come into contact with E Pull connector 5 and air pump hose
your skin, eyes or clothing. i Your vehicle may have been equipped with 6 from the housing.
I If TIREFIT comes into contact with your two different air pumps. Version 1 can be iden- E Screw air pump hose 6 onto flange
eyes or skin, immediately rinse thor- tified by the flap, behind which the hose with 7 of TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1.
oughly with clean water. the pressure gauge and cable are located; ver-
E Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1
I Change out of clothing which has come sion 2 has a pressure gauge integrated in the
electric air pump.
head downwards into recess 2 of the
into contact with TIREFIT immediately. electric air pump.
I If an allergic reaction occurs, consult a Version 1
doctor immediately.
Keep TIREFIT away from children.
I If TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly with
water and drink plenty of water.
I Do not induce vomiting. Consult a doc-
tor immediately.
I Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes.
i If sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can 8 Filler hose

then be removed like a layer of film. 9 Valve
Version 1
If you get sealant on your clothing, have it
1 TIREFIT sealant filler bottle E Remove the cap from valve 9 on the
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloro-
2 Flap faulty tyre.
ethylene.
3 Recess
4 On/off switch
292
Practical advice
Flat tyre
Do not switch off the compressor during this out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec-
phase. ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
E Allow the compressor to run for five mi- Service Centre for this purpose. In particu-
nutes. The tyre should then have a lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-re-
pressure of at least 1.8 bar. lated systems must be carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
! Do not operate the electric air pump for
longer than six minutes without a break, other-
wise it may overheat. If a tyre pressure of 1.8 bar is achieved:
The air pump can be operated again once it has E Press 0 on the electric air pump
cooled down. switch.
a Pressure release screw If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after The electric air pump is switched off.
b Pressure gauge five minutes: E Disconnect the electric air pump.
E Make sure pressure release screw a E Switch off and disconnect the electric E Pull away immediately.
on pressure gauge b is fully closed. air pump and drive the vehicle forwards
or backwards approximately 10 m. This distributes the TIREFIT sealant
E Screw filler hose 8 onto valve 9.
more evenly around the tyre.
E Insert connector 4 into the cigarette This distributes the TIREFIT sealant
E Stop after driving for approximately ten
lighter socket (e page 185) or into a 12 more evenly.
minutes and check the tyre pressure
V socket* in your vehicle (e page 186). E Remove the sealant filler bottle from with the electric air pump.
E Turn the ignition key to position 1 in the electric pump.
the ignition lock (e page 82). E Pump up the tyre again. G Risk of accident
E Press on/off switch 4 on the electric If the tyre pressure is now lower than
air pump to I. G Risk of accident 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do
If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after not drive any further. Consult a qualified
The electric air pump is switched on.
five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. specialist workshop which has the neces-
The tyre is pumped up.
sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry
Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified ee
i First, the sealant is pumped into the tyre. specialist workshop which has the neces-
out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec-
The pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar. ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
293
Practical advice
Flat tyre
E Pull connector 4 and air pump hose
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-re-
lated systems must be carried out at a quali- H Environmental note
5 from the housing.
fied specialist workshop. Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of pro- E Screw air pump hose 5 onto flange
fessionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service 6 of TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1.
Centre.
E If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 E Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1
bar, correct it (see fuel filler flap for val- E Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every head downwards into recess 2 of the
ues). four years at a qualified specialist work- electric air pump.
To increase the tyre pressure: switch shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
on the electric air pump. Centre.
To reduce the tyre pressure: open Version 2
pressure release screw a on pressure
gauge b.
E Drive to the nearest workshop and
have the tyre changed there.
E Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon
as possible at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre. 7 Valve
8 Filler hose
G Risk of accident
E Remove the cap from valve 7 on the
Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 faulty tyre.
km/h. 1 TIREFIT sealant filler bottle
2 Recess E Screw filler hose 8 onto valve 7.
The “max. 80 km/h” sticker must be affixed
3 On/off switch E Insert connector 4 into the cigarette
within the driver's field of vision.
4 Electric connector with cable lighter socket (e page 185) or into a 12
The vehicle's handling characteristics may 5 Air pump hose
be affected. V socket* in your vehicle (e page 186).
6 Flange
E Turn the ignition key to position 1 in
the ignition lock (e page 82).
294
Practical advice
Flat tyre
E Press on/off switch 3 on the electric
air pump to I. G Risk of accident G Risk of accident
The electric air pump is switched on. If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after If the tyre pressure is now lower than
The tyre is pumped up. five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do
Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified not drive any further. Consult a qualified
i First, the sealant is pumped into the tyre. specialist workshop which has the neces- specialist workshop which has the neces-
The pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar. sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry
Do not switch off the compressor during this out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec- out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec-
phase. ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
E Allow the compressor to run for five mi- Service Centre for this purpose. In particu- Service Centre for this purpose. In particu-
nutes. The tyre should then have a lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-re- lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-re-
pressure of at least 1.8 bar. lated systems must be carried out at a quali- lated systems must be carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop. fied specialist workshop.
! Do not operate the electric air pump for
longer than six minutes without a break, other-
wise it may overheat. If a tyre pressure of 1.8 bar is achieved:
The air pump can be operated again once it has E Press 0 on the electric air pump
cooled down. switch.
If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after The electric air pump is switched off.
five minutes: E Disconnect the electric air pump.
E Switch off and disconnect the electric
E Pull away immediately.
air pump and drive the vehicle forwards
or backwards approximately 10 m. This distributes the TIREFIT sealant
more evenly around the tyre.
This distributes the TIREFIT sealant
more evenly. E Stop after driving for approximately ten 9 Pressure release button
minutes and check the tyre pressure a Pressure gauge
E Remove the sealant filler bottle from
with the electric air pump.
the electric pump. E If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 ee
E Pump up the tyre again. bar, correct it (see fuel filler flap for val-
ues).
295
Practical advice
Flat tyre
To increase the tyre pressure: switch shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-re-
on the electric air pump. Centre. lated systems must be carried out at a quali-
To decrease the tyre pressure: press fied specialist workshop.
yellow pressure release button 9 next Changing a wheel and fitting the Never drive the vehicle with more than one
to pressure gauge a. spare wheel* "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* fitted.
E Drive to the nearest workshop and
have the tyre changed there.
G Risk of accident
Preparing the vehicle
The wheel dimensions and tyre size of the
E Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon spare wheel* or emergency spare wheel* E Prepare the vehicle as described
as possible at a qualified specialist may differ from those of standard wheels. (e page 291).
workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Your vehicle's handling characteristics will E All occupants must get out of the ve-
Service Centre. be altered when a “Minispare”/collapsible hicle. Make sure that they are not en-
G Risk of accident emergency spare wheel* is fitted. Adapt
your style of driving accordingly.
dangered as they do so.
Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 The “Minispare”/collapsible emergency E Occupants should stand clear of dan-
km/h. spare wheel* must only be used as a tempo- ger whilst a wheel is being changed,
The “max. 80 km/h” sticker must be affixed rary measure. Do not exceed the maximum e.g. behind the barrier.
within the driver's field of vision. speed of 80 km/h and do not deactivate E Decouple the trailer, if present.
The vehicle's handling characteristics may ESP®.
E Straighten the wheels.
be affected.
E Take the following from the stowage
G Risk of accident well beneath the boot floor:
H Environmental note Have the "Minispare" emergency spare I If necessary, the "Minispare" emer-
Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of pro- wheel* or the spare wheel* replaced with a gency spare wheel* or the spare
fessionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service new wheel as soon as possible at a qualified wheel*
Centre. specialist workshop which has the neces-
I The vehicle tool kit and jack
E Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec-
four years at a qualified specialist work- ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
296
Practical advice
Flat tyre
E On slight downhill/uphill slopes, place
G Risk of injury
chocks or similar objects under both
The jack is designed only to raise the ve- wheels of the other axle.
hicle for a short time while a wheel is being
changed. G Risk of injury
If you intend to work under the vehicle, it Only raise the vehicle on level ground or
must be placed on stands. slight downhill/uphill slopes. The vehicle
Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm, could otherwise fall off the jack and injure
non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden you or others.
blocks or similar as jacking supports. The
jack would not be able to achieve its load-
bearing capacity due to the restricted Securing a vehicle on level ground (exam-
height. ple illustration)
Do not start the engine at any time while E On level ground, place chocks or simi-
the wheel is being changed. lar objects in front of and behind the
Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being wheel diagonal to the wheel to be re-
supported by the jack. If you do not raise placed.
the vehicle as described, it could slip off the
jack (e.g. if the engine is started or a door
or the boot lid is opened or closed).
Steel wheel with wheel trim

Raising the vehicle
E Vehicles with steel wheels: carefully
E Secure the vehicle from rolling away reach into two wheel trim openings and
using the wheel chock, which is sup- remove the wheel trim.
plied with the vehicle tool kit, and other
similar objects, for example, a large
ee
stone.
Securing a vehicle on slight downhill slope
(example illustration)
297
Practical advice
Flat tyre
E Loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel The jacking points for the jacks are behind E Make sure that the base of the jack is
you wish to change by about one turn; the wheel housings of the front wheels positioned directly under the jacking
do not unscrew the bolts completely. and in front of the wheel housings of the point.
rear wheels (arrows). E
G Risk of accident Turn the crank until the tyre is raised a
maximum of 3 cm from the ground.
If you fail to position the jack correctly, the
E Unscrew the wheel bolts.
vehicle may:
I slip off the jack ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. This could cause damage to the
I injure you or others
bolt and wheel hub threads.
I be damaged
E Remove the wheel.
It is thus important to ensure that the jack
is positioned correctly in the respective Fitting a new wheel
jacking points. Before positioning the jack,
remove any dirt that may have collected in
the jacking points. Please note that you G Risk of accident
1 Jacking point
must position the jack in the opening of the Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts.
2 Jack
jacking point. Never oil or grease wheel bolts.
E Position jack 2 at jacking point 1.
298
Practical advice
Flat tyre
Lowering the vehicle
G Risk of accident
E Lower the vehicle. To do this, turn the
If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must
not drive the vehicle any further. Consult a crank of the jack anti-clockwise until
qualified specialist workshop which has the the vehicle is once again standing
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to firmly on the ground.
carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz E Place the jack to one side.
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre or Service 24h for this pur-
pose. In particular, work relevant to safety
or on safety-related systems must be car-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. E Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
surfaces.
G Risk of accident E Place the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel* or the spare wheel onto the
Only use wheel bolts that have been de- wheel hub and push it on.
signed for the wheel and the vehicle. For
safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use wheel bolts which 1 – 5 Wheel bolts
have been approved for Mercedes-Benz ve-
hicles. Other bolts could work loose. E Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a
Do not tighten the wheel bolts completely crosswise pattern in the following or-
while the vehicle is still jacked up. The ve- der: 1, 3, 5, 2, 4. The tightening
hicle could topple off the jack. torque must be 130 Nm.
G Risk of accident
Have the tightening torque checked immedi-
ately after a wheel is changed. The wheels
E Tighten the wheel bolts until they are ee
could work loose if they are not tightened to
finger-tight. a tightening torque of 130 Nm.
299
Practical advice
Flat tyre
The maximum permissible distance which can I you hear banging noises
E Turn the jack back to its initial position be driven in run-flat mode is counted from the I the vehicle starts to shake
and store it and the rest of the vehicle moment the tyre pressure loss warning ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
I you see smoke and smell rubber
tool kit in the boot. I ESP® is intervening constantly
Vehicles with the "Minispare" emergency You must not exceed a maximum speed of
80 km/h. I there are tears in the sidewalls of the
spare wheel*: tyre
E Wrap the faulty wheel in the protective G Risk of accident After driving in run-flat mode, you must have
wrapping provided with the "Minispare" The handling characteristics of your vehicle
the rims checked for damage at a qualified
emergency spare wheel* and transport deteriorate in run-flat mode, for example:
specialist workshop which has the neces-
it in the boot. sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry
I when cornering out the work required. The faulty tyre must
or I when braking be replaced in every case.
E Depending on the size of the wheel, I when accelerating rapidly Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
you may also be able to secure the Adapt your driving style accordingly and Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
faulty wheel in the spare wheel recess. avoid sudden changes in direction and sud- pose. In particular, work relevant to safety
In this case, you will have to remove den acceleration, as well as driving over ob- or on safety-related systems must be car-
the stowage tray from the spare wheel stacles (i.e. kerbs, potholes), and driving off- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
recess and stow it in the boot. road. This is particularly the case when the
vehicle is heavily laden. i If you change one or all of the tyres, make
MOExtended run-flat system* The maximum permissible distance that can sure that you only use tyres marked
be driven in run-flat mode depends to a MOExtended of the specified size for the ve-
The MOExtended run-flat system must
large extent on the loads placed on the vehicle.
only be used in conjunction with the tyre hicle. It can be shorter due to high speeds,
pressure loss warning system*. a heavy load, sudden acceleration and/or
! The maximum permissible distance which manoeuvring, the road surface condition,
can be driven in run-flat mode depends on the outside temperature, etc., or further if you
load in the vehicle. It is 50 km if the vehicle is drive carefully and conservatively.
partially laden and 30 km if fully laden. Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if:
300
Practical advice
Battery
Battery Risk of explosion Observe this Owner's Man-
ual.
Notes on the battery
In order for the battery to achieve the Fire, naked flames and smok-
maximum possible service life, it must al-
ways be sufficiently charged.
ing are prohibited when han-
dling the battery. Avoid creat- H Environmental note
ing sparks. Do not dispose of batteries with the house-
Have the battery charge checked more fre- hold rubbish. Dispose of defective batteries
quently if you use the vehicle mainly for Battery acid is caustic. Avoid in an environmentally-responsible manner.
short trips or if you leave it parked up for a contact with the skin, eyes or Take them to a Mercedes-Benz Service
lengthy period. clothing. Centre or a special collection point for old
To prevent damage from corrosion, only Wear suitable protective batteries.
replace the battery with one that has a clothing, in particular, gloves,
central ventilation cover. Mercedes-Benz an apron and face mask. G Risk of injury
recommends that, for safety reasons, you Immediately rinse acid Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety
only use batteries which have been tested splashes off with clean water. reasons, you only use batteries which have
and approved for your vehicle by Consult a doctor if necessary. been tested and approved for your vehicle
Mercedes-Benz. by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
Wear eye protection. increased impact protection to prevent ve-
Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if
you wish to leave your vehicle parked up hicle occupants from suffering acid burns
should the battery be damaged in the event
for a long period of time.
Immediately rinse acid of an accident.
G Risk of injury splashes off with clean water. To prevent acid burns, observe the following
Consult a doctor if necessary. safety notes when handling batteries:
Comply with safety precautions and take
protective measures when handling bat-
I Do not lean over batteries.
Keep children away.
teries. I Do not place any metal objects on a bat-
tery. You could otherwise cause a short ee
circuit and the battery's highly flamma-
ble gas mixture could ignite.
301
Practical advice
Battery
I Make sure that you do not create elec- Depending on its engine type, your vehicle Removing the battery
trostatic charge, e.g. by wearing syn- is equipped with a battery in the boot or
E Disconnect the battery (e page 302).
thetic clothing or as a result of friction engine compartment. It is located on the
on fabrics. You should not therefore pull right side (direction of travel) in the spare E Loosen the screw which holds the bat-
or slide the battery over carpets or other wheel well or in front of the bulkhead on tery in place.
synthetic materials. the right side of the engine compartment. E Remove the battery.
I Never touch the battery first.
To discharge a possible electrostatic Disconnecting the battery
charge, step out of the vehicle first and Charging and fitting the battery
! Always disconnect the battery in the se-
I
touch the bodywork.
Do not wipe the battery using a cloth.
quence described below. Never swap the termi- G Risk of injury
nal clamps. You may otherwise damage the ve- Only charge the installed battery with a bat-
The battery may explode as a result of
hicle electronics. tery charger which has been tested and ap-
electrostatic charge or through the crea-
tion of sparks. E Depress the parking brake firmly and proved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery
shift the selector lever to position P on chargers allow the battery to be charged
vehicles with automatic transmission*. while it is still installed. Otherwise, the vehi-
! Switch the engine off and remove the key cle's electronic system may be damaged.
before unscrewing or disconnecting the termi- E Switch off all electrical consumers. Only charge the battery in a well ventilated
nal clamps from the battery. You may other- E Turn the key to position 0 in the igni- area. As the battery is being charged, gases
wise destroy electronic components such as can escape and generate minor explosions.
tion lock and remove it.
the alternator. This may injure you and other persons or
E Open the boot.
Have the starter battery checked and, if neces- cause damage to the paintwork or acid cor-
sary, replaced at a qualified specialist work- E Unscrew the negative terminal of the rosion on the vehicle.
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, at battery using a 10 mm open-end span- You can obtain information about battery
least every two years or every 20,000 km. ner. chargers which allow the battery to be
i Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have E Remove the cover from the positive ter- charged when still installed from a qualified
all work involving the battery, e.g. disconnect- minal clamp. specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
ing, removing, charging and replacing, carried Service Centre.
E Remove the positive terminal clamp
out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. from the battery.
E Disconnect the breather hose.
302
Practical advice
Jump-starting
G Risk of injury Reconnecting the battery Jump-starting

There is a risk of acid burns during the
! Always reconnect the battery in the se-
charging process due to the gases which es-
quence described below. Never swap the termi- Jump-starting your vehicle
nal clamps. You may otherwise damage the ve-
cape from the battery. Do not lean over the If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
hicle electronics.
battery during the charging process. engine can be jump-started from another
E Switch off all electrical consumers. vehicle or an external battery using jump
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum E Connect the positive terminal clamp leads.
charging voltage of 14.8 V. and secure the cover. For easier access, your vehicle is equipped
E Charge the battery. Observe the notes E Connect the negative terminal clamp. with a positive contact and a negative con-
in the operating instructions for your tact in the engine compartment.
E Connect the breather hose. Make sure
battery charger. that a cell cap is fitted between the Observe the following points:
E Refit the charged battery. battery and the breather hose. I Jump-starting must only be performed
To do this, follow the steps described E Close the boot. when the engine and catalytic convert-
in "Removing the battery" in reverse or- er are cold.
i If the battery power supply has been inter-
der. rupted (e.g. if it has been reconnected), you I Do not start the engine if the battery
must carry out the following tasks: has frozen. Thaw the battery out first.
G Risk of injury
I Jump-starting may only be performed
I Reset the sliding/tilting sunroof*
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with (e page 171). from 12 V batteries.
the skin, eyes or clothing.
I Reset the panorama sliding/tilting sunroof* I Only use jump leads which are pro-
(e page 176) tected against polarity reversal and
I Reset the function for folding the exterior which have a sufficient cross-section
mirrors in/out automatically* by folding the and insulated terminal clamps.
mirrors out once (e page 90). i Jump leads which are protected against po-
larity reversal and further information about
jump-starting can be obtained from any ee
303
Practical advice
Jump-starting
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at- E Automatic transmission*: move the your vehicle, attaching jump-start cable
tempts. selector lever to P. to the donor battery first.
Never start the vehicle using a rapid battery E All vehicles: switch off all electric con- E Start the engine of the donor vehicle
charger. sumers. and run it at idling speed.
G Risk of injury The positive and negative contacts are lo- E Connect negative terminal 5 of the
cated on the front bulkhead on the right- donor battery and negative contact 4
There is a risk of acid burns when jump- hand side of the vehicle. on your vehicle, attaching jump-start
starting a vehicle due to the gases which es- cable to the donor battery first.
cape from the battery. Do not lean over the
battery while the engine is being jump- E Start the engine.
started. E Electrical consumers can be switched
on again. Do not switch on the lights,
however.
G Risk of explosion
E First disconnect the jump lead from
Gases escaping from the battery during negative terminals 4 and 5, then
jump-starting may cause minor explosions.
from positive terminals 1 and 3.
Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames
away from the battery, and do not smoke. E Have the battery checked at a qualified
Comply with safety precautions and take specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-
1 Positive terminal of donor battery Benz Service Centre.
protective measures when handling bat- 2 Cover
teries. You will find these under “Battery” in
3 Positive contact on your vehicle
the index.
4 Negative contact on your vehicle
5 Negative terminal of donor battery
E If your vehicle is being jump-started by
E Slide the cap of the positive contact 3
another vehicle, make sure that the ve-
in the direction of the arrow.
hicles are not touching.
E Connect positive terminal 1 of the do-
E Depress the parking brake.
nor battery and positive contact 3 on
E Manual transmission: engage neutral.
304
Practical advice
Towing and tow-starting
Towing and tow-starting I Vehicles with automatic transmission* I The ignition must be switched off if you
must not be tow-started. are towing the vehicle with the front/
I If the engine does not start, try jump- rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP®
Points to remember
starting it (e page 303). could otherwise damage the brake sys-
G Risk of accident I If it is not possible to jump-start the ve-
tem.
If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid hicle, have it towed to the nearest i Switch off the automatic locking feature
before the vehicle is towed. You could other-
towing bar if: qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
wise become locked out when pushing or tow-
I the engine is not running Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
ing the vehicle.
I there is a brake system malfunction I If the vehicle has suffered transmission Deactivate the tow-away protection before tow-
I the voltage supply or the vehicle's elec- damage, only tow it with the propeller ing (e page 72).
trical system is damaged shaft disconnected.
If the engine is not running, there is no
! Only secure the tow cable or the rigid tow-
I The selector lever must be in ing bar to the towing eye or the ball coupling.
power assistance for the steering and position N on vehicles with automatic Otherwise, you could damage the vehicle.
brakes. transmission*.
I If you are towing the vehicle over Fitting the towing eye
It is preferable to have the vehicle trans- a considerable distance, this may only
ported on a transporter or trailer instead The fixtures for the removable towing eyes
be done with the rear axle raised.
of towing it. If you do tow it, use a rigid are located in the bumpers. They are lo-
towing bar.
I Before towing the vehicle, make sure cated at the front and rear under the cov-
that the battery is connected and ers on the right-hand side of the vehicle.
Observe the legal requirements in all coun- charged. Otherwise:
tries concerned when towing. Vehicles with a trailer coupling: your ve-
I you cannot switch on the ignition hicle does not have a rear threaded socket
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of for mounting the towing eye. If you intend
50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not I you cannot move the selector lever
to N (on vehicles with automatic to use the vehicle for towing, fold out the
be exceeded.
transmission*) ball coupling and secure the towline to it
If the towing distance is greater than 50 km, (e page 211).
the propeller shafts to the driven axles must be I you have no support when braking
removed.
305
Practical advice
Towing and tow-starting
Opening the front cover Opening the rear cover Towing the vehicle
! The engine must be switched off if the ve-
hicle is being towed with the front axle raised
or if the parking brake is being tested on a dy-
namometer. Intervention by ESP® could other-
wise damage the brake system.
Vehicles with manual transmission

E Turn the key to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
E Shift to neutral.
Front bumper Rear bumper
1 Cover 1 Cover Vehicles with automatic transmission*
E Press the mark on cover 1 inwards. E Press the mark on cover 1 inwards. E Turn the key to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
E Take cover 1 off the opening but do E Take cover 2 off the opening but do
not remove it. not remove it. E Move the selector lever to N.
Securing the towing eye Tow-starting (emergency engine

E Take the towing eye and the wheel starting)
wrench from the vehicle tool kit. Please note:
E Screw in the towing eye clockwise to I Vehicles with automatic transmission*
the stop. must not be tow-started.
E Insert the wheel wrench handle into I The battery must be connected.
the towing eye and tighten.
306
Practical advice
Fuses
I The engine and catalytic converter Transporting the vehicle Fuses
must be cold.
The towing eyes can be used to pull the
I Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at- vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for Notes on changing fuses
tempts. transporting purposes. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close
Vehicles with manual transmission ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the
or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such components on the circuit and their func-
E Turn the key to position 2 in the igni- as axle or steering components. The vehicle tions will fail.
tion lock. could otherwise be damaged.
i Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
E Shift to neutral. the same rating (which can be recognised by
Vehicles with manual transmission
E Tow the vehicle or let it roll. the colour and amperage) and which have the
E Shift to neutral. amperage specified in the fuse allocation chart.
E Shift to a suitable gear and bring the A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will be happy
clutch pedal up slowly. Do not depress Vehicles with automatic transmission* to advise you.
the accelerator pedal.
The engine is started.
E Turn the key to position 2 in the igni- G Risk of fire
tion lock.
Only use fuses that have been approved for
E Move the selector lever to N. Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
Removing the towing eye
correct amperage for the system con-
E Take the wheel wrench from the ve- cerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge
hicle tool kit (e page 223). faulty fuses. A circuit overload could other-
E Insert the wheel wrench handle into wise cause a fire. Have the cause traced
the towing eye and turn it anti-clock- and rectified at a qualified specialist work-
wise. shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
E Unscrew the towing eye.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have
E Replace the cover and press it until it the cause traced and rectified at a quali-
engages. fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- ee
E Return the towing eye and the wheel Benz Service Centre.
wrench to the vehicle tool kit.
307
Practical advice
Fuses
! Only use fuses that have been approved for Before changing a fuse E Fold cover 1 inwards until it engages.
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
E Park the vehicle. E Close the driver's door.
correct amperage for the system concerned.
Otherwise, components or systems could be E Switch off all electrical consumers.
damaged. Fuse box in the engine compartment
The fuses are located in various fuse E Make sure that the windscreen wipers
boxes: are turned off.
Fuse box in the dashboard*
I Fuse box under the dashboard* on the
driver's side
G Risk of injury
Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
I Fuse box in the engine compartment turned off and the key is pulled out of the
on the driver's side ignition lock before you open the cover of
I Fuse box in the boot on the right when the fuse box. Otherwise, the windscreen
viewed in the direction of travel wipers and their wiper rods above the cover
could be set in motion. This could lead to
Fuse allocation chart parts of the body being trapped by the wiper
rods.
The fuse allocation chart is located with
the vehicle tool kit (e page 223) in the
stowage well under the boot floor 1 Cover E To open: open the bonnet
(e page 181). The fuse amperage is also 2 To remove the cover (e page 195).
indicated here. 3 To release the cover
E To open: open the driver’s door.
E Pull out cover 1 slightly at the bottom
3.
E Pull cover 1 outwards and remove it
2.
E To close: clip in cover 1 at the front.
308
Practical advice
Fuses
Fuse box in the boot
E To open: open the boot lid.
1 Clamps
2 Line
E Remove moisture from the fuse box us- 1 Locking mechanism
ing a dry cloth. 2 Side trim
E Unclip line 2 from the cover. E Turn locking mechanism 1.
E Fold clamps 1 upwards. E Fold side trim 2 downwards.
E Lift off the fuse box cover towards the
front of the vehicle.
E To close: check whether the rubber
seal is lying correctly in the lid.
E Insert the lid into the retainer at the
rear of the fuse box.
E Press lid down and secure with clamps
1.
E Clip line 2 onto the cover.
E Close the bonnet (e page 195).
309
310
Technical data
Introduction to technical data . 312
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts . 313
Vehicle electronics . . . . . . . . . . 314
Vehicle identification plates . . 315
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Vehicle dimensions. . . . . . . . . . 324
Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Trailer tow hitch* . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Service products and capaci-
ties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
311
Technical data
Introduction to technical data
Introduction to technical data
The Technical data section contains the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
i The technical data was determined in ac-
cordance with EU directives. All data applies to
the vehicle's standard equipment. The data
may therefore differ for vehicles with optional
equipment. You can obtain further information
from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
You will find information about your vehicle's
noise in the vehicle documentation.
312
Technical data
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts I they cause a change of the vehicle type "Service Booklet" or on your vehicle's
from that for which the vehicle's gener- identification plates (e page 315).
Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and al operating permit was granted
conversion parts and accessories which
have been specifically approved for your I other road users could be endangered
vehicle for their reliability, safety and suit- I the emission or noise levels are ad-
ability. versely affected
Despite ongoing market research, The use of non-approved parts could affect
Mercedes-Benz is unable to evaluate other your vehicle's operating safety. Mercedes-
parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts Benz therefore recommends genuine
no responsibility for the use of such parts Mercedes-Benz parts and conversion parts
in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they and accessories that have been approved
have been independently or officially ap- for your vehicle.
proved.
In Germany and some other countries, cer- H Environmental note
tain parts are only officially approved for DaimlerChrysler also supplies reconditioned
installation or modification if they comply assemblies and parts which are of the same
with legal requirements. All genuine quality as new parts. These parts have the
Mercedes-Benz parts meet this require- same warranty as new parts.
ment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and ap-
Observe the suitability of replacement proved conversion parts and accessories
parts for your vehicle. In many countries, are available from Mercedes-Benz Service
certain parts which result in a modification Centres. There, you can also receive ad-
to the vehicle could invalidate the vehicle's vice about technical modifications and
general operating permit. This is the case have the parts professionally fitted.
if:
Always quote the vehicle identification
number and the engine number when or-
dering genuine parts. You will find these
numbers on the vehicle data card in the
313
Technical data
Vehicle electronics
Vehicle electronics Retrofitting electrical and electronic I they do not have an exterior aerial
equipment I the exterior aerial is not a low-reflection
Tampering with the engine elec- Electrical and electronic equipment can aerial
tronics jeopardise the operating safety of your ve- I the exterior aerial has been fitted incor-
hicle. If equipment of this kind is retrofit- rectly
G Risk of accident ted, it must be type-approved and bear the
e mark. The e mark may be obtained from
Only have work on the engine electronics
and related components carried out at a the equipment manufacturer or an author- G Risk of injury
qualified specialist workshop which has the ised testing centre. Excessive electromagnetic radiation may al-
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to ! Damage caused by or as a consequence of so cause damage to your health and the
carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz fitting equipment that is not approved by health of others. Using an exterior aerial
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz is not covered by the takes into account current scientific discus-
Service Centre for this purpose. In particu- Mercedes-Benz warranty. sions relating to the possible health hazards
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-re- that may result from electromagnetic fields.
lated systems must be carried out at a quali- If you wish to install two-way radios in the For this reason, only have the exterior aerial
fied specialist workshop. The vehicle's road- vehicle, you must obtain formal approval. fitted at a qualified specialist workshop
worthiness could otherwise be affected. Mercedes-Benz approves the installation which has the necessary specialist knowl-
of two-way radios if such equipment is in- edge and tools to carry out the work re-
stalled professionally and a low-reflection quired. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
! Only have work done on the engine elec- exterior aerial is used.
tronics and its associated parts, such as con- you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
trol units, sensors and connector leads, carried The transmission output of the two-way ra- this purpose. In particular, work relevant to
out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a dio must not exceed the maximum trans- safety or on safety-related systems must be
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Otherwise, ve- mission outputs listed. carried out at a qualified specialist work-
hicle components may wear more quickly and shop.
the warranty and vehicle's general operating G Risk of accident
permit may be invalidated.
Two-way radios may interfere with the ve- i To ensure optimum reception quality for
hicle electronics and thereby jeopardise the mobile phones and two-way radios in the ve-
operational safety of the vehicle and your hicle, and to minimise mutual influences be-
own safety if: tween the vehicle electronics and mobile
phones/two-way radios, Mercedes-Benz rec-
314
Technical data
Vehicle identification plates
ommends the use of approved exterior aerials. Vehicle identification plates
An attached exterior aerial has the effect that
the electromagnetic fields transmitted by a
wireless device are conducted to the exterior Vehicle identification plate with ve-
of the vehicle; the field strength within the vehicle identification number (VIN)
hicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that and paint code number
does not have an exterior aerial. The vehicle identification plate is located
Frequency range Maximum trans- on the side of the door frame on the front-
mission output passenger side.
(watts)
Short wave (< 50 100 Vehicle identification plate (example)
MHz) 1 Vehicle identification plate
4 m waveband 20 2 Vehicle manufacturer
3 EU type approval number
2 m waveband 50 4 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
70 cm waveband 35 5 Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight
25 cm waveband 10 6 Maximum permissible towing weight
7 Maximum permissible front axle load
! If electrical or electronic equipment which 1 Vehicle identification plate 8 Maximum permissible rear axle load
does not fulfil these conditions is retrofitted, 9 Paint code number
the vehicle's general operating permit may be E Open the driver's door.
invalidated (EU Directive 95/54/EC ‑ the Auto- You will see vehicle identification plate
motive EMC Directive). 1.
315
Technical data
Vehicle identification plates
Vehicle identification number (VIN) E Slide the front-passenger seat to its
rearmost position.
As well as being shown on the vehicle
identification plate, the vehicle identifica- E Fold cover 1 upwards.
tion number (VIN) is also stamped onto You will see vehicle identification num-
the vehicle body. It is located on the floor ber (VIN) 2.
in front of the front-passenger seat.
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the en-
gine block (crankcase). More information
can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
1 Cover
2 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
316
Technical data
Engine
Engine
C 200 C 280 C 350
Rated output 135 kW (184 bhp) 170 kW (231 bhp) 200 kW (272 bhp)
At engine speed 5,500 rpm 6,000 rpm 6,000 rpm
Rated torque 250 Nm 300 Nm 350 Nm
At engine speed 2,800 – 5,000 rpm 2,500 – 5,000 rpm 2,400 – 5,000 rpm
Number of cylinders 4 6 6
3 3
Displacement 1,796 cm 2,996 cm 3,498 cm3
Maximum engine speed 6450 rpm 6,500 rpm 6,500 rpm
C 220 CDI C 320 CDI

Rated output 125 kW (170 bhp) 165 kW (224 bhp)
At engine speed 3,800 rpm 3,800 rpm
Rated torque 400 Nm 510 Nm
At engine speed 2,000 rpm 1,600 – 2,800 rpm
Number of cylinders 4 6
3
Displacement 2,148 cm 2,987 cm3
Maximum engine speed 5,000 rpm 4,500 rpm
317
Technical data
Performance
Performance
Speeds
Manual transmission
Maximum speed C 200 C 280 C 220 CDI

1st gear 55 km/h 55 km/h 40 km/h
2nd gear 94 km/h 94 km/h 71 km/h
3rd gear 138 km/h 138 km/h 113 km/h
4th gear 192 km/h 192 km/h 161 km/h
Automatic transmission
Maximum speed C 200 C 280 C 350 C 220 CDI C 320 CDI

230 km/h 246 km/h 250 km/h 228 km/h 250 km/h
318
Technical data
Tyres and wheels
Acceleration from 0 to 100 km/h
C 200 C 280 C 350
6-speed manual transmission 8.6 seconds 7.3 seconds -
5-speed automatic transmis- 8.8 seconds - -
sion*
7-speed automatic transmis- - 7.2 seconds 6.4 seconds
sion*
C 220 CDI C 320 CDI

6-speed manual transmission 8.5 seconds -
5-speed automatic transmission* 8.5 seconds -
7-speed automatic transmission* - 6.8 seconds
Tyres and wheels If you use other tyres, Mercedes-Benz cannot tact with the bodywork and axle components.
accept any responsibility for damage which This could result in damage to the tyres or the
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- may occur. Information about tyres can be ob- vehicle.
mends that you only use tyres which have been
tained from any Mercedes-Benz Service i Further information about tyres and wheels
approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for
Centre. can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz
your vehicle. These tyres are specially adapted
for use with the control systems, such as ABS ! If you fit tyres other than those tested and Service Centre.
or ESP®, and are marked as follows: recommended by Mercedes-Benz, characteris- You will find a table of tyre pressures on the in-
tics such as handling, noise levels and fuel con- side of your vehicle's fuel filler flap . You will
I MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
sumption, etc. may be adversely affected. In find further information about tyre pressures in
I MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended addition, when driving with a load, dimensional the "Operation" section (e page 203).
(with run-flat characteristics) variations and different tyre deformation char-
acteristics could cause the tyres to make con-
319
Technical data
Tyres and wheels
Tyres
Standard tyres
C 200 / 220 CDI C 280 C 350 / C 320 CDI

Both axles
Summer tyres 205/55 R16 91V 205/55 R16 91V -
Winter tyres 205/55 R16 91H M+S 205/55 R16 91H M+S -
Wheels 7J x 16 H2 ET 43 7J x 16 H2 ET 43 -
Both axles
Summer tyres 225/50 R16 92V 225/50 R16 92V -
Winter tyres 225/50 R16 92H M+S 225/50 R16 92H M+S -
Wheels 7.5J x 16 H2 ET 53 7.5J x 16 H2 ET 53 -
Both axles
Summer tyres 225/45 R17 91W 225/45 R17 91W 225/45 R17 91W
Winter tyres 225/45 R17 91H M+S 225/45 R17 91H M+S 225/45 R17 91H M+S
Light-alloy wheels 7.5J x 17 H2 ET 47 7.5J x 17 H2 ET 47 7.5J x 17 H2 ET 47
320
Technical data
Tyres and wheels
Tyre mix
All models
Front axle
Summer tyres 225/45 R17 91W
Light-alloy wheels 7.5J x 17 H2 ET 47
Rear axle
Summer tyres 18 245/40 R17 91W
18 Snow chains not permitted.
AMG equipment*
All models
Front axle
Summer tyres 225/45 R 17 94Y XL
19
Rear axle
Front axle ee
321
Technical data
Tyres and wheels
All models
Light-alloy wheels 8J x 18 H2 ET 50
19
Rear axle
19 Use of snow chains not possible.
Sports package*
All models
Front axle
Summer tyres 225/45 R17 91W
Summer tyres 225/45 R17 91W MOExtended
Rear axle
Summer tyres 245 / 40 R17 91W20
Summer tyres 245/40 R17 91W MOExtended20
322
Technical data
Tyres and wheels
MOExtended tyres*
i Tyres with run-flat characteristics, only in
conjunction with light-alloy wheels.
All models
Front axle
Summer tyres 225/45 R17 91W MOExtended
Rear axle
Summer tyres 21 245/40 R17 91W MOExtended
Wheels 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 58
Both axles
Winter tyres 225/45 R17 91H M+S MOExtended
Spare wheel*
Your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT, a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* or a spare wheel* depending on the country, the
engine and the wheels fitted.
C 200 / C 220 CDI / C 280 C 350 / C 320 CDI
22 ee
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel*
Tyres T 125/90 R16 99M T 125/80 R17 99M
323
Technical data
Vehicle dimensions
C 200 / C 220 CDI / C 280 C 350 / C 320 CDI
Tyre pressure 4.2 bar 4.2 bar
Wheels 3.5B x 16 ET 20 3.5B x 17 ET 20
22 Use of snow chains not possible.
Vehicle dimensions
C 200 C 280 C 350 C 220 CDI C 320 CDI
Vehicle length (ECE) 4,581 mm 4,581 mm 4,581 mm 4,581 mm 4,581 mm
Vehicle width 1,770 mm 1,770 mm 1,770 mm 1,770 mm 1,770 mm
23
Vehicle height 1,444 mm 1,444 mm 1,448 mm 1,444 mm 1,448 mm
Wheelbase 2,760 mm 2,760 mm 2,760 mm 2,760 mm 2,760 mm
23 Ready to drive.
324
Technical data
Vehicle weights
Vehicle weights
The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase
the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload.
C 200 C 280 C 350 C 220 CDI C 320 CDI
Unladen weight (in accordance 1,490 kg 1555 kg 1,610 kg 1,585 kg 1700 kg
with EC Directive)
Maximum permissible gross 1,975 kg 2040 kg 2095 kg 2070 kg 2,185 kg
vehicle weight
Maximum permissible front 945 kg 985 kg 1,020 kg 995 kg 1,070 kg
axle load
Maximum permissible rear 1,060 kg 1,085 kg 1,105 kg 1,105 kg 1,145 kg
axle load
Towing a trailer 1,100 kg 1,125 kg 1,145 kg 1,145 kg 1,185 kg
Maximum roof load 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg
Maximum luggage compart- 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg
ment load
325
Technical data
Trailer tow hitch*
Trailer tow hitch*
Mounting dimensions
G Risk of accident
Only have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted at a
qualified specialist workshop which has the
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-re-
lated systems must be carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,

changes to the cooling system may be neces-
sary, depending on the vehicle type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, ob- Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch
serve the anchorage points on the chassis 1 Anchorage points
frame. 2 Overhang dimension
3 Rear axle centre line
For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory,
the overhang dimension is 1,151.3 mm.
326
Technical data
Service products and capacities
Trailer loads
C 200 C 280 C 350 C 220 CDI C 320 CDI
Permissible trailer load, un- 745 kg 750 kg 750 kg 750 kg 750 kg
braked24
Permissible trailer load, braked24 1,800 kg 1,800 kg 1,800 kg 1,800 kg 1,800 kg
25
Maximum drawbar noseweight 75 kg 75 kg 75 kg 75 kg 75 kg
24 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill.
25 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.
Service products and capacities I parts and service products are

matched
G Risk of injury
When handling, storing and disposing of any
Notes on service products and ca- I damage caused by the use of non-ap- service products, please observe the rele-
pacities proved service products is not covered vant regulations, as you could otherwise en-
Service products are: by the warranty danger yourself and others.
I Fuels (e.g. petrol, diesel) You can recognise service products ap- Keep service products away from children.
proved by Mercedes-Benz by the "MB-Frei- To protect your health, do not allow service
I Lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmis- gabe XXX.XX" or "MB-Approval XXX.XX" in- products to come into contact with your
sion oil, grease) scriptions on their labels. Other designa- eyes or open wounds. See a doctor immedi-
I Coolant tions or recommendations that only relate ately if any service product is swallowed.
to a level of quality or a specification in ac-
I Brake fluid
cordance with XXX.XX have not necessa-
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only rily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. H Environmental note
use those products which have been
You can obtain further information from Dispose of service products in an environ-
tested and specially approved by
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. mentally-responsible manner.
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle and are
listed in the Mercedes-Benz Owner's Man-
ual in the relevant chapter since:
327
Technical data
Fuels ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a I Urban driving conditions are simulated
petrol engine. Never mix petrol with diesel. by frequent pulling away and stopping.
G Risk of explosion Even small amounts of diesel result in damage
I Common extra-urban driving conditions
to the injection system. Damage caused by
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames adding diesel is not covered by the warranty. are simulated by accelerating from 0 to
and smoking are therefore prohibited when 120 km/h using all gears.
handling fuels. More information about refuelling and
fuels can be found in the “Operation” sec-
I Overall fuel consumption is calculated
Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heat- using a weighting of approximately 37%
ing* before refuelling. tion (e page 193).
for urban driving and approximately
63% for extra-urban driving.
Fuel consumption
G Risk of injury
The vehicle will use more fuel than usual
i The actual consumption values of your ve-
hicle may deviate from the values given de-
Do not allow fuel to come into contact with in the following situations: pending on:
skin or clothing. I At very low temperatures I driving style
Allowing fuels to come into direct contact
with your skin or inhaling fuel vapours is I In urban traffic I road and traffic conditions
damaging to your health. I On short trips I environmental influences
I When towing a trailer I the vehicle's operating state
Tank capacity I In mountainous terrain Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
The consumption figures were determined vehicles to the state of the art. Consump-
Total capacity 66 l tion values are subject to change and may
in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268
of which reserve 8l /EEC under the following test conditions: therefore differ from those listed in this
fuel Owner's Manual, which were correct at
the time of going to print. The current con-
! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a sumption values may be found in the COC
diesel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. documents (EC CERTIFICATE OF CON-
Even small amounts of petrol result in damage FORMITY). These documents are supplied
to the injection system. Damage caused by when the vehicle is delivered.
adding petrol is not covered by the warranty.
328
Technical data
! Do not use any special fuel additives, as related to fuel consumption and therefore You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis-
they can lead to increased wear and damage to depend on: sions by driving carefully and having it serv-
the engine. If you use special fuel additives this I efficient use of the fuel by the engine iced regularly.
will limit your warranty entitlement.
I driving style
Fuel consumption in accordance with
H Environmental note I other non-technical factors, such as en-
Directive 80/1268/EEC
vironmental influences or road condi-
CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-
tions The information does not refer to a single
tists believe to be principally responsible for
global warming (the greenhouse effect). vehicle, but is to be used to compare the
Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly different vehicle types.
Manual transmission C 20026 C 28026 C 220 CDI26

Urban
Extra-urban
Overall (NEDC) 7.9 l/100 km 9.4 l/100 km 6.1 l/100 km
CO2 emissions 188 g/km 223 g/km 160 g/km
26 Missing values were not available at time of printing.
Automatic transmission C 20027 C 28027 C 35027

Urban
Extra-urban
Overall (NEDC) 8.2 l/100 km 9.4 l/100 km 9.7 l/100 km
CO2 emissions 194 g/km 225 g/km 232 g/km
ee
329
Technical data
Automatic transmission C 220 CDI28 C 320 CDI28
Urban
Extra-urban
Overall (NEDC) 6.7 l/100 km
CO2 emissions 177 g/km
Engine oil
A list of engine oils that have been tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products is
available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Approval by Mercedes-Benz is also often indicated with the MB sheet number on
the oil container. The table shows which MB sheet number applies to which engine:
C 200 C 280 C 350
MB sheet number 229.5 229.5 229.5
C 220 CDI C 320 CDI

MB sheet number 228.51/229.31/229.51 228.51/229.31/229.51
! Do not use lubricant additives, since they ! Engine oils for vehicles without a diesel
lead to increased wear and damage to the me- particle filter may also be used temporarily in
chanical assemblies. The use of lubricant addi- vehicles with a diesel particle filter if the engine
tives limits warranty claims. oil listed is not available (228.3/229.3/229.5).
You must then have an oil change carried out
as soon as possible.
330
Technical data
Capacities
The following values indicate the various total engine capacities.
Engine with oil fil- C 200 C 280 C 350 C 220 CDI C 320 CDI
ter
Replacement 5.5 l 8.0 l 8.0 l 6.5 l 8.5 l
amount
Engine oil viscosity year. The following table shows you the Transmission oil
viscosity classes to be used depending on
Viscosity is the property of a fluid which al- Only use approved passenger car trans-
the average air temperature. The tempera-
lows it to resist deformation. mission oil according to sheet 231.1 of
ture limits are only guidelines and the ac-
the Mercedes-Benz Specification for
Viscosity also describes the flow charac- tual temperature may briefly exceed or
Service Products. Observe Specifications
teristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a drop below them.
for Service Products sheets 235.10,
high viscosity, it means that it is thick; a
236.10 and 236.12, depending on the
low viscosity means that it is thin. Temper-
transmission. A list of transmission oils
ature has a strong influence on the viscos-
which have been tested and approved in
ity of a fluid. As temperature increases,
accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Spec-
viscosity reduces significantly; when tem-
ifications for Service Products is available
perature decreases, viscosity increases
from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
disproportionately (log. course).
The correct engine oil viscosity must be
! Do not use lubricant additives, since they
lead to increased wear and damage to the me-
selected so that the engine can be started chanical assemblies. The use of lubricant addi-
and oil supplied to all lubrication points in tives limits warranty claims.
cold weather, with a cohesive lubrication
film still guaranteed at high temperatures.
Select the SAE classification (viscosity) of
the engine oil according to the time of
331
Technical data
Coolant The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concen-
tration in the cooling system should:
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the I be at least 50%. This will protect the
following tasks in the cooling system: cooling system against freezing down
to around -37 °C.
I Anti-corrosion protection
I not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
I Antifreeze protection down to -45 °C), otherwise heat will
I Raising the boiling point not be effectively dissipated.
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is top- If the vehicle is losing coolant, top it up
ped up with a coolant that will ensure adequate with equal amounts of water and anti-
antifreeze and corrosion protection. freeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz
! Only top up with coolant that has been pre- recommends an antifreeze/corrosion in-
mixed with the desired quantity of antifreeze hibitor which has been approved for
protection. Mercedes-Benz.
You could otherwise damage the engine. There ! The cooling system contains a lifetime sup-
is more information about coolant and topping ply which must be renewed after 15 years, or
it up on Mercedes-Benz Specifications for after 250,000 km at the latest. Have the re-
Service Products sheet 310.1. newal confirmed in the Service Booklet.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even The lifetime warranty is only valid if you top up
in countries where high temperatures prevail. with an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which
Otherwise, the cooling system will not be suffi- has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
ciently protected from corrosion, and the boil-
ing point will be too low.
If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present
in the correct concentration, the boiling
point of the coolant will be around 130 °
C.
332
Technical data
Capacities
The following values indicate the total cooling system capacities.
C 200 C 280 C 350 C 220 CDI C 320 CDI
Coolant 3.8 l 4.8 l 4.8 l 6l 5.7 l
Amount of antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor required for antifreeze protection
Down to -37 °C (ap- 1.9 l 2.4 l 2.4 l 3l 2.9 l
proximately 50%)
Down to -45 °C (ap- 2.1 l 2.7 l 2.7 l 3.3 l 3.1 l
proximately 55%)
Brake fluid fluid concentrate. Adapt the mixing ra-

Over a period of time, the brake fluid ab- i There is usually a notice in the engine com- tio to the outside temperatures.
partment to remind you when the next brake The windscreen wipers leave no marks.
sorbs moisture from the air; this lowers its
fluid change is due. The headlamp cleaning system* and
boiling point.
the windscreen washer system do not
G Risk of accident Windscreen washer system freeze.
The washer fluid reservoir holds approxi-
If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too
low, vapour pockets may form in the brake mately 4.0 litres. G Risk of fire
system when the brakes are applied hard Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
The headlamp cleaning system* and the
(e.g. when driving downhill). This would im- flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking
windscreen washer system have a com-
pair braking efficiency. are prohibited when windscreen washer
mon supply from the washer fluid reser- concentrate is being handled.
Have the brake fluid renewed every two voir.
years with a brake fluid that has been ap-
proved by Mercedes-Benz and have this E Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a sol-
confirmed in the Service Booklet. ution of water and windscreen washer
333
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about DaimlerChrysler AG
can be found on the Internet on the follow-
ing websites:
www.mercedes-benz.com
www.daimlerchrysler.com
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries
or suggestions you may have regarding
this Owner's Manual to the technical docu-
mentation team at the following address:
DaimlerChrysler AG, HPC: R822, D–70546
Stuttgart, Germany
As at: 28.12.2006
Not to be reprinted, translated or other-
wise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from
DaimlerChrysler AG.

É2045840481Z102:ËÍ
2045840481Z102
Order no. 6515 0621 02 Part no. 204 584 04 81 Z102 Edition NA 2007/03 b EN

C220 Owners Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C220 Owners Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

C220 Owners Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner's Manual

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Practical advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

7 Air distribution Anti-lock braking system

Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . 112 Belt tensioners Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Display message (multi-function

Daytime driving lamps Display message (multi-function Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Emergency engine starting . . . . . . . 306 Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Folding in (on-board computer,

Front foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 285 Fuse box Heating

Locking Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Modifying the programming

NECK-PRO head restraint . . . . . . . . . 56 Standard display menu . . . . . . . . . 123 Parking lock

PRESAFE® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Rear foglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 285 Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Route guidance Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Spare wheel

Standard display Submenu (luxury multi-function Technical data

Thermotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Tow-away protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Trip computer

Tyres W Windows misted up

• Speedtronic* 143 b Ignition lock 82 f Opens the bonnet 195

3 Instrument cluster 28 KEYLESS GO button* 82 g Parking brake 111

5 Horn d Adjusts the steering wheel 89 j Light switch 97

Vehicles with multi-function steering wheel (4 buttons)

2 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the speed in

Vehicles with multi-function steering wheel (4 buttons)

4 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the speed in

s Accepts a call & Right

t Ends a call ( Left

F Mute # Selection and mes-

i The layout of the buttons may differ de-

i The layout of the buttons may differ de-

8 Map pocket Cup holder in the centre 177

G Risk of injury Windowbags

If the NECK-PRO head restraints are trig-

Example of an approval label on the child

Recommended child restraint systems

ISOFIX* child seat securing system

G Risk of injury Always have child restraint systems and

E Lock the vehicle with the key or, if the

1 To deactivate the interior motion sen-

Opening automatically from the out-

1 Release catch 1 Seat heating

1 Steering column height

The mirrors are automatically heated 1 Left-hand exterior mirror

0 Front seats occupied

Convenience closing E Point the tip of the key at the driver's

Engaging reverse gear

è 8 Time and date (e page 124) I Adjusts

You can reset the following functions:

Storing the current speed To select the current or last stored

Reverse gear Rear and front areas

You can allow the air-conditioning system

i The rear window heating has a high current

Cup holder G Risk of accident

1 Cover 1 Right-hand button E Fold down the rear seat armrest.

Symmetrical dipped beam

1 Connector with lug

Cleaning the engine compartment